Precast Handbook

06/09
Miscellaneous Products
Product Page Askew Head Bolt. .................................122 Bar Supports - Plastic....................158-160 Bar Supports - Metal. ...........................161 Bar-Lock Coupler System.....................120 Cap Plug..............................................107 Ceiling Hangers. ...................................165 Chemical & Cement Products.......153-157 Coil Bolt.................................................89 Coil Loop Insert. .....................................90 Coil Nut. .................................................88 Coil Rod.................................................88 Coil Tie...................................................87 Corewall Slotted Insert Nut Type. ....................................124-126 Corewall Slotted Insert P-38..............127 Corewall Slotted Strap Type..............128 Countersunk Screw................................43 Custom Forms. .....................................157 Delta Tie. .......................................135-138 Disposable 7.5T Void Former.................84 Double Flared Coil Loop Insert. ..............92 Double Flared Loop Insert. .....................90 Double Swivel Lifting Plate..................102 Double Tee Anchor. ................................84 Dowel Bar Splicer System. ....................119 Ductile Embed Insert. ...........................109 Dur-O-Web Shear Reinforcement....................130-131 Edge Lifting Plate. ................................103 End Pickup Insert...................................98 End Pickup Inserts. ...............................100 Expanded Coil Ferrule Inserts. ..............110 Expanded Coil Inserts. ............................95 Eye Bolts................................................93 Eye Nut..................................................93 Ferrule Loop Insert...............................112 Flared Thin Slab Coil Insert. ....................96 Flared Thin Slab Ferrule Insert . ...........111 Flat Washer............................................88 Fleet Patch.............................................77 Fleet-Lift Cable Bail Ring Clutch.............49 Fleet-Lift Cast Steel Recess Plug.............71 Fleet-Lift Disposable Recess Plug (PVC). .............................73-76 Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with 45 Head with Shear Plate. ............62 Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with Shear Plate and Shear Pin..............54 Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with Shear Plate. ....................................52 Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor......................50 Fleet-Lift FE Forged Erection Anchor. .....56 Fleet Lift FEW Forged Erection Anchor. ..57 Fleet-Lift Flat Foot Anchor. .....................66 Fleet-Lift H-Anchor 2-Ton.......................64 Fleet-Lift Holding Plate. ..........................69 Fleet-Lift Holding Rod............................69
Product Page Fleet-Lift L-Anchor. .................................63 Fleet-Lift Magnetic Plate........................78 Fleet-Lift Plate Anchor. ...........................66 Fleet-Lift Reusable Recess Plug. ..............69 Fleet-Lift Ring Clutch. .............................48 Fleet-Lift S-Anchor 6-Ton. .......................65 Fleet-Lift Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor with Shear Plate..........60 Fleet-Lift Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor.....................................60 Fleet-Lift Shear Bar. ................................68 Fleet-Lift T-Anchor.................................63 Fleet-Lift Tension Bar..............................68 Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Anchor. ....................67 Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Erection Anchor with Shear Plate. ....................................58 Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Erection Anchor. ......58 Formliners............................................150 General and Technical Information.....3-18 Grout Sleeve........................................119 Hanger Hook. .......................................122 Hanger Insert.......................................122 Headed Dowel Bar Insert.....................117 Heavy Coil Nut.......................................88 Helical Anchors....................................148 Insert Locator Plugs.............................102 Korolath Core Plugs.............................162 Lifting Angle..........................................99 Loop Ferrule Insert...............................105 "M" Anchor Shear Connector...............140 Magnets. ..............................................168 Magnetic Steel Chamfer......................168 Modular Forms....................................169 Mounting Washers ...............................87 Nylon Threaded Inserts.........................116 Panel Pads............................................158 Pipe Brace Extension..............................45 Pipe Laying Sling....................................44 Pipe Turning System. ..............................43 Plain Ferrule.........................................106 Plastic Base Fleet Inserts. ........................65 Plastic Mesh Spacer.............................158 Plastic Setting Bolt.................................99 Precast Sandwich Panel Tie..................140 Precast Bracing.............................145-149 Prestress Pumps, Jacks and Chucks. .....143 Reglet. ..................................................166 Reusable Recess Plug.............................84 Reveals.................................................151 Rocket/Kohler Ferrule Insert.................107 Sandwich Panel Reinforcing Bars...........61 Shear-Grip Flange Connector........128-129 Shelf Angle Inserts........................121-122 Shim Strips. ...................................163-164 Single Flared Coil Loop Insert. ................91 Single Pickup Insert. ...............................97
Product Page Slotted Setting Studs.............................99 Spray Adhesive....................................167 Star Adapter Plug................................115 Star Holzin Insert..............................115 Star Insert.........................................114 Strand Restraining Devices. ..................144 Superior Lift System...............................67 Swift Lift Anchor in Thin Walls. ..............31 Swift Lift Anchor....................................26 Swift Lift Anchor w/ Washer..................29 Swift Lift Anchors for Edge Lifting. ........29 Swift Lift Eye Anchor.............................36 Swift Lift Lifting Eye...............................23 Swift Lift Magnetic Setting Plate...........42 Swift Lift Narrow Recess Plug................39 Swift Lift Pipe Turning System...............43 Swift Lift Pipe Laying Sling. ....................44 Swift Lift Plus Holding Plate. ..................42 Swift Lift Plus Holding Stud...................41 Swift Lift Plus Recess Plug......................40 Swift Lift Plus Stud Plate........................42 Swift Lift Plus Threaded Plate................42 Swift Lift Plus Wing Nut. ........................41 Swift Lift Rubber Ring............................40 Swift Lift Setting Plate...........................41 Swift Lift Shear Bar................................30 Swift Lift Smooth Wire Shear Bar..........30 Swift Lift Steel Recess Plug....................40 Swift Lift Stud........................................41 Swift Lift Tapped Plate...........................42 Swift Lift Tension Bar.............................37 Swift Lift Throw-Away Recess Plug........38 Swift Lift Universal Lifting Eye...............21 Swift Lift Wing Nut................................41 Swivel Lifting Plate. ..............................102 Thin Slab Coil Insert...............................94 Thin Slab Ferrule Insert........................106 Thin Slab Ferrule Insert........................108 Threaded Insert. ...................................105 Threaded Plastic Plug...........................113 Threaded Setting Plug.........................113 Type L Coil Insert....................................96 Type L Connector Pin ..........................139 Type M Connector Pin..........................139 Utility Anchor Cover/Patch.....................81 Utility Anchor Holding Plate..................82 Utility Anchor Holding Rod....................82 Utility Anchor Magnetic Setting Plate. ...82 Utility Anchor Setting Plugs...................81 Utility Anchor System............................79 Utility Anchor. ........................................80 Utility Anchor w/ Clip.............................80 Victory Bear Chamfers.........................152 Void Hold Down..................................162 Washers for Shelf Angle Inserts...........122 Wire Rope Lifting System. ......................85
Sandwich Panel Connectors
Miscellaneous Connection Inserts
Structural Connectors
Lifting/Handling Inserts and Accessories
Utility Anchor Lifting System
Fleet-Lift System
Swift Lift System
General and Technical Information
Index
Index
Item Page Item................................................. Page
P-11 .................................................128-129 P-12-D . ............................................130-131 P-14 ....................................................... 139 P-15 ........................................................ 139 P-21 .......................................................... 93 P-24 .................................................135-138 P-25........................................................... 99 P-30 .................................................124-125 P-31 ................................................ 124, 126 P-32 ........................................................ 126 P-33 ........................................................ 126 P-34 ........................................................ 126 P-37......................................................... 140 P-49........................................................... 88 P-50........................................................... 21 P-51........................................................... 23 P-52 .................................................... 26, 31 P-52-W ...................................................... 29 P-53 .......................................................... 36 P-54 .......................................................... 38 P-56 .......................................................... 39 P-56-PL. ...................................................... 40 P-57 .......................................................... 40 P-58 .......................................................... 40 P-59 .......................................................... 30 P-60 .......................................................... 37 P-61 .......................................................... 41 P-62 .......................................................... 41 P-63 .......................................................... 41 P-63-PL . .................................................... 41 P-64 .......................................................... 41 P-64-PL . .................................................... 41 P-66 .......................................................... 42 P-66-PL . .................................................... 42 P-67-PL . .................................................... 42 P-68-PL . .................................................... 42 P-69 .......................................................... 42 P-74 .......................................................... 43 P-74-S ....................................................... 44 P-75-C........................................................ 80 P-75-H ....................................................... 80 P-75 .......................................................... 80 P-76 .................................................... 81, 84 P-76-C ....................................................... 81 P-76-D........................................................ 81 P-76-M....................................................... 82 P-77........................................................... 84 P-80......................................................... 163 P-81......................................................... 163 P-82......................................................... 164 P-83......................................................... 164 P-86 ........................................................ 114 P-87 ........................................................ 115 P-88 ........................................................ 115 P-90 ........................................................ 116 P-91-S ....................................................... 48 P-91-NC .................................................... 49
Item
Page
A-97......................................................... 169 B-1 ............................................................ 87 B-2 ............................................................ 87 B-11 .......................................................... 88 B-12........................................................... 88 B-13 .......................................................... 88 B-14 .......................................................... 89 B-16 .......................................................... 90 B-17 .......................................................... 90 B-18 .......................................................... 91 B-25 .......................................................... 88 B-33 .......................................................... 92 D-108-A .................................................. 117 D-119 . .............................................119-120 F-5 . ......................................................... 105 F-7 . ..................................................121-122 F-8 . ......................................................... 121 F-9 . ......................................................... 122 F-11 ........................................................ 122 F-12 ........................................................ 122 F-42 ........................................................ 105 F-43 ........................................................ 106 F-44 ........................................................ 106 F-45 ........................................................ 107 F-47 .......................................................... 92 F-48 .......................................................... 93 F-49 .......................................................... 93 F-49-A ....................................................... 93 F-50 ........................................................ 107 F-52 ........................................................ 108 F-53 .......................................................... 94 F-54 ........................................................ 109 F-56 .......................................................... 95 F-57 ........................................................ 110 F-58 .......................................................... 95 F-59 ........................................................ 110 F-60 .......................................................... 95 F-61 ........................................................ 110 F-62 ........................................................ 111 F-63 .......................................................... 96 F-64 ........................................................ 112 F-65 .......................................................... 96 F-67. ......................................................... 165 F-68. ......................................................... 165 F-69. ......................................................... 165 F-72 ........................................................ 113 F-74 ........................................................ 113 F-75. ......................................................... 165 H-13......................................................... 162 K-50......................................................... 162 P-8-P........................................................ 157 P-8-A........................................................ 157 P-8-B........................................................ 157 P-8-M....................................................... 157 P-9 .......................................................... 140
P-92 .......................................................... 50 P-92-AH .................................................... 62 P-92-DP...................................................... 54 P-92-FE. ...................................................... 56 P-92-FEW................................................... 57 P-92-H ....................................................... 58 P-92-HP...................................................... 58 P-92-P ....................................................... 52 P-92-S ....................................................... 60 P-92-SP. ...................................................... 60 P-93 .......................................................... 63 P-94 .......................................................... 63 P-94-H ....................................................... 64 P-94-S ....................................................... 65 P-95-F ....................................................... 66 P-95-P ....................................................... 66 P-96 .......................................................... 67 P-98-S ....................................................... 68 P-98-T . ...................................................... 68 P-99 .......................................................... 69 P-99-C ....................................................... 71 P-99-D . ..................................................... 76 P-99-P ....................................................... 77 P-100 .................................................. 69, 82 P-100-M .................................................... 78 P-100-MS .................................................. 78 P-101 ........................................................ 69 P-101 ........................................................ 82 P-102......................................................... 78 P-104................................................... 78, 82 P-110......................................................... 85 P-153....................................................... 168 P-154....................................................... 168 T-1 .................................................... 97, 149 T-3 ............................................................ 98 T-3-A ......................................................... 98 T-7-S ......................................................... 99 T-7-ST . ...................................................... 99 T-8 ............................................................ 99 T-10 ........................................................ 100 T-11 ........................................................ 100 T-12 .................................................102-103 T-14. ......................................................... 145 T-15. ........................................................... 45 T-16. ......................................................... 149 T-17. ......................................................... 149 T-17-HD. ................................................... 149 T-19. ........................................................... 58 T-21 ........................................................ 102 T-26 .................................................102-103 T-27 ........................................................ 103 T-41 .......................................................... 65 T-68. ......................................................... 167 T-101. ........................................................... 6
Fleet-Lift System
Swift Lift System
06/09
Safety Notes and Product Application

In the continuous development of hardware for the precast industry, Dayton Superior places great emphasis on ensuring that material supplied from its manufacturing plants meets or exceeds safety requirements for lifting, handling and connecting precast concrete elements. Dayton Superior and/or independent testing laboratories have conducted tests on products shown in this handbook. The safe working loads listed were determined from these tests and were established with the following factors in mind: 1) All safe working loads shown are based on the item being new or in as new condition. 2) No loads greater than the products safe working load. 3) All inserts properly embedded and firmly fixed in place in sound, normal weight concrete so that the vertical axis of the insert is perpendicular to the lifting surface. 4) All bolted hardware has full bearing on the concrete surface and all attachment bolts bear fully on the hardware. Do not subject hardware to side loading that will cause additional and unintended loading. 5) Erection and attachment bolts are of proper length and are well tightened to prevent hardware slippage and bolt bending. 6) Coil bolts have at least the specified minimum penetration through the insert coil, but do not bear on concrete at the bottom of the void. 7) Concrete compressive strength (fc) at time of initial use is at least the strength listed in the appropriate insert selection chart. I nserts are properly located in relation to edges, corners and openings and at a proper distance to permit the 8) development of a full concrete shear cone. Refer to the minimum edge distances shown in the appropriate insert selection chart. 9) Tensile load on the insert has been calculated, including the effect of both axial and transverse loads, as transmitted by the crane lines to the hardware. 10) No impact wrenches will be used to tighten bolts used for lifting, handling, transporting, connecting or bracing. 11) All zinc plated medium-high carbon, or high carbon steel items have been properly baked to relieve embrittlement. Not doing so may result in premature failure. 12) There has been no welding on any portion of an insert or to lifting hardware units after they have left a Dayton Superior manufacturing plant. Welding may cause embrittlement, which can result in a premature failure. Welding requires a good working knowledge of materials, heat treatment and welding procedures. Since Dayton Superior cannot control field conditions or workmanship, Dayton Superior DOES NOT GUARANTEE any product altered in any way after leaving the factory.
Safety Factors
A safety factor applied to a particular product is a variable, depending on the degree of hazard or risk involved in the application of that product. In precast concrete construction various conditions can often increase loading, as well as the degree of risk involved. Adhesion of the concrete element to the form, jerking of the crane during lifting, use of a crane not adequate for the job, bouncing the precast element after it has been lifted, handling the element more than anticipated, transporting over rough surfaces, etc., all have high risk factors. In cases such as these, the user should increase the safety factor accordingly. Dayton Superior recommends that the following minimum safety factors be used when determining a products safe working load and that the provisions of OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration Act, Part 1910) be strictly followed when considering safety factors:
Safety Factor
2 to 1 3 to 1 4 to 1 5 to 1
Intended Use of Product

Brace Anchors Permanent Connections Inserts used for lifting and handling Hardware used for lifting and handling
If a different safety factor from one shown in this handbook is required for any reason, the following equation is used to increase or reduce a safe working load: Old Safe Working Load x Old Safety Factor New Safety Factor
New Safe Working Load =
Warning: New safe working load must not exceed the products mechanical capacity divided by the new safety factor.
06/09

USERS OF Dayton Superior PRODUCTS MUST EVALUATE THE PRODUCT APPLICATION, CALCULATE INDUCED LOADS, DETERMINE NECESSARY SAFETY FACTORS, CALCULATE SAFE WORKING LOADS AND CONTROL ALL FIELD CONDITIONS TO PREVENT APPLICATION OF LOADS IN EXCESS OF THE SAFE WORKING LOAD.
Factors Affecting the Load-Carrying Capacity of an Insert

Attachment Bolt and Hardware Considerations:
The selection of an attachment bolt diameter will depend upon the job the bolt is required to do. If, for instance, bolts are to be used repeatedly and are subject to tension and shear, choose a bolt at least one size larger in diameter than static loading conditions would require. Since coil bolts are not intended for bending loads, care must be taken to be sure that the bolts are properly tightened. Bolt failures are generally caused by excessive thread wear, field modification, or bending and/or straightening of bolts. It is the responsibility of the user to continually inspect bolts and working hardware for wear and discard the parts when wear is noted. Do not straighten bent bolts, discard and replace them. Also, any bolts known to have been used at loads of 70%, or more, of ultimate strength should be removed from service and discarded. Such bolts may have been stretched sufficiently to become brittle-hard and could lead to premature failure of the bolts. Every user must establish a control program to replace attachment bolts after a predetermined number of uses, regardless of their appearance. Lifting hardware shown in this handbook is subject to wear, misuse, overloading, corrosion, deformation, intentional alteration and other factors that could affect the hardwares safe working load. Therefore, the user must inspect the condition of the hardware units regularly to determine if they can be used at their rated safe working load. If not, they must be removed from service. The frequency of inspection is best determined by the user and is dependent upon factors such as frequency of use, period of use and environmental conditions.
The Mechanical Strength of the Insert

Lifting inserts/anchors displayed in this handbook are fabricated from carbon steel that has sufficient strength to safely carry the specified safe working loads. Many of the inserts/anchors herein can be special ordered, fabricated from stainless steel material. When an insert is fabricated from stainless steel, it may have a lower safe working load than the safe working load published for the corresponding carbon steel insert. Contact a Dayton Superior Technical Services Department for safe working loads of inserts fabricated from stainless steel.
06/09
When a load is applied to an insert embedded in concrete, it induces a corresponding resistive force in the concrete. Insert failures can be predicted with a reasonable degree of accuracy by using the following equation for concretereakout from ACI 318 Appendix D. f ' c = Compressive strength of the concrete at time of lift Tension Safe Working Load = j c,N x l x 24 x f'c x h ef 1.5 l j c,N Appropriate Safety Factor
The Strength of the Concrete
= Reduction factor for use with lightweight concrete, see page 6; = Factor for cracked concrete: 1.0 if cracked and 1.25 if uncracked.
P concrete Concrete Surface
Surface Area of Theoretical Shear Cone 35
h ef
Illustration A1 For inserts located near an edge preventing development of a full shear cone please contact a Dayton Superior Technical Services Department for insert capabilities.
dh
P concrete
Concrete Surface
Surface Area of Theoretical Shear Cone 35
h ef
Illustration A2
dh
Warning! Adding rebar to the horizontal portion of an insert will reduce the depth of the shear cone (l e ), resulting in a reduced insert capacity. When rebar are added for insert stability, they should be placed against the vertical portion of the insert and at least 1" away from the horizontal portion.
When the value of P concrete exceeds the ultimate mechanical tensile capacity of the insert, the insert will fail. It is apparent that the shear cone becomes larger as the insert is embedded deeper in the concrete. Sufficient depth of embedment would theoretically permit the development of the full ultimate strength of the insert. Deep embedment is generally considered impractical for precast concrete, but some types of anchors depend upon this principle for their effectiveness. The Dayton Superior F-1 Screw Anchor and P-52 Swift Lift Anchor are two examples. All other factors being equal, depth of embedment has more effect on the strength of a concrete insert than any other single factor. A concrete insert under tensile loading to failure will fail in one of four ways: 1) The entire insert may pull out of the concrete with little apparent damage to the concrete (see Illustration B on page 6). Such failures are rare and, when they do occur, are the result of bond failure between the concrete and insert. These failures usually occur in green and/or low strength concrete. 2) The entire insert may pull out of the concrete bringing with it a cone of concrete having its apex slightly above the most deeply embedded part of the insert (see Illustration C). Such failures usually occur in relatively low strength concrete in which the tensile strength of the shear cone surrounding the insert is not as great as the strength of the insert itself. 3) A failure may also occur through breakage of the insert. Coil type inserts will usually fail at a point just below the helically wound wire coil. A small cone of concrete will usually be pulled out of the concrete surface (see Illustration D). This cone will have its apex at a point just below the coil. The base diameter will be approximately twice the cone height. Swift Lift Inserts will fail by fracturing of the shaft diameter of the insert (see Illustration E). NOTE: The above formula's have been applied to all coil and ferrule insert charts in this handbook. All manufactured lifting systems (Swift Lift, Fleet Lift, Utility Anchor) utilize test results.
06/09

These failures occur in high strength concrete when an insert is loaded beyond the ultimate strength of the insert. Failures of this type are due to a definite overload being applied to the inserts. Such failures can be prevented by choosing inserts of capacity suitable to job conditions. 4) When bolting coil type inserts, the bolt should always extend the proper amount beyond the bottom of the insert coil. Failure to do this causes the entire bolt load to be transferred to fewer turns of the coil, causing an increased load per weld contact point. The coil will then unwind, much like a corkscrew, resulting in a failure (see Illustration F).
P P P
Illustration B
Illustration C
Illustration D
Illustration E
Illustration F
Safe Working Load Reduction Factors for Inserts Used in Lightweight Concrete
Insert safe working loads, shown in this handbook, were derived from analysis and testing of Dayton Superior inserts used in normal weight (150 pcf) concrete. The safe working load of the insert is dependent upon the compressive strength of the concrete in which it is embedded. Therefore, when Dayton Superior inserts are used in lightweight concrete precast elements, the safe working load of the inserts must be recalculated to compensate for the reduction in concrete density. Multiply the published safe working loads by a reduction factor, shown in the table, to obtain the corrected safe working load. The table, shown below, displays the various reduction factors recommended by Dayton Superior for lightweight concrete.
Concrete Type
Normal Weight Sand and Lightweight Aggregates All Lightweight Materials with a Weight of 110 PCF or more All Lightweight Materials with a Weight of 110 PCF or less
Safe Working Load Reduction Factor

1.0 0.85 0.75 Verify by Testing
Interested readers are referred to Section 11.2 of the American Concrete Institutes Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318) for additional information.
06/09
Location of Insert
Embedment of inserts closer to an edge than the minimum edge distances, shown in this handbook, will greatly reduce the effective area of the resisting concrete shear cone and will reduce the inserts tension safe working load. The shaded area of the shear cone, shown in the illustrations below, indicates the extent the shear cone area is reduced. Tension safe working loads of inserts used in thin wall conditions or near a free edge or corner must, therefore, be reduced in proportion to the reduction in effective shear cone area (see Illustrations G & H). Another condition frequently encountered is that of an insert embedded near a free edge or corner and loaded in a transverse direction to the axis of the bolt, toward the free edge of the concrete. Contact a Dayton Superior Technical Services Department for safe working loads of inserts used in this type of condition.
P P D D de Tension P or Shear
de D
D= Insert Minimum Edge Distance Required to Develop Inserts Safe Working Load de = Actual Edge Distance
Illustration G
Illustration H
Insert Placement
Inserts must be placed accurately. An inserts safe working load decreases sharply if it is not perpendicular to the bearing surface, or if it is not in line with the applied force. Inserts lend themselves to being located and held correctly (by bolts and brackets or by tying to the reinforcing steel) before the casting operation begins. Failure to achieve proper insert placement is careless field installation. It is also important to place inserts so that the depth of thread is constant for the same size insert throughout a job. This will eliminate potential bolt engagement mistakes by the erection crew. Inserts should always be kept clean of dirt, ice or other objects that will interfere with attachment of the lifting hardware.
Note: For ferrule inserts, establish this dimension and maintain for all similar sized inserts on a project. For coil inserts, the coil bolt must penetrate through the insert coil by the proper amount.
P 1/2" Minimum to Develop Insert Safe Working Load
90
Wrong (Too High)
Wrong (Angled) Illustration I
Wrong (Too Low)
Right
06/09

Edge and Shear Loading
Another condition frequently encountered is an insert embedded near a free edge or corner and loaded in a direction transverse to the axis of the bolt, toward the free edge. Edge lift panels are examples of this condition. Many tests have shown that edge inserts loaded transversely to destruction (see Illustration L) finally fail because of an initial failure of the concrete over the coil. This initial failure transfers the entire load to the insert struts. If the load is large enough, the struts will fail in bending or shear or both. An analysis of tests indicates that the ultimate load on edge inserts loaded in the direction of the free edge is a function of the distance from the insert to the free edge. The effect of bolt diameter and insert configuration appears to be of secondary and negligible importance. For conditions where shear loading must be considered, it is appropriate to use the following equation from ACI 318 Appendix D:
1e 1.5 c7 c (c al) d o nd o f n Shear Safe Working Load (lbs.) =
0.2
Appropriate Safety Factor With the maximum shear safe working load equal to, or less than, the inserts tension Safe Working Load. Where: jc l le do = Cracked concrete factor: 1.0 for cracked concrete and 1.4 if uncracked. = Reduction factor for lightweight concrete, see page 6. = Minimum of embedment length or 8 x (n x d o ). = Number of struts on the insert. = Diameter of the insert struts. = Specified concrete compressive strength. = Distance from centerline of the insert to the edge.
f c
c a1
For conditions where a corner or thickness in direction of embedment is less than 1.5 x c a1 or an adjacent insert is closer than 3 x c a1 contact Dayton Superior Technical Services Department for insert capacities. For cases where increased shear capacity is required, the addition of pre-formed shear bars over the top of the insert will greatly increase the distribution of the load. Shear bars, when used, must be in solid contact with the insert to be effective. If accurate capacities of inserts are desired, several inserts with shear bars should be tested in job size panels. c a1
P Point X Point X
Shaded areas indicate probable tensile stress pattern in concrete near edge insert subject to load P.
Illustration L
Dotted line indicates line of probable concrete failure Point X point of possible strut fracture.
Combined Shear and Tension

Inserts and bolts that are subjected to combined shear and tension loadings should satisfy the following equation: fv 5/3 f t 5 / 3 < 1.0 + Fv Ft
( )
( )
Where: f v = Applied shear load; F v = Shear safe working load; f t = Applied tension load; F t = Tension safe working load.
06/09
Torque-Tension Relationship
For some types of bolted connections, it may be desirable to have a minimum clamping force (tension load). Due to the many variables associated with tightening bolted connections, it is possible to experience as much as a 25% variation in the amount of clamping force applied to similar connections receiving identical torque. The following equation is taken from Fasteners Standards Sixth Edition, published by Industrial Fasteners Institute, East Ohio Building, 1717 East 9th Street, Suite 1105, Cleveland, Ohio 44114-2879. It is used to provide an estimate of the torque required to apply a given preload to a bolted connection. T = KDP 12 Where: T = K = D= P = Torque (ft. lbs.); Torque coefficient; Nominal bolt diameter; Tension in bolt (Ibs.)
The torque coefficient is the critical factor in the above formula. It is best to experimentally determine K for critical applications using actual connection materials and assembly tools. Arbitrary values for K are often assigned in non-critical applications, as follows: K = .20 for NC threaded bolts per Fasteners Standards Sixth Edition K = .30 for Coil threaded bolts per test results.
The torque coefficient will vary from the values, shown above, when bolts have been plated, greased or coated with other types of lubricant.
NC Threaded Bolt Capacities

Permanent connections in precast construction are normally made with either ferrule inserts or slotted inserts using National Course (NC) threaded bolts. NC threaded bolts are normally not supplied by Dayton Superior. However, as a convenience to the precast designer, the following chart is listed.
NC Threaded Bolt Selection Chart Nominal Bolt Diameter and Threads per Inch 1/4" 20 3/8" 16 1/2" 13 5/8" 11 3/4" 10 7/8" 9 1" 8 1-1/8" 7 1-1/4" 7 1-1/2" 6 ASTM A-307 Bolts Tension 625 lbs. 1,500 lbs. 2,800 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 6,600 lbs. 9,200 lbs. 12,100 lbs. 15,200 lbs. 19,300 lbs. 28,100 lbs. Shear 350 lbs. 900 lbs. 1,700 lbs. 2,700 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 5,600 lbs. 7,400 lbs. 9,400 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 17,500 lbs. ASTM A-325 or A-449 Bolts Tension 1,250 lbs. 3,100 lbs. 5,600 lbs. 9,000 lbs. 13,300 lbs. 18,400 lbs. 24,200 lbs. 26,700 lbs. 33,900 lbs. 49,100 lbs. Shear 725 lbs. 1,800 lbs. 3,400 lbs. 5,400 lbs. 8,100 lbs. 11,300 lbs. 14,900 lbs. 16,400 lbs. 21,000 lbs. 30,600 lbs.
Safe working loads shown provide a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 (ultimate to Safe Working Load). Shear Safe Working Load assumes that the threads are included in the shear plane. 1/4"20, 3/8"16 and 1/2"13 bolts are not recommended for use as structural fasteners. For combined shear/tension interaction, refer to page 12.
Condition of Loadings
All safe working loads shown in this handbook are for static load conditions only. If dynamic forces or impact loading conditions are anticipated, the safe working load must be reduced accordingly. Care must be exercised to see that all inserts and hardware units are properly aligned, all lifting plates and bolts properly secured, all rigging is equalized, and properly sized crane cables utilized.
Warning: When in doubt about the proper use or installation of a Dayton Superior precast product, contact Dayton Superior for clarification. Failure to do so may result in safety hazards, exposing workers in the vicinity of the precast yard or job site to the possibility of injury or death.
06/09
9 9

The Dayton Superior precast products shown in this handbook are available in several different finishes or coatings. These finishes vary in the degree of corrosion protection provided. Standard finish is PLAIN and will normally be furnished if no finish is specified. Finishes available are as follows: PLAIN or unfinished steel is sometimes referred to as BLACK or RAW. PLAIN finished material will rust when exposed to the environment. ELECTRO-GALVANIZED finish is a zinc plated finish that provides a varying degree of corrosion protection depending on the thickness of the zinc plating and type of after-plating coating specified. This finish is recommended for threaded products. Dayton Superior electro-galvanizing conforms to ASTM Standard B-633, Service Condition 1 as plated. Other options available under this ASTM Standard are listed below. HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED or HDG products are zinc coated by the hot-dipped process and will provide better corrosion protection than electro-galvanized finished products due to the thicker HDG zinc coating. This finish is not recommended for threaded products due to potential assembly problems. Dayton Superior hot dipped galvanizing conforms to ASTM A-123 or A-153. EPOXY-POLYESTER or EPOXY finish is a dielectric material that is used to provide corrosion protection for steel products that are to be embedded in precast concrete. This material is usually applied to a coating thickness between 5 and 12 mils. Epoxy-Polyester finish is normally specified when an affordable solution to salt spray corrosion is required. Not recommended for use where threads are to be coated. STAINLESS STEEL is recommended for its excellent corrosion protection that will resist ordinary rusting. Type 304 Stainless Steel is recommended for use in precast products. It is the most economical type of stainless steel available for its level of corrosion resistance. Note that Type 304 Stainless Steel will rust when exposed to certain chemicals used to acid wash the surface of architectural precast concrete.
Corrosion Protection
ASTM Standards For Corrosion Resisting Coatings
A-123 Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coating on Iron or Steel ASTM A-123 Zinc (Hot ASTM Dipped Galvanized) Coating on Iron or Steel
Product Type Wire Wire Wire Steel or Plate Steel or Plate Steel or Plate Product Type Wire Wire Wire Steel or Plate Steel or Plate Steel or Plate Material .142" to .186" diameter .187" to .249" diameter .030" to .062" thick .063" to .124" thick .125" or thicker Material Approximate ThicknessApproximate Thickness .002" .003" .004" .002" .003" .004" .002" .003" .004" .002" .003" .004" .142" to .186" diameter .187" to .249" diameter .030" to .062" thick .063" to .124" thick .125" or thicker
.250" diameter or larger .250" diameter or larger
ASTM A-153 Coatings (Hot Dip) on Iron or Steel Hardware ASTM A-153 Zinc Coatings (Hot Dip) Zinc on Iron or Steel Hardware Product Type Castings Product Type Castings Class A B1 B2 Class A B1 B2 Approximate ThicknessApproximate Thickness .004" .004" .003" .004" .004" .003"
eel, 3/16" and thicker Steel, 3/16" and thicker
eel, 3/16" and thinner Steel, 3/16" and thinner
ASTM B-633 Electro Deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel ASTM B-633 Electro Deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel Service Condition SC-4 SC-3 SC-2 SC-1 Exposure Very Severe Severe Moderate Mild Exposure Approximate ThicknessApproximate Thickness Very Severe Severe Moderate Mild .001" .0005" .0003" .0002" .001" .0005" .0003" .0002" SC-4 SC-3 SC-2 SC-1
Service Condition
ASTM B-633 Continued ASTM B-633 Continued Type 1 2 3 4

10
Type After Plating Coating 1 2 3 4 As Plated Colored Chromate Colorless Chromate Phosphate
Note: Electro-galvanized or hot dipped galvanized items fabricated from medium After Plating highCoating carbon or high carbon steel must be properly treated to minimize hydrogen As Plated embrittlement. Failure to properly bake these may result in a drastic reduction in Coloreditems Chromate their safe working load and premature failure Colorless Chromate resulting in property damage, injuries or death. Phosphate 06/09
Condition of Loading
The preceding paragraphs have been devoted to the behavior of concrete inserts under straight tensile loading. Obviously, there are many conditions of loading other than direct tension. Most situations will require consideration of shearing and/or bending forces applied to the insert through the anchor bolt or other connecting hardware. A common condition occurs when a precast concrete element is lifted by means of inserts in each end without a spreader bar (see Illustration J). When a load P is carried by only two inserts, the vertical reaction R that must be carried by each insert is 1/2 P . There is also an additional vertical force V , that must be added to R , that is caused by the horizontal component H of force T . The horizontal force H that is exerted on the insert and on the concrete surrounding it is proportional to the total load and to the angle a included between the sling and the surface of the concrete. This force may be expressed by the equation: H = P (cot a ). 2 The magnitude of the tensile force on the sling is proportional to the total load and to the angle a . This force may be expressed by the equation: T= P 2 sin a . As angle a decreases, the values of H and T increase. As angle a approaches 0, the magnitude of both H and T approaches infinity. Conversely, as angle a increases, the values of H and T decrease, so that as angle a approaches 90, force T approaches the value of 1/2 P and force H approaches 0 .
T
See Detail A
R = 1/2 P
Illustration J Detail A
It is readily apparent that the use of long slings will greatly reduce destructive forces on the slings, the lifting hardware and on the precast element itself.
d
e SHEAR
Illustration K
V
(d - x)
H = Horizontal component of sling load which is equal to the induced shear load. V = Vertical force on insert caused by force H applied at distance e from face of concrete. C = Resultant of compressive forces on concrete. d = Distance from center line of anchor bolt to toe of bearing plate. e = Distance from face of concrete to point of application of force H . x = Distance from toe of bearing plate to C . b = Width of bearing plate(not shown) f c = Ultimate compression strength of the concrete.
11
06/09

Transverse and Shear Loading
A transverse force acting on an insert will cause a force pattern on the insert and in the surrounding concrete that is most easily visualized through a study of Illustration K on page 10. Force H , when first applied, tends to cause a lateral translation and bending of the bolt. If the bolt has been properly tightened, a lateral movement will be prevented by frictional forces and, more importantly, by the couple of compressive force C exerted by the toe of the lifting plate on the concrete and the tensile force V . Only under very rare circumstances will force H be applied at the face of the concrete. Usually, conditions are such that force H is applied at some distance e above the surface. As long as the forces acting on the insert are in equilibrium, i.e., up to the point where some resisting element in the force system fails, the following equations express mathematically the balance of forces in and around the insert. 1. (H) (e) = (C) (d - x) 2. V = C 3. (H) (e) = (V) (d - x) 4. and V = (H) (e) . (d - x)
The only value on the right hand side of this equation that cannot be definitely determined is dimension x . This distance is determined by the compressive stress pattern under the lifting plate. If the pattern is triangular: 5. C max = ( 1 f 'c ) (db) and x = d . 2 3 If the pattern is rectangular 6. C max = (f 'c ) (db) and x = d . 2 More probably, the pattern is a trapezoidal compromise and: 7. C max = (.85 f 'c ) (db) and x = 5/12 d . For any given lifting plate, the value of C max will be limited by f 'c or by V max which is the pull out strength of the insert, since, by equation (2) V = C . Test results indicate that the assumption of a rectangular stress pattern is valid and conservative for most conditions. 2 (e) (H) 8. Equation (4) then becomes V = . d Values 2e for Dayton Superior Lifting Hardware are shown in the Table below. d
Lifting Hardware Values

Lifting Plate T-8 T-12 T-12 T-12-H T-12-H T-26-H T-26 T-26-H T-26 T-27 Bolt Diameter 2e d 2.00 0.65 0.67 0.83 0.83 1.46 1.00 1.46 0.71 3.00
Warning: Lifting plates or other attachment hardware must be bolted tightly to the concrete, and bolt holes in the plate must not be excessively larger than the anchor bolt. Disregard for these precautions can cause bolt bending, excessive unbalanced loading on the insert and possibly a premature failure.
1", 1-1/4" or 1-1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 3/4" 1" 1" 1-1/2 3/4" or 1"
Applying equation (8) to a specific situation: Assume that a B-18 3/4" x 9" Single Flared Coil Loop Insert is being used (safe working load is 4,750 lbs.) together with a T-12 Swivel Lifting Plate in such a manner that the vertical component of the load on the insert is 4,500 lbs. and the horizontal component of load on the insert is 1,000 lbs. (e) (H) Using equation (8), V = 2 , and values of 2e d d from the table above, V = .65 x 1000 lbs. or 650 lbs. of additional pull on the insert caused by the horizontal component. Adding: 4,500 lbs. + 650 lbs. = 5,150 lbs. This exceeds the rated load of the insert and requires that a stronger insert be chosen.
12
06/09
Calculating Sling/Anchor Loads Applies to Swift Lift; Fleet-Lift and Utility Anchors
The table shows multiplication factors that are used in a simplified method to determine the increased load transferred from the sling to the anchor when using multi-leg slings. As the fleet angle (0) increases, the sling load increases and transfers an even larger to the anchor.
P
Fleet Angle 0
0 16 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Multiplication Factor F
1.00 1.01 1.04 1.08 1.16 1.26 1.41 1.64 2.00
Warning: Avoid the use of Fleet Angles greater than 120 as their use can overload and fall anchors causing a premature failure resulting is property damage, serious personal injury or death.
P2
P1
= Actual weight of precast element including adhesion
0 = Fleet angle F = Multiplication factor PxF = Effective weight of precast element Anchor load using 2-leg sling P x F/2 anchors P1 = P2 =
F F
P1 = P2 =
Calculating Sling/Anchor Loads Applies to Swift Lift; Fleet-Lift and Utility Anchors
When anchors are not located equally about the center of gravity of the precast element, calculate the applied anchor loads statically. The load will always balance under the crane hook. Calculate anchor loads as follows: P1 = P x b/a + b P2 = P x a/a + b
P1 a
P2
Rigging For Traveling Over Rough Ground

When a precast element is to transported over rough ground, use a 60 V type rigging. This will help reduce dynamic loads. When using forklift to transport precast elements over rough ground, Dayton Superior recommends that the user reduce the anchor safe working load by 50%. This safe working load reduction will help offset the effects of any dynamic loads that might occur.
Resultant Load on Anchor 90 90
Reaction of Anchor
Right
Wrong
Varies
Load Diagram Compressive Force in Concrete

06/09 13

Rigging
As with all lifting systems, the selection of the proper lifting anchor is based on several factors. One of the most important is the accurate determination of the load that will be applied to each anchor. When using certain rigging arrangements it is impossible to accurately determine the load that is applied to each anchor. this is due to the tolerances in sling lengths and the location of the lifting anchors in the precast concrete element. In order to eliminate this problem, and make certain that the applied loads are equalized to each of the lifting anchors, an equalizer (spreader) beam and rollers blocks are used. The use of equalizer beams and roller blocks permits a qualified person to determine the exact load distribution. When an equalizer beam and roller blocks are used in the plant, they must also be used in the field. If the user is in doubt about the field use of an equalizer beam and roller blocks, then only two anchors should be assumed to be load carrying. Several typical rigging arrangements are shown below along with a determination as to the number of anchors that will be load carrying.
120 120 120
Illustration R1 3 anchors will carry load when used on round precast concrete elements with the anchors spaced 120 apart. 2 anchors will carry load when used on square or rectangular precast elements.
Illustration R2 2 anchors will carry load when using 4 individual slings. The other 2 anchors will act to balance the precast concrete element.
Illustration R3 4 anchors will carry load when using 2 individual slings running over 2 roller blocks supported by an equalizer beam.
Illustration R4 4 anchors will carry load when using 4 individual slings in conjunction with the Dayton Superior T-46 Spreader Beam with Twin 7-1/2-ton Shackles.
Illustration R5 2 anchors will carry load when using 4 individual slings attached to a 3 beam equalizer beam. This rigging arrangement should be used when angle pulls need to be avoided.
The above assumes that the anchors are spaced equally about the center of gravity of the precast concrete element and that the center of lift is directly above the center of gravity. Failure to locate the center of lift directly over the center of gravity will cause the precast element to tilt.
14
06/09
Selecting the Proper Insert
The following factors should be considered when determining the load per insert:
1) Weight of the concrete shape, 2) Adhesion to the form surface, 3) Type of concrete (normal, lightweight or all lightweight materials), 4) Dynamic loads (impact due to handling, transporting or erecting conditions), 5) Concrete compressive strength at time of initial lift, 6) Number of lifting points and type of rigging to be used, 7) Direction of pull (cable or sling angle), 8) Flexural stresses of thin concrete shapes, 9) Panel thickness, 10) Edge distance (thin wall, free edge or shear loading conditions). Determining the dead load weight of a precast concrete section is straight forward, although serious errors are easy to make, such as: 1. Miscalculations involving symmetrical panels; 2. Forgetting that a panel is normal weight concrete and using the unit weights of lightweight concrete and 3. Neglecting adhesion to the form. In addition, transporting the panel in the storage yard over bumpy conditions introduces dynamic loads that must also be anticipated. Removing the precast element from the form can induce forces that, in effect, increase the dead load weight at a critical time, when the concrete compressive strength is at its lowest value. Depending on the quality of release agent used, the following adhesion loads should be considered when determining the additional weight of the concrete element: Concrete Forms Steel Forms Plywood Forms (Flat Surface) Plywood Forms (Ribbed Surface) up to 20 Ibs./sq. ft. up to 25 Ibs./sq. ft. up to 50 Ibs./sq. ft. up to 75 Ibs./sq. ft.
The type of concrete used determines the unit weight characteristics and the resultant ability of the concrete to resist the pullout forces introduced by the insert. See page 8 for the proper load reduction factors that must be applied to insert safe working loads when an insert is embedded in lightweight concrete. Consideration must also be given to dynamic loads that can occur in the plant, in the storage yard, as well as during transportation to the job site and during erection. It is suggested that a detailed study be made of the various handling, storage, transporting and erection forces. The user is cautioned to be aware of these additional forces and to give due consideration to their effect on the inserts safe working load.
Example One
Select the proper length and capacity of insert based on the use of a spreader frame, as shown below, that will allow equal loading on all four inserts. Assume normal weight concrete having a compressive strength of 2,700 psi at initial lift. Dead Load Weight = 15' x 8' x 12.5 Ibs./sq. ft. x 6" = 9,000 Ibs. Adhesion to Form = 15' x 8' x 75 Ibs./sq. ft. = (Ribbed Surface) Effective Weight of Panel = 9,000 Ibs. 18,000 Ibs.
Required Insert Capacity = 18,000 Ibs.= 4,500 Ibs./insert 4 inserts Maximum Insert Height = 5 1/2" S elect the following insert: P-52 4 ton x 4 3/4" long Swift Lift Anchor in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete.
Illustration M
6" 90
8'-0"
06/09
15
'- 0
"
15

Example Two
Select the proper length and capacity of insert, based on the use of a spreader beam and slings at a 60 angle with the top surface of the precast section. Assume normal weight concrete having a compressive strength of 4,000 psi at initial lift and the use of 1" diameter T-12 Swivel Lifting Plates. Dead Load Weight = 20' x 7' x 12.5 Ibs./sq. ft. x 6" = 10,500 Ibs. Adhesion to Form = 20' x 7' x 25 Ibs./sq. ft. = 3,500 Ibs. Effective Weight of Panel = 14,000 Ibs. Therefore, the vertical reaction that must be carried by each 14,000 lbs. insert = = 3,500 lbs. 4 inserts H = 3,500 Ibs. x cot. 60 = 3,500 Ibs. x .578 or H = 2,023 Ibs./insert 2e V = x 2,023 Ibs. = .65 x 2,023 or d V = 1,315 Ibs./insert Required Insert Capacity = 3,500 Ibs. + 1,315 Ibs. = 4,815 Ibs./insert
60
Select the following insert: F-56 Expanded Coil Insert, 1" diameter x 5 1/2" long, 6,250 Ibs. Safe Working Load.
Check combined tension and shear as follows: 4,815 lbs. 5/3 2,023 lbs. 5/3 = .80. Since this is less than 1.0, the insert which was + 4,800 lbs. selected is suitable for use. 6,250 lbs.
7'-0"
Example Three
Select the proper length and capacity of an insert based on the use of a four sling lift (see warning note below) with cables at a 60 angle to the top surface of the precast section. Assume lightweight concrete having a unit weight of 115 lbs./cu. ft., a compressive strength at initial lift of 4,000 psi and the use of 1-1/2" diameter T-12 Swivel Lift Plates. Dead Load Weight = 9' x 10' x 9.58 Ibs./sq. ft. x 14" = 12,071 Ibs. Adhesion to Form = 9' x 10' x 20 Ibs./sq. ft. = 1,800 Ibs. Effective Weight of Precast Section = 13,871 Ibs. Therefore, the vertical reaction that must be carried by each 13,871 lbs. insert = = 6,936 lbs. 2 inserts H = 6,936 Ibs. x cot. 60 = 6,936 Ibs. x .578 or H = 4,009 Ibs./insert 2e V = x 4,009 Ibs. = .833 x 4,009 Ibs. or d V = 3,339 Ibs./insert Required Insert Capacity = 6,936 Ibs. + 3,339 Ibs. = 10,275 Ibs./insert Maximum Insert Height = 13-1/2" Select the F-60 Expanded Coil Insert, 1-1/2" diameter x 12" long, 16,250 lbs. Safe Working Load. Multiply Safe Working Load by reduction factor of .7 for lightweight concrete, 16,250 Ibs. x .7 = 11,375 Ibs. Safe Working Load in lightweight concrete. As the reduced Safe Working Load is greater than the 10,275 Ibs. Ioad required, it appears this insert is suitable for use. However, combined shear and tension must be checked as follows: 10,275 lbs. 5/3 4,009 lbs. 5/3 = 1.01, which means this insert must be replaced with a stronger insert. + 11,375 lbs. 11,750 lbs.
9'-0 "
14"
60
20
Maximum Insert Height = 5 1/2"
Illustration N
'-0
6"
"
Illustration P
Warning: When individual slings are used, any two inserts must be capable of lifting/handling the precast section. This is due to unequal sling lengths and the resulting loads that are transferred to the shorter slings. In this application, only two slings carry the total load while the other two slings are simply used to balance the load. 16 06/09
10
'-0
"
Coil Insert Safe Working Load Reduction Factors For Free Edge ConditionsTension Loadings Only
D Minimum D + de P Concrete Face
de = Free edge distance D = Minimum edge distance required to develop a full shear cone is 1.5 x the insert length 2D = Minimum insert spacing when using two or more inserts
Note: For insert capacities under shear loading conditions, please refer to page 12.
de
de 2" 2 1/4" 2 1/2" 2 3/4" 3" 3 1/2" 4" 4 1/2" 5" 5 1/2" 6" 7" 8" 9" 10" 11"
B-1 or B-2 6" 8" 12" 0.63 0.59 0.59 0.64 0.60 0.60 0.65 0.61 0.61 0.67 0.63 0.63 0.69 0.65 0.65 0.72 0.67 0.67 0.75 0.69 0.69 0.78 0.71 0.71 0.81 0.73 0.73 0.83 0.75 0.75 0.89 0.79 0.79 0.94 0.83 0.83 1.00 0.88 0.88 1.00 0.92 0.92 1.00 0.96 0.96
B-16 4" 0.67 0.69 0.71 0.73 0.75 0.79 0.83 0.88 0.92 0.96 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 6" 0.61 0.63 0.64 0.65 0.67 0.69 0.72 0.75 0.78 0.81 0.83 0.89 0.94 1.00 1.00 1.00
B-17 12" 0.67 0.69 0.71 0.73 0.75 0.79 0.83 0.88 0.92 0.96
Insert Type and Length B-18 F-53 B-33 9" 12" 12" 3" 4" 4 1/2" 0.57 0.58 0.72 0.67 0.58 0.59 0.75 0.69 0.67 0.59 0.60 0.78 0.71 0.69 0.60 0.61 0.81 0.73 0.70 0.61 0.63 0.83 0.75 0.72 0.63 0.65 0.89 0.79 0.76 0.65 0.67 0.67 0.94 0.83 0.80 0.67 0.69 0.69 1.00 0.88 0.83 0.69 0.71 0.71 1.00 0.92 0.87 0.70 0.73 0.73 1.00 0.96 0.91 0.72 0.75 0.75 1.00 1.00 0.94 0.76 0.79 0.79 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.80 0.83 0.83 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.83 0.88 0.88 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.87 0.92 0.92 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.91 0.96 0.96 1.00 1.00 1.00
F-56 to F-61 5 1/2" 7 1/2" 0.65 0.61 0.67 0.62 0.68 0.63 0.71 0.66 0.74 0.68 0.77 0.70 0.80 0.72 0.83 0.74 0.86 0.77 0.92 0.81 0.98 0.86 1.00 0.90 1.00 0.94 1.00 0.99
9 1/2" 0.60 0.61 0.62 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.69 0.71 0.75 0.78 0.82 0.85 0.89
2 2/8" 0.79 0.82 0.86 0.90 0.93 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
F-63 3 1/2" 0.69 0.71 0.74 0.76 0.79 0.83 0.88 0.93 0.98 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
4 1/2" 0.65 0.67 0.69 0.70 0.72 0.76 0.80 0.83 0.87 0.91 0.94 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Reduced Safe Working Load is based on 1/2" setback from face of concrete. For Safe Working Load on other insert loading conditions, contact a Dayton Superior Technical Service Department. Page 17 Above chart modified from ACI 318 Appendix D method by using previous results from product testing.
How to Use Reduction Factors:

To obtain an inserts reduced safe working load for free edge conditions, multiply the safe working load listed in the insert selection chart by the appropriate reduction factor from the above chart. Do not apply these reduction factors to other types or sizes of inserts.
Example:
Using a B-2 Coil Tie Insert 1" x 8" long in a 2-1/2" free edge condition, multiply concrete safe working load of 9,514 lbs. by a reduction factor of 0.6 to arrive at the reduced concrete safe working load of 5,708 lbs. which is less than insert mechanical capacity of 9,000 lbs. so use 5,708 lbs.
06/09
17

Coil Insert Safe Working Load Reduction Factors For Thin Wall Conditions Tension Loadings Only
D Concrete Face
P T de
T = Wall thickness de = Actual edge distance D = Minimum edge distance required to develop a full shear cone is 1.5 x the insert length 2D = Minimum insert spacing when using two or more inserts
Note: For insert capacities under shear loading conditions, please refer to page 12.
T 4" 4 1/2" 5" 5 1/2" 6" 7" 8" 9" 10" 11" 12" 14" 16" 18" 20" 22"
de 2" 2 1/4" 2 1/2" 2 3/4" 3" 3 1/2" 4" 4 1/2" 5" 5 1/2" 6" 7" 8" 9" 10" 11"
B-1 or B-2 6" 8" 12" 0.25 0.19 0.19 0.28 0.21 0.21 0.31 0.23 0.23 0.33 0.25 0.25 0.39 0.29 0.29 0.44 0.33 0.33 0.50 0.38 0.38 0.56 0.42 0.42 0.61 0.46 0.46 0.67 0.50 0.50 0.78 0.58 0.58 0.89 0.67 0.67 1.00 0.75 0.75 1.00 0.83 0.83 1.00 0.92 0.92
B-16 4" 0.33 0.38 0.42 0.46 0.50 0.58 0.67 0.75 0.83 0.92 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 6" 0.22 0.25 0.28 0.31 0.33 0.39 0.44 0.50 0.56 0.61 0.67 0.78 0.89 1.00 1.00 1.00
B-17 12" 0.33 0.38 0.42 0.46 0.50 0.58 0.67 0.75 0.83 0.92
Insert Type and Length B-33 B-18 F-53 9" 12" 12" 3" 4" 4 1/2" 0.15 0.17 0.44 0.33 0.17 0.19 0.50 0.38 0.33 0.19 0.21 0.56 0.42 0.37 0.20 0.23 0.61 0.46 0.41 0.22 0.25 0.67 0.50 0.44 0.26 0.29 0.78 0.58 0.52 0.30 0.33 0.33 0.89 0.67 0.59 0.33 0.38 0.38 1.00 0.75 0.67 0.37 0.42 0.42 1.00 0.83 0.74 0.41 0.46 0.46 1.00 0.92 0.81 0.44 0.50 0.50 1.00 1.00 0.89 0.52 0.58 0.58 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.59 0.67 0.67 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.67 0.75 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.74 0.83 0.83 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.81 0.92 0.92 1.00 1.00 1.00
F-56 to F-61 5 1/2" 7 1/2" 0.30 0.22 0.33 0.24 0.36 0.27 0.42 0.31 0.48 0.36 0.55 0.40 0.61 0.44 0.67 0.49 0.73 0.53 0.85 0.62 0.97 0.71 1.00 0.80 1.00 0.89 1.00 0.98
9 1/2" 0.19 0.21 0.25 0.28 0.32 0.35 0.39 0.42 0.49 0.56 0.63 0.70 0.77
2 2/8" 0.58 0.65 0.72 0.79 0.86 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
F-63 3 1/2" 0.38 0.43 0.48 0.52 0.57 0.67 0.76 0.86 0.95 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
4 1/2" 0.30 0.33 0.37 0.41 0.44 0.52 0.59 0.67 0.74 0.81 0.89 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Reduced Safe Working Load is based on 1/2" setback from face of concrete. Page 18 For Safe Working Load on other insert loading conditions, contact a Dayton Superior Technical Service Department. When an insert is not positioned at the center line of the wall, the effective wall thickness is twice the actual edge distance. Above chart modified from ACI 318 Appendix D method by using previous results from product testing.
How to Use Reduction Factors:

To obtain an inserts reduced safe working load for thin wall conditions, multiply the safe working load listed in the insert selection chart by the appropriate reduction factor from the above chart. Do not apply these reduction factors to other types or sizes of inserts.
Example:
Using a B-2 Coil Tie Insert 1" x 12" long in an 8" thin wall, multiply concrete full shear cone capacity of 17,525 by a reduction factor of 0.33 to arrive at the reduced concrete safe working load of 5,783 lbs. which is less than insert mechanical capacity of 9,000 lbs. so use 5,783 lbs.
18 06/09
06/09 General and Technical Information
Notes and Sketches
19
20
Notes and Sketches
06/09
Swift Lift System

Swift Lift System
The Swift Lift System is available with safe load ratings of 1, 2, 4, 8 and 20 tons. Each component is clearly marked with its maximum safe working load. The System is extremely versatile and can be utilized for vertical and diagonal pulls. It can be used to lift concrete elements from a horizontal to a vertical position without the aid of a tilting table.
P-50 Swift Lift Universal Lifting Eye

The Swift Lift Universal Lifting Eye (P-50) consists of a flat-sided, spherical lifting body and a high strength bail. The lifting body has a T-shaped slot that permits rapid attachment and release of the head on Swift Lift Anchors.
B A
4
Bail G Load Range Tons
The design of the P-50 Universal Lifting Eye permits the bail to freely rotate 180, while the complete lifting eye may rotate through a 360 arc. This design feature allows precast concrete elements to be turned, tilted and/or rotated under load. Dayton Superior does not recommend the use of this lifting eye for edge lifting of thin precast concrete panels.
Lifting Body
H F
P-50 Swift Lift Universal Lifting Eye Dimensions Rated Load Tons 1 2 4 8 20 A 1.87" 2.34" 2.76" 3.47" 4.18" B 2.95" 3.58" 4.65" 6.30" 7.09" D 2.20" 2.68" 3.46" 4.41" 6.00" F 1.26" 1.61" 2.22" 2.83" 4.29" G 2.80" 3.41" 3.46" 4.52" 5.31" L 7.40" 9.06" 11.14" 15.79" 20.00"
The rated load provides a factor of safety of approximately 5 to 1 (ultimate to rated load).
The P-50 Universal Lifting Eye may be subjected to wear, misuse, overloading and other factors that can affect the lifting eyes rated load. Therefore, it is imperative that the lifting eye be user-inspected at least once a month to determine its general condition and degree of wear. Limiting Dimensions on During the users monthly inspection, the lifting eye should be checked for evidence of heat application. If evidence of heat application is found, the unit must be scrapped. Check for a bent or twisted bail and discard all units found to have these flaws. Also, check to make certain that the bail rotates freely in all directions. At least once every three months, dimensions H and M on each unit should be checked. The upper limits are shown in the chart. If either of these limits is exceeded, the P-50 Universal Lifting Eye must be removed from service and destroyed. The proper method for scrapping a lifting eye is to cut through the bail with a cutting torch to render the unit useless as a lifting device. Eye are permitted. 06/09 No repairs or welding to the P-50 Swift Lift Universal Lifting
21
Inspection and Maintenance
P-50 Swift Lift Universal Lifting Eye

Rated Load
(Tons)
H Maximum Width
M Minimum Thickness 0.217" 0.236" 0.315" 0.472" 0.709"
1 2 4 8 20
0.512" 0.709" 0.984" 1.260" 1.811"
Swift Lift System
The Swift Lift System is a quick connect-disconnect system that allows precast concrete elements to be handled repeatedly, with speed, safety and economy. The System is a non-welded system and void of threaded connections. The quality, reusable Swift Lift Lifting Eyes heavy duty construction will provide years of good service.
DSC
Swift Lift System

How to Use the P-50 Swift Lift Universal Lifting Eye
Swift Lift System
Extended Lip
1. To install the P-50 lifting eye, hold the unit upside down with the T-shaped slot directly over the head of the Swift Lift anchor.
2. Lower the lifting eye down onto the anchor until the T-slot engages the head of the anchor.
3. Rotate the lifting eye until the extended lip of the body touches the horizontal surface of the concrete.
Note: Prior to lifting a precast element, apply an initial cable tension to make sure that the bail and body of the lifting eye are aligned in the direction of the cable pull.
180 Usable Range
Minimum Edge Distance 360 Range
Minimum Edge Distance
The bail of the P-50 lifting eye can move through a 180 usable range.
The main body of the lifting eye has a 360 rotational range.
The P-50 lifting is used with the T-shaped slot facing toward the direction of the applied load.
To disengage the lifting eye, the crane hook is lowered and the body removed by rotating the extended lip upward.
Dos and Donts of the P-50 Swift Lift Universal Lifting Eye
90 or less than 90
Right
Prior to lifting a precast element, apply an initial cable tension to make certain that the bail and body of the lifting eye are aligned in the direction of the cable pull.
Right
Wrong
Warning: Do not allow the crane lines to form an angle less than 90 during an edge lift application. This condition can bend the lifting eye bail and could lead to a premature failure.
When applying the initial cable tension on edge lift applications, make sure that the cables are at a 90 angle (or larger) to the surface of the precast element.
Warning: The crane line and bail of the lifting hardware must be turned in the direction of the cable forces before the lifting operation begins. The crane line must not be allowed to apply a sideward force on the bail. This condition is dangerous and could lead to premature failure of the hardware or insert.
Warning: Do not modify, weld or alter in any way the Swift Lift Universal Lifting Eye. 22
06/09
Swift Lift System

P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye
B A
The P-51 Swift Lift Lifting eye is a high quality, high strength steel casting. Its ball shaped lower end fits into the void formed in the concrete and engages the spherical head of the anchor. Attachment to the anchor head can only be made when the lifting eye is positioned with its front face toward the concrete. In the working position, release is impossible. Accidental disengagement is prevented by a gravity-action safety pin that must be raised before the Lifting Eye can be removed. The P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye is available with safe working loads of 2, 4 and 8 tons. It is extremely versatile in use, being suitable for vertical pull or diagonal pull. The Lifting Eye rotates freely (360) about the vertical axis of the anchor. Each unit is clearly marked with its MAXIMUM safe working load.
Year of Manufacture D E
Bail
Safety Pin
Load Range Tons
C F
P -5 1 S w ift L ift L iftin g E y e S e le c tio n C h a r t S a fe Safe W o r k in g Working Loads (tons) (to Loa d ns) 2 4 8
(In c h e s )
(In c h e s )
(In c h e s )
(In c h e s )
(In c h e s )
2 .6 4 3 .0 0 3 .5 4
4 .5 2 5 .0 6 5 .9 8
2 .3 6 2 .8 3 3 .7 0
3 .7 4 4 .9 6 5 .6 0
8 .4 3 1 0 .3 5 1 2 .8 7
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 5 to 1.
Inspection and Maintenance

While appreciable wear does not normally occur, the P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye may be subjected to wear, misuse, overloading and other factors that may affect the lifting eyes rated load. Therefore, the user must inspect lifting eyes at least once a month to determine general condition, degree of wear and any evidence of heat application. If evidence of heat application is found, the unit must be destroyed. In addition, check to make certain that the bail is not bent or twisted. Destroy all units that have a bent or twisted bail. Check the safety pin; missing pins must be replaced. Make sure the safety pin is in good condition and moves freely at all times. At least once every three months, dimensions G and F on each unit should be checked. The upper limits are shown in the chart. If either of these limits is exceeded, the Swift Lift Lifting Eye must be removed from service and destroyed. The proper method to use in destroying a lifting eye is to cut through the bail with a cutting torch. Other than replacing the safety pin, no repairs to the P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye are permitted. In particular, welding is not permitted.
Limiting Dimensions on P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye Safe Working Load (tons) 2 4 8 G
(Inches)
F
(Inches)
0.709 0.984 1.260
0.236 0.315 0.472
06/09
23
Swift Lift System
4
DSC
Swift Lift System

How to Install The P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye
Swift Lift System
To engage the P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye on the head of the Swift Lift Anchor, position the P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye so that the front face is toward the concrete, then raise the Swift Lift Lifting Eye into the working position and engage the lifting hook. The safety pin will drop into position to prevent accidental release of the Swift Lift Lifting Eye. For inclined pulls, the front face of the P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye, which indicates the rated load of the lifting eye, must always be facing away from the concrete surface. This must be checked immediately before the lifting operation begins.
Load rating embossed on front face in two locations 90 or less
Front face
Initial positioning of the P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye onto the Swift Lift Anchor
Working position for lifting of a precast concrete element
Warning: If the P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye is used when its relative position is 90 or 180 from its correct position, the P-52 Swift Lift Anchor will be overloaded and may result in a premature failure.
Load Rating Load Rating
Correct position (Normal position)
Incorrect position (90 out of position)
Incorrect position (180 out of position)
Right
Wrong
Wrong
Note: Do not use the lifting eye in this manner as it could bend and/ or break the safety pin, allowing the lifting eye to pull off the Swift Lift Anchor. Never use lifting eye without a safety pin in place.
24
06/09
Swift Lift System

How to use the P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye
If the Swift Lift Anchor is positioned in a relatively thin panel, movement of the P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye under load from the vertical to an inclined position relative to the axis of the anchor (such as laying down a panel with edge inserts as shown in 1 below) is NOT PERMITTED due to excessive friction. This friction causes binding of the ball end of the P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye, and when the friction is overcome, the resultant sudden movement causes high impact stresses on the surrounding concrete. As an aid in reducing friction, apply a soap solution to the void formed by the recess plug. The above maneuver can be accomplished when the proper rigging is used. The fleet angle between the slings must be between 90 and 120. In this manner, precast concrete shapes can be placed from the vertical to the horizontal.
90
90 Min.
120
Max
Right
Wrong
4 M aneuvering from vertical to horizontal

with face anchors
90 Min.
1 M aneuvering from horizontal to vertical with edge anchors
90
120
Max
90
120 M
ax.
Right
Wrong
2 M aneuvering from vertical to horizontal with edge anchors

Note: To reduce friction between the Swift Lift Lifting Eye and the concrete, apply a soap solution to the cavity formed by the recess plug.
90 Min.
120
3 M aneuvering from horizontal to vertical with face anchors

Note: To reduce friction between the Swift Lift Lifting Eye and the concrete, apply a soap solution to the cavity formed by the recess plug.
Right
Wrong
06/09
90
90
Right
Wrong
25
Swift Lift System
When the P-51 Swift LIft Lifting Eyes position is changed from a diagonal pull to a vertical pull relative to the anchor axis, all movements are permissible, even with simultaneous rotation.
Swift Lift System

P-52 Swift Lift Anchor
Swift Lift System
Load Rating
The P-52 Swift Lift Anchor is hot forged from carbon steel. The formed head provides spherical seating that the Lifting Eye engages, while a disc-shaped foot is embedded in the concrete. Due to its being a forged part, the Swift Lift Anchor does not depend on welds or thread engagement to develop its safe working load. Forging provides maximum safety with its advantageous material structure. This allows the anchor to easily meet the OSHA requirement of a 4 to 1 factor of safety. In addition to the carbon steel anchors, Type 304 or 316 Stainless Steel Swift Lift Anchors are available on special order. Use stainless steel anchors when maximum protection against corrosion is required.
4
Head
Caution: The Swift Lift Anchor is designed to be used with Dayton Superior components. Failure to use this combination may result in concrete spalling or premature failure.
Shaft Diameter
Foot
For safety, refer to the P-52 Swift Lift Anchor Selection Chart on page 31 to determine the actual safe working load of an individual anchor. The MAXIMUM safe working load is clearly visible on the head of the anchor To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, for easy recognition of the appropriate hardware and accessories foruse (3) system size, (4) length with each Swift Lift Anchor.
Example:
200, P-52 Swift Lift Anchors, 4 ton, 9-1/2" long
P-52 Swift Lift Anchor and Recess Plug Dimensions

Head Diameter X Z Diameter
Swift Lift Round Recess Plug
Shaft Diameter
Swift Lift Round Recess Plug Dimensions Swift Lift Anchor 1 2 4 8 20 Tons Diameter of Recess Plug 2-7/16" 3-5/16" 4" 5" 6-3/8" Dimension "Z" 1-3/16" 1-7/16" 1-13/16" 2-5/16" 3-1/8"
Diameter of Foot
Note: The diameter of the narrow recess plug is the same as the diameter of the round recess plug.
P-52 Swift Lift Anchor Dimensions

Swift Lift Anchor 1 2 4 8 20 Tons 26 Dimension X 5/16" 7/16" 9/16" 9/16" 9/16" Dimension Y 7/8" 1-1/16" 1-5/16" 1-5/8" 2-5/8" Shaft Diameter 3/8" 9/16" 3/4" 1-3/32" 1-1/2" Foot Diameter 1" 1-3/8" 1-7/8" 2-5/8" 3-3/4" Head Diameter 11/16" 1-1/32" 31/32" 1-11/32" 1-7/8" 2-3/4" 06/09
Swift Lift System

How to Install P-56 and P-56-PL Recess Plugs on P-52 Anchors
Grasp the recess plug firmly across the top diameter of the plug. Application of pressure by the thumb and fingers on the outer edge of the plug will cause the plug to open up to allow insertion of the anchor.
Swift Lift System 27
Wet Setting P-52 Swift Lift Face Lift Anchors
When a Swift Lift anchor is to be positioned in the top surface of a flat precast section, wet setting the anchor is best done immediately after the concrete has been placed. The anchor/recess plug assembly is attached to a small template board and pressed into the fresh concrete until the template board lies flush on the surface of the concrete.
Anchor assembly attached to template board
Light vibration of the fresh concrete will assure proper embedment and anchorage.
Recess Plug Removal

Swift Lift recess plugs provide two holes in the top surface that are used in the removal process. Insert two screw drivers or steel rods into the holes and simply lever the two across the plug for easy removal.
Determination of the required rated load and length of a P-52 Swift Lift Anchor is based on the actual maximum load that is transferred to the anchor. In most cases, a flat slab can be handled with the anchors properly located in the face of the flat slab. The anchors should normally be the maximum length that can be accommodated in the slabs structural thickness, allowing at least 1/2" clearance between the anchor and the casting bed. Dimension tables and safe working load charts, contained herein, will aid in the selection of the proper anchor. Keep in mind that the safe working load of an anchor is a function of several factors: 1. The effective concrete thickness 2. Actual edge distance 3. Concrete compressive strength at time of lift 4. Anchor length 5. In some applications, the use of a shear bar
Selecting the Proper Swift Lift Anchor
06/09
Swift Lift System

P-52 Swift Lift Anchor Tensile and Shear Capacity
Swift Lift System
ge Ed m u ce im n in sta M Di
Minim um Dista Edge nce
PD PV PT
When anchors are used in the face of thin concrete elements

The following table lists the P-52 Swift Lift Anchors that are currently manufactured. Other sizes and lengths are available on special order. However, the sizes and lengths of anchors shown will handle the majority of flat precast concrete elements. When the P-52 Swift Lift Anchor is properly embedded in normal weight concrete, the tabulated working loads are applicable for any direction of load. This applies even if the direction of load is parallel to the axis of the anchor, perpendicular to it or at any other angle. Minimum distance between anchors is twice the minimum edge distance.
It is critical to remember that in order to obtain the safe working loads listed in the table below, the normal weight concrete must have obtained the minimum concrete strength shown, prior to initial load application.
Swift Lift Anchor Ton x Length

1 ton x 2-5/8" 1 ton x 3-3/8" 1 ton x 4-3/8" 1 ton x 8" 1 ton x 9-1/2" 2 ton x 2-3/4" 2 ton x 3-3/8" 2 ton x 5-1/2" 2 ton x 6" 2 ton x 6-3/4" 2 ton x 11" 4 ton x 3-3/4" 4 ton x 4-1/4" 4 ton x 4-3/4" 4 ton x 5-1/2" 4 ton x 7-1/8" 4 ton x 9-1/2" 4 ton x 14" 4 ton x 19" 8 ton x 4-3/4" 8 ton x 6-3/4" 8 ton x 10" 8 ton x 13-3/8" 8 ton x 26-3/4" 20 ton x 10" 20 ton x 19-3/4"
Safe Working Load

1,700 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,100 lbs. 2,900 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,900 lbs. 5,800 lbs. 7,400 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 6,400 lbs. 11,200 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 25,000 lbs. 40,000 lbs.
Minimum Concrete Strength

3,500 psi 2,200 psi 1,600 psi 1,600 psi 1,600 psi 3,500 psi 3,500 psi 1,600 psi 1,600 psi 1,600 psi 1,600 psi 3,500 psi 3,500 psi 3,500 psi 3,500 psi 1,800 psi 1,600 psi 1,600 psi 1,600 psi 3,500 psi 3,500 psi 3,500 psi 1,600 psi 1,600 psi 3,500 psi 3,500 psi

8" 10" 10" 10" 10" 8" 10" 13" 13" 13" 14" 12" 13" 14" 17" 20" 17" 18" 20" 16" 21" 19" 23" 27" 24" 31"
Safe Working Loads provide a factor of safety of approximately 4 to1 in normal weight concrete. Safe Working Load is based on anchor setback from face of concrete X dimension, as shown on page 28.
28
06/09
Swift Lift System

P-52-W Swift Lift Anchor
To Order:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) system size.
Example:
200, P-52-W Swift Lift Anchors, 2 ton.

Swift Lift Anchor Tons x Length 2 tons x 2-3/4" 4 tons x 3-3/4" Safe Working Load 3,700 lbs. 5,700 lbs. Minimum Concrete Strength 3,500 psi 3,500 psi Minimum Edge Distance 8" 12"
W 2-1/2" 2-3/4"
P-52 Swift Lift Anchors for Edge Lifting

Casting Surface P-59 Shear Bar
C/2 min equals corn imum er dis tanc e
The P-52 Swift Lift Anchors and P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eyes are useful for raising precast concrete panels from their horizontal casting position to a vertical position for handling and shipping. When Swift Lift Anchors are used in thin precast panels and under shear loading conditions, a special shear bar must be used. The applied shear load tends to bend the anchor, allowing the lifting eye to apply load to the thin concrete section above the recess plug. A properly installed shear bar captures the applied load and transfers it deeper into the concrete.
dse
de
When raising precast panels from a horizontal position to a vertical position, always check both shear and tension safe working loads. In order to develop the anchors shear safe working load, the minimum spacing between Swift Lift Anchors is two times the corner distance listed.
Support anchor with bar chair P-52 Swift Lift Anchor
Note: See Shear Bar Chart on page 30.
P-51 Swift Lift Lifting Eye
Lifting eye bears against shear bar which transfers load deeper into the concrete P-52 Swift Lift Anchor 1/2" clear for 1- and 2-ton anchors 3/4" clear for 4- and 8-ton anchors P dse (top) Position P-59 shear bar tight against recess plug
de (bottom)
Casting surface
Note: Properly installed shear bars are required to develop Safe Working Loads shown. 2 x de equals effective wall thickness for tensile loads.
Section View of Swift Lift Assembly
06/09
29
Swift Lift System
The P-52-W Swift Lift Anchors are the shortest 2-ton and 4-ton Swift Lift Anchors available and have been specially modified. A Type W Plain Washer is placed on the anchors foot and welded in position. This modification has been made in order to increase the Safe Working Load of these short Swift Lift Anchors in thin precast concrete elements.
Swift Lift System

P-59 Swift Lift Shear Bar P-59 Swift Lift Smooth Wire Shear Bar
Dayton Superior Swift Lift Shear Bars (P-59) are utilized when edge lifting precast elements. The shear bar is secured tightly to the recess plug and at the time of lift helps to transfer the shear load deeper into the concrete. The P-59 Smooth Wire Shear Bar is designed to snap into the built-in clips on the P-54 recess plug. The standard shear bar is fabricated from rebar and must be securely wired tightly to the Swift Lift recess plugs.
Swift Lift System
P-59 Swift Lift Shear Bar 1-Ton and 8-Ton

Wire Diameter
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) system size. 200, P-59 Swift Lift Shear Bars, 4-Ton.
Overall Width
P-59 Swift Lift Smooth Wire Shear Bar 2-Ton and 4-Ton
Anchor Safe Working Load

(tons)
Shear Bar Type

Rebar Rebar Rebar Wire Wire Wire Wire Wire Wire Wire Wire Wire Rebar Rebar
Overall Width
19" 19" 19" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 30" 30" 30" 30" 34" 34"
Minimum Anchor Length

4-3/4" 4-3/4" 4-3/4" 6-3/4" 6-3/4" 6-3/4" 6-3/4" 6-3/4" 9-1/2" 9-1/2" 9-1/2" 9-1/2" 13-3/8" 13-3/8"
Wall Thickness
5" 5-1/2" 6" 5" 5-1/2" 6" 7" 8" 5-1/2" 6" 7" 8" 8" 9"
Minimum Corner Distance

15" 16" 17" 15" 16" 17" 19" 21" 16" 17" 19" 21" 19" 21"
Safe Working Load

1,750 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 1,750 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 2,600 lbs. 2,700 lbs. 2,800 lbs. 2,100 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 2,600 lbs. 2,800 lbs. 5,600 lbs. 6,700 lbs.
1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 8 8
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 4,500 psi normal weight concrete.
30
06/09
Swift Lift System

P-52 Swift Lift Anchor in Thin Walls
To develop the safe working load of the P-52 Swift Lift Anchor, the minimum spacing between two anchors is six times the anchor length.
P P P Corner Distance L = P-52 Anchor Length
Wall center line de de de Effective Wall Thickness
Center Line of Anchor Foot and Wall
Effective Wall Thickness
Actual Wall Thickness
de = Actual Edge Distance Wall Thickness
Swift Lift Anchor Effective Tensile Capacity in Thin Walls

Swift Lift Anchor Ton x Length Effective Wall Thickness 2 de 2-1/2" 1 Ton x 4-3/4" Long 2-3/4" 3" 3-1/2" 4" 4-1/2" 2-1/2" 1 Ton x 9-1/2" Long 2-3/4" 3" 3-1/2" 4" 4-1/2" Actual Edge Distance de 1-1/4" 1-3/8" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/4" 1-1/4" 1-3/8" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/4" Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor Actual Corner Distance 6" 900 lbs. 1,000 lbs. 1,100 lbs. 1,200 lbs. 1,450 lbs. 1,600 lbs. 1,300 lbs. 1,400 lbs. 1,500 lbs. 1,800 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 12" 1,100 lbs. 1,200 lbs. 1,300 lbs. 1,600 lbs. 1,800 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 1,700 lbs. 1,900 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 18" 1,200 lbs. 1,300 lbs. 1,400 lbs. 1,600 lbs. 1,900 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 1,900 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 24" 1,200 lbs. 1,300 lbs. 1,400 lbs. 1,600 lbs. 1,900 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 1,900 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 30" 1,200 lbs. 1,300 lbs. 1,400 lbs. 1,600 lbs. 1,900 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 1,900 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs.
06/09
31
Swift Lift System
The P-52 Swift Lift Anchors, listed below, must be located the minimum distance away from a corner with the anchor foot being positioned at the center line of the wall. The anchor head location may be off center, however, any eccentricity of the foot will result in a reduction of the safe working load. When the anchor foot is not positioned at the center line of the wall, the effective wall thickness is equal to twice the actual edge distance.
Swift Lift System

Swift Lift System
Swift Lift Anchor Tons x Length
Effective Wall Thickness 2 de 3"
Actual Edge Distance de 1-1/2" 1-5/8" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 1-1/2" 1-5/8" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/2" 3"
Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor Actual Corner Distance 8" 1,500 lbs. 1,600 lbs. 1,700 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,500 lbs. 3,000 lbs. 1,900 lbs. 2,100 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 2,500 lbs. 3,200 lbs. 3,800 lbs. 12" 1,700 lbs. 1,900 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,300 lbs. 2,900 lbs. 3,500 lbs. 2,300 lbs. 2,500 lbs. 2,700 lbs. 3,100 lbs. 3,900 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 18" 2,000 lbs. 2,100 lbs. 2,300 lbs. 2,600 lbs. 3,300 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 2,700 lbs. 3,000 lbs. 3,200 lbs. 3,700 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 24" 2,000 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 2,300 lbs. 2,700 lbs. 3,400 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 3,000 lbs. 3,300 lbs. 3,500 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 30" 2,000 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 2,300 lbs. 2,700 lbs. 3,400 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 3,200 lbs. 3,500 lbs. 3,700 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs.
2 Tons x 6-3/4" Long
3-1/4" 3-1/2" 4" 5" 6" 3"
2 Tons x 11" Long
3-1/4" 3-1/2" 4" 5" 6"
Safe Working Loadprovides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 4,500 psi normal weight concrete.
Effective Wall Thickness 2 de 3-3/4"
Actual Edge Distance de 1-7/8" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 3-1/2" 4" 1-7/8" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 3-1/2" 4"
Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor Actual Corner Distance 10" 2,500 lbs. 2,600 lbs. 3,300 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,700 lbs. 5,300 lbs. 3,500 lbs. 3,800 lbs. 4,700 lbs. 5,700 lbs. 6,600 lbs. 7,600 lbs. 15" 3,000 lbs. 3,200 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,800 lbs. 5,600 lbs. 6,400 lbs. 4,300 lbs. 4,600 lbs. 5,700 lbs. 6,900 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 20" 3,300 lbs. 3,500 lbs. 4,400 lbs. 5,300 lbs. 6,200 lbs. 7,000 lbs. 4,900 lbs. 5,300 lbs. 6,600 lbs. 7,900 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 24" 3,400 lbs. 3,700 lbs. 4,600 lbs. 5,500 lbs. 6,500 lbs. 7,400 lbs. 5,300 lbs. 5,700 lbs. 7,100 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 30" 3,500 lbs. 3,800 lbs. 4,700 lbs. 5,700 lbs. 6,600 lbs. 7,600 lbs. 5,800 lbs. 6,200 lbs. 7,800 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs.
4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 3-3/4"
4 Tons x 19" Long
4" 5" 6" 7" 8"
32
06/09
Swift Lift System

Actual Corner Distance 12" 4,000 lbs. 4,200 lbs. 5,100 lbs. 5,900 lbs. 6,800 lbs. 8,500 lbs. 10,200 lbs. 5,800 lbs. 6,100 lbs. 7,300 lbs. 8,500 lbs. 9,700 lbs. 12,100 lbs. 14,500 lbs. 18" 4,800 lbs. 5,100 lbs. 6,100 lbs. 7,100 lbs. 8,100 lbs. 10,200 lbs. 12,200 lbs. 7,000 lbs. 7,400 lbs. 8,900 lbs. 10,300 lbs. 11,800 lbs. 14,800 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 24" 5,400 lbs. 5,700 lbs. 6,800 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 9,100 lbs. 11,400 lbs. 13,700 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,500 lbs. 9,500 lbs. 11,800 lbs. 13,500 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 36" 6,000 lbs. 6,300 lbs. 7,500 lbs. 8,800 lbs. 10,100 lbs. 12,600 lbs. 15,100 lbs. 9,600 lbs. 10,100 lbs. 12,100 lbs. 14,200 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 45" 6,100 lbs. 6,400 lbs. 7,600 lbs. 8,900 lbs. 10,200 lbs. 12,700 lbs. 15,200 lbs. 11,200 lbs. 11,800 lbs. 14,100 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs.
Effective Wall Thickness 2de 4-3/4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 10" 12" 4-3/4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 10" 12"
Actual Edge Distance de 2-3/8" 2-1/2" 3" 3-1/2" 4" 5" 6" 2-3/8" 2-1/2" 3" 3-1/2" 4" 5" 6"
Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor
Effective Wall Thickness 2de 6-1/2" 7" 8" 10" 12" 14"
Actual Edge Distance de 3-1/4" 3-1/2" 4" 5" 6" 7"
Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor Actual Corner Distance 10" 6,200 lbs. 6,700 lbs. 7,600 lbs. 9,500 lbs. 11,500 lbs. 13,400 lbs. 16" 7,500 lbs. 8,100 lbs. 8,900 lbs. 11,600 lbs. 14,000 lbs. 16,300 lbs. 24" 9,400 lbs. 10,100 lbs. 11,500 lbs. 14,400 lbs. 17,300 lbs. 20,100 lbs. 30" 10,300 lbs. 11,100 lbs. 12,600 lbs. 15,800 lbs. 19,000 lbs. 22,100 lbs. 42" 11,500 lbs. 12,400 lbs. 14,200 lbs. 17,700 lbs. 22,000 lbs. 24,800 lbs.
Safe Working Loadprovides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 4,500 psi normal weight concrete. To recalculate the safe working load when the anchor is used in a lower strength concrete, multiply the tabulated Safe Working Load by the following reduction factors: Concrete Strength 2,000 2,500 3,000 3,500 4,000 4,500 psi psi psi psi psi psi Reduction Factor .66 .74 .81 .88 .94 1.00
06/09
Swift Lift System

Swift Lift Anchor Effective Tensile Capacity
Swift Lift System
When anchors are used in groups and in thin walls

Swift Lift Anchor Tons x Length Effective Wall Thickness 2 de 3" 2 Tons x 6-3/4" Long 3-1/4" 3-1/2" 4" 5" 6" 3" 2 Tons x 11" Long 3-1/4" 3-1/2" 4" 5" 6" Actual Edge Distance de 1-1/2" 1-5/8" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 1-1/2" 1-5/8" 1-3/4" 2" 2-1/2" 3" Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor In Groups C = Actual Spacing Between Anchors 18" 1,200 lbs. 1,300 lbs. 1,400 lbs. 1,600 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,500 lbs. 1,300 lbs. 1,400 lbs. 1,500 lbs. 1,700 lbs. 2,100 lbs. 2,600 lbs. 24" 1,500 lbs. 1,700 lbs. 1,800 lbs. 2,100 lbs. 2,600 lbs. 3,100 lbs. 1,700 lbs. 1,800 lbs. 1,900 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 2,800 lbs. 3,400 lbs. 30" 1,800 lbs. 1,900 lbs. 2,100 lbs. 2,400 lbs. 3,000 lbs. 3,600 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 2,400 lbs. 2,700 lbs. 3,400 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 36" 1,900 lbs. 2,100 lbs. 2,300 lbs. 2,600 lbs. 3,200 lbs. 3,900 lbs. 2,300 lbs. 2,500 lbs. 2,700 lbs. 3,100 lbs. 3,900 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 48" 2,000 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 2,400 lbs. 2,700 lbs. 3,400 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 2,900 lbs. 3,100 lbs. 3,300 lbs. 3,800 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs.
Effective Wall Thickness 2 de 3-3/4"
Actual Edge Distance de 1-7/8" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 3-1/2" 4" 1-7/8" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 3-1/2" 4"
Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor In Groups C = Actual Spacing Between Anchors 18" 1,600 lbs. 1,700 lbs. 2,100 lbs. 2,500 lbs. 3,000 lbs. 3,400 lbs. 1,600 lbs. 1,700 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 2,600 lbs. 3,100 lbs. 3,500 lbs. 24" 2,000 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 2,700 lbs. 3,300 lbs. 3,900 lbs. 4,400 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 2,300 lbs. 2,900 lbs. 3,500 lbs. 4,100 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 36" 2,800 lbs. 3,000 lbs. 3,800 lbs. 4,600 lbs. 5,300 lbs. 6,100 lbs. 3,200 lbs. 3,400 lbs. 4,300 lbs. 5,100 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 6,800 lbs. 48" 3,300 lbs. 3,600 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 5,400 lbs. 6,300 lbs. 7,200 lbs. 4,100 lbs. 4,400 lbs. 5,500 lbs. 6,600 lbs. 7,700 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 60" 3,500 lbs. 3,800 lbs. 4,700 lbs. 5,700 lbs. 6,700 lbs. 7,600 lbs. 5,000 lbs. 5,300 lbs. 6,600 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs.
4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 3-3/4"
4 Tons x 19" Long
4" 5" 6" 7" 8"
34
06/09
Swift Lift System

Swift Lift Anchor Effective Tensile Capacity
Swift Lift Anchor Tons x Length Effective Wall Thickness 2 de 4-3/4" 5" 8 Tons x 13-3/8" Long 6" 7" 8" 10" 12" 4-3/4" 5" 8 Tons x 26-3/4" Long 6" 7" 8" 10" 12" Actual Edge Distance de 2-3/8" 2-1/2" 3" 3-1/2" 4" 5" 5-1/2" 2-3/8" 2-1/2" 3" 3-1/2" 4" 5" 5-1/2" Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor In Groups C = Actual Spacing Between Anchors 18" 2,800 lbs. 2,900 lbs. 3,500 lbs. 4,100 lbs. 4,700 lbs. 5,900 lbs. 6,500 lbs. 2,900 lbs. 3,100 lbs. 3,700 lbs. 4,300 lbs. 4,900 lbs. 6,100 lbs. 6,700 lbs. 24" 3,600 lbs. 3,800 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 5,300 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 7,500 lbs. 8,300 lbs. 3,800 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,800 lbs. 5,700 lbs. 6,500 lbs. 8,100 lbs. 8,900 lbs. 36" 4,800 lbs. 5,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 7,100 lbs. 8,100 lbs. 10,100 lbs. 11,000 lbs. 5,600 lbs. 5,900 lbs. 7,100 lbs. 8,300 lbs. 9,400 lbs. 11,800 lbs. 13,000 lbs. 48" 5,300 lbs. 5,600 lbs. 6,700 lbs. 7,800 lbs. 8,900 lbs. 11,200 lbs. 12,300 lbs. 7,200 lbs. 7,600 lbs. 9,100 lbs. 10,600 lbs. 12,100 lbs. 15,100 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 60" 5,300 lbs. 5,600 lbs. 6,700 lbs. 7,800 lbs. 8,900 lbs. 11,200 lbs. 12,300 lbs. 8,500 lbs. 9,000 lbs. 10,800 lbs. 12,500 lbs. 14,300 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs.
When anchors are used in groups and in Thin Walls
Effective Wall Thickness 2 de 6-1/2" 7" 8" 10" 12" 14"
Actual Edge Distance de 3-1/4" 3-1/2" 4" 5" 6" 7"
Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor In Groups C= Actual Spacing Between Anchors 20" 4,300 lbs. 4,700 lbs. 5,400 lbs. 6,700 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 9,300 lbs. 24" 5,200 lbs. 5,600 lbs. 6,300 lbs. 7,900 lbs. 9,500 lbs. 11,100 lbs. 33" 6,800 lbs. 7,400 lbs. 8,400 lbs. 10,500 lbs. 12,600 lbs. 14,700 lbs. 42" 8,300 lbs. 8,900 lbs. 10,200 lbs. 12,700 lbs. 15,300 lbs. 17,800 lbs. 60" 10,200 lbs. 11,000 lbs. 12,600 lbs. 15,700 lbs. 18,900 lbs. 22,000 lbs.
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 4,500 psi normal weight concrete. To recalculate the Safe Working Loads when the anchor is used in a lower strength concrete, multiply the tabulated Safe Working Load by the following reduction factors: Concrete Strength 2,000 2,500 3,000 3,500 4,000 4,500 psi psi psi psi psi psi Reduction Factor .66 .74 .81 .88 .94 1.00
06/09
Swift Lift System

P-53 Swift Lift Eye Anchor
Swift Lift System
The Dayton Superior Swift LIft Eye Anchor (P-53) is similar to the P-52 anchor but has an eye at the foot to accept P-60 Tension Bars. The P-53 anchor is used primarily in thin sections, thin panels of lightweight concrete or shapes that must be handled at concrete compressive strengths below 2,000 psi. P-53 anchors are available in 1, 2, 4, 8 and 20-ton capacities and each has its load rating embossed on the head.
4
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) system size, (4) length. 200, P-53 Swift Lift Eye Anchors, 4 ton, 9-1/2" long.
P-53 Swift Lift Eye Anchor
The P-53 Swift Lift Eye Anchor is designed for use with the P-60 Tension Bar placed through the eye of the anchor. This combination of Swift Lift Eye Anchor and P-60 Tension Bar allows the anchors full rated tensile load to be developed in thin, narrow wall applications. The anchor should be located at the center line of the wall. When two or more anchors are required, the minimum spacing between anchors must be equal to the minimum panel width. The combination of P-53 Swift Lift Eye Anchor and P-60 Tension Bar is an excellent system to use for lifting, handling and setting precast columns.
P Center line of wall and P-53 Swift Lift Eye Anchor
P-53 Swift Lift Eye Anchor for Lifting and Handling
el Pan m u um nim inimner Mi M Cor nce ta Dis
dt Wi
m imu th Min n Wid lum Co
Col
C L C L
Min im um um nD ept h
L= Anchor Length
de = Actual Edge Distance Wall Thickness
P-53 Swift Lift Eye Anchor Selection Chart

Anchor Rated Load
(Tons)
Anchor Length L 2-1/2" 3-1/2" 4-3/4" 7-1/16" 9-7/8"
Minimum Thickness or Depth 2 de 3" 3" 3-3/4" 4-3/4" 6-3/8"
Actual Edge Distance de 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1-7/8" 2-3/8" 6-3/4"
Minimum Corner Distance 8" 4" 5" 7" 8-1/2"
Minimum Panel Width 16" 8" 10" 14" 17"
Tensile Safe Working Load per Anchor* 2,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 40,000 lbs.
1 2 4 8 20
*Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 2,000 psi normal weight concrete. The P-53 Eye Anchor must be used in conjunction with the P-60 Tension Bar in order to develop its published rated working loads. Note: Contact Dayton Superior Technical Service Department for safe working loads when the P-53 Eye Anchor is used with straight lengths of rebar. 36 06/09
Swift Lift System

P-60 Swift Lift Tension Bar
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) anchor size.
Swift Lift System
R
The Dayton Superior Swift Lift Tension Bar (P-60) is designed to be used with the P-53 Eye Anchor in order for the eye anchor to develop its published rated working loads. See P-60 sizes and dimensions below.
To Order: Example:
200, P-60 Swift Lift Tension Bar, 10-ton anchor.
P-60 Swift Lift Tension Bar P-60 Swift Lift Tension Bar Dimensions
Anchor Rated Load
(Tons)
Grade 60 Rebar Size .306" Wire #3 #5 #6 #9
Rebar Overall Length 40" 24" 24" 48" 86"
A Standard 14" 5" 6 -1 /4 " 9 -1 /2 " 1 2 -1 /2 " Maximum 7 -1 /2 " 10" 15" 20" R 3/4" 1-1/8" 1-7/8" 2-1/4" 3"
A 14" R
1 2 4 8 20
Note: Wire style is for use with 1 ton P-53 Eye Anchors only.
P-60 Rebar Style
P-60 Wire Style
P-60 Swift Lift Tension Bar Installation

The proper installation of a tension bar is as follows: 1) Place the tension bar through the eye of the anchor in such a manner that the tension bar contacts the bottom of the eye. 2) Make certain the legs of the tension bar are equal on either side of the anchor. 3) Wire the tension bar into position so that the tension bar stays in contact with the bottom of the eye.(See sketch below.) DO NOTattempt to use field-bent bars as a replacement for the Dayton Superior P-60 Tension Bar. Field bending may result in an improperly shaped tension bar, an incorrect radius and/or a cracked bar. A problem, such as this, can cause the field-bent tension bar to fail prematurely.
Right
Wrong
06/09
37
Swift Lift System

P-54 Swift Lift Throw-Away Recess Plug
The Dayton Superior P-54 Recess Plug is fabricated from high-density polyethylene plastic in two sizes (2-ton and 4-ton) to accommodate the P-52 Swift Lift Anchor. The two-piece design snaps together around the head of the anchor to securely grasp the anchor. Tabs on the recess plug provide a convenient method to nail the assembly to the form. Built-in retainers allow a P-59 Shear Bar to clip to the recess plug and be held in correct position. The P-54 recess plug is designed to properly position the anchor below the surface of the concrete. This allows easy patching of the recess and prevents surface staining from exposed steel.
Warning: The P-54 recess plug is designed to be used with the P-52 insert and P-59 shear bar combination. Failure to use these components in this combination may result in concrete spalling and/or premature failure. Swift Lift System
P-54 Swift Lift Recess Plug

3" for 9/16" Diameter Anchors 3-3/4" for 3/4" Diameter Anchors
To Order:

Example:
200, P-54 Swift Lift Recess Plugs, 4-ton anchor
Anchor Foot
Anchor Head
Anchor Foot
Assemble the P-54 Recess Plug by placing the head 1. of the P-52 Swift-Lift Anchor inside two halves of the recess plug. Then snap the two halves together. It is very
correctly assembled P-54 Recess Plug and P-52 2.A Swift Lift Anchor.
difficult to assemble the unit with the foot of the anchor inside the P-54 Recess Plug and still get the two halves to close together correctly. If the two halves of the P-54 Recess Plug do not fit closely together, it could be because the anchor is in upside down. In such a case, reverse the anchor and try again.
Attach the assembled P-54 Recess Plug and anchor to 3. the form work in its predetermined location with the recess plug seam in the vertical position. Use common (not double headed) nails in the upper three tabs of the recess plug. The plug and anchor assembly can also be attached to the form work by using a 2-ton stud and wingnut if desired. Provide bar supports around the anchor, as shown, to prevent displacement during the casting process.
Slip the preformed shear bar on the P-54 Recess Plug, 4. as shown. The receiving tabs of the P-54 Recess Plug will correctly position the shear bar. Usually, additional
support wiring is not needed to hold the shear bar in place. However, prudent users will provide an additional wire tie or two, to make certain the shear bar will not dislodge during concrete placement. Wire tie the P-52 SwiftLift Anchor to reinforcing steel, as shown.
38
06/09
Swift Lift System

P-56 Swift Lift Narrow Recess Plug
The Dayton Superior P-56 Swift Lift Narrow Recess Plug is designed for use in thin-wall conditions, such as the top edge of highway safety barriers. The recess plug is bolted to the form using a P-63 stud and P-64 wing nut combination and it correctly positions the anchor below the surface of the concrete. P-56 recess plugs are fabricated from nitrile butadiene and are ideal for use in conditions requiring temperature or oil resistance.
T
To Order:

Z
Example:
200, P-56 Swift Lift Narrow Recess Plugs, 4-ton anchor.

B
Diameter
Swift Narrow Recess Plug Dimensions Swift Lift Lift Round and Narrow Recess Plug Dimensions
Z
Swift Lift Anchor 1 2 4 8 20 Tons
Diameter of Recess Plug 2-3/8" 3" 3-3/4" 4-3/4" 6-3/8"
Dimension Z 1-3/16" 1-7/16" 1-13/16" 2-5/16" 3-1/8"
Dimension T 1-21/32" 2-1/32" 2-3/4" 3-11/32" 4-15/16"
Dimension B 1-11/32" 1-23/32" 2-9/32" 2-15/16" 4-7/16"
Note: The diameter of the narrow recess plug is the same as the diameter of the round recess plug.
P-56R Swift Lift Round Recess Plug

The Dayton Superior P-56 Swift Lift Round Recess Plug is fabricated from nitrile butadiene and ideal for use in conditions requiring temperature or oil resistance. The plug must use the P-63R Attachment Stud and P-66R Attachment Nut. This plug can not be attached to the form with either a Holding Plate or Magnetic Setting Plate. Dimensions of the recess plug are slightly smaller than the standard P-56 PL urethane plug. This recess is available by special order.
Diameter
Swift Lift Round Recess Plug Dimensions

Z
Swift Lift Anchor 1 2 4 8 20 Tons
Diameter of Recess Plug 2.375 2.918 3.661 4.659 6.375
Depth "Z" 1.188 1.514 1.875 2.375 3.063
06/09
Swift Lift System

P-56-PL Swift Lift Plus Recess Plug
The Dayton Superior P-56-PL Swift Lift Plus Recess Plug is manufactured from high-grade elastomeric, thermal set urethane to provide improved tear, heat and chemical resistance. The versatile, reusable plug utilizes a variety of accessories to provide installation and stripping ease in many different applications. P-56-PL recess plugs are available for 1, 2, 4 and 8-ton system sizes. See dimensions of P-56-PL Recess Plug on Page 26. Fixed
Nut Free Running Nut Holding Stud With Wing Nut P-63-PL
Swift Lift System
P-56-PL Swift Lift Plus Recess Plug
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) anchor size. 200, P-56-PL Swift Lift Plus Recess Plugs, 4-ton anchor
Coil Wing Nut P-64-PL
P-56-PL Swift Lift Plus Recess Plug Typical Installations
Holding Plate P-68-PL
Holding Plate (Optional) P-68-PL Stud Plate P-67-PL
Recess Plug P-56-PL
Tapped Plate P-66-PL
Recess Plug P-56-PL
Recess Plug P-56-PL Swift Lift Anchor REF
Swift Lift Anchor REF
Swift Lift Anchor REF
P-57 Swift Lift Steel Recess Plug P-58 Swift Lift Rubber Ring
The Dayton Superior P-57 Swift Lift Steel Recess Plug is designed for permanent or semi-permanent attachment to repetitive-use precast forms, such as battery molds, steel forms that have a collapsible stripping feature, etc. The recess plug is drilled and tapped for easy attachment to the form or may be held in place by a magnetic plate, tack welded or glued. The P-58 Swift Lift Rubber Ring is placed on the shaft of the anchor and seats in the recess plug to hold the anchor firmly in the recess plug. It is recommended that when the P-57 recess plug is used, that the anchor end be supported to prevent dislodging (See sketch below).
P-57 Swift Lift Steel Recess
P-57 Swift Lift Steel Recess Plug
Tie Wire To Nearby Reinforcing Steel
P-58 Swift Lift Rubber Ring For Steel Recess Plug
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) anchor size. 100, P-57 Swift Lift Steel Recess Plugs, 4 ton anchor and 400 P-58 Swift Lift Rubber Rings for 4-ton anchors.
06/09
Form Face
P-58 Swift Lift Rubber Ring
40
Swift Lift System

P-61 Swift Lift Setting Plate, P-62 Countersunk Screw
The Dayton Superior P-61 Swift Lift Setting Plate and P-62 Countersunk Screw combination provide an easy method of placing a Swift Lift Anchor into the surface of a flat panel without obstructing the screeding process. The P-61 setting plate is available in two sizes, a 4" unit for use with 4-ton anchors and a 5" unit for use with 8-ton anchors. The P-62 screw is available in two sizes to match the setting plates. The-4 ton setup uses a 3/4" long, 5/16" 18 NC thread screw and the 8-ton setup uses a 3/4" long, 7/16" 14 NC thread screw.
Setting Plate With Countersunk Screw Tapped Plate
Rubber Recess Plug Anchor
To Order: Example:
P-61 Swift Lift Setting Plate P-62 Swift Lift Countersunk Screw
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) anchor size. 200, P-61 Swift Lift Setting Plates and 200, P-62 Countersunk Screws for 4-ton anchors.
P-63 Swift Lift Stud, P-64 Swift Lift Wing Nut

The Dayton Superior P-63 Swift Lift Stud and P-64 Wing Nut combination is used to set P-56 Narrow Recess Plugs. Available in two sizes, 5/16" 18 NC threads for use with the 1-ton anchor and 7/16" 14 NC threads for use with 2, 4, 8 and 20-ton P-56 anchors.
Note: The P-63 Stud and P-64 Wing Nut are not interchangeable with the P-56-PL Recess Plug accessories.
To Order: Example:
Specify: 1) quantity, (2) name, (3) size. 200, P-63 Swift Lift Studs and 200 P-64 Swift Lift Wing Nuts, 7/16" dia.
P-63 Swift Lift Stud P-64 Swift Lift Wing Nut
P-63-PL Swift Lift Plus Holding Stud, P-64-PL Swift Lift Plus Wing Nut
The Dayton Superior P-63-PL Swift Lift Plus Holding Stud is a 3/8" diameter, coil threaded stud with a fixed wing nut and a freerunning wing nut used with the P-66-PL threaded plate to quickly attach the P-56-PL recess plug to the formwork. The holding stud is inserted through the form and threaded into the threaded plate. Complete the anchor installation by screwing the free-running wing nut tightly against the form. The P-64-PL Wing Nut has 3/8" diameter coil thread and is available as a replacement nut for the P-63-PL Holding Stud.
Thread Reduced Diameter Threaded Nose
Fixed
Free
Swift Lift Anchor
Holding Stud
6"
P-63-PL Swift Lift Plus Holding Stud
Tie Swift Lift Anchor to reinforcing steel to ensure anchor support
To Order: Example:
06/09
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name.

P-64-PL Swift Lift Plus Wing Nut
200, P-63-PL Swift Lift Plus Holding Studs.

41
Swift Lift System
No Obstruction for Screeding
Swift Lift System

P-66 Swift Lift Tapped Plate
Swift Lift System
The Dayton Superior Swift Lift Tapped Plate (P-66) is tapped for either a 5/16" or 7/16" diameter NC thread and used to install the P-56 Narrow Recess Plug. This is a replacement plate only; it can be used with the P-63 Stud or with NC bolts supplied by others.
To Order:
P-66 Swift Lift Tapped Plate 5/16" or 7/16" Dia. NCThreads
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) thread size.
Example:
100, P-66 Swift Lift Tapped Plate, 7/16" dia. NC thread.
P-66-PL Swift Lift Plus Threaded Plate P-67-PL Swift Lift Plus Stud Plate P-68-PL Swift Lift Plus Holding Plate
The Dayton Superior P-66-PL Swift Lift Plus Threaded Plate, P-67-PL Stud Plate and P-68-PL Holding Plate are working parts used to install the P-56-PL Recess Plug in various applications. These working parts are available in 1, 2, 4 and 8-ton system sizes.
To Order:
P-66-PL Swift Lift Plus Threaded Plate
Example:
100, P-66-PL Swift Lift Plus Threaded Plate, 4-ton system.

Length
P-67-PL Swift Lift Plus Stud Plate
P-68-PL Swift Lift Plus Holding Plate
P-69 Swift Lift Magnetic Setting Plate

The Dayton Superior P-69 Swift Lift Magnetic Setting Plates are available to firmly set P-56-PL Recess Plugs in metal, precast concrete forms. The reusable magnetic setting plate eliminates holes drilled in the metal forms for anchor setting purposes.
To Order:
P-69 Swift Lift Magnetic Setting Plate
Example:
20, P-69 Swift Lift Magnetic Setting Plates, 4-ton system.
NOTE: One piece recess plug with magnets imbedded in top available, contact DSC Customer Service.
42 06/09
Swift Lift System

P-74 Pipe Turning System
Swift Lift System
The Dayton Superior P-74 Pipe Turning System has been designed to reduce the costs in lifting, transporting and laying precast concrete pipes. Substantial cost savings have been proven when compared to laying pipes by conventional methods. A significant advantage, when using this system, is that there are no holes to be filled. This eliminates the potential for poor quality hole filling and results in a consistent high quality, leak-free pipe. The Dayton Superior Pipe Turning System consists of two P-74 Pipe Turning Devices and two P-52 Swift Lift Anchors. For proper operation, the Swift Lift Anchors must be installed at the center of gravity of the precast element. P-74 Pipe Turning Devices are available for use with 4, 8 or 20-ton Swift Lift Anchors. They can be used to lift, transport, turn or install precast concrete elements. Turning and Lifting The cables are only to be hoisted vertically; deviation from the vertical should not exceed < 5 . Bending loading to the cables or to the cable-end fastening is not permitted. Available as two different styles: Style A and Style B. Style A has the wire rope thimble installed parallel with the center line of the Swift Lift Anchor while Style B has the wire rope thimble installed at 90 to the center line of the anchor.
P-74 Pipe Turning Devices Style A Style B
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) style. 4, P-74 Pipe Turning Devices, Style B.
P-74 Installation Instructions

The Dayton Superior P-74 Pipe Turning Device must be greased before its first use. To attach the Pipe Turning Device, push the jaws over the head of the Swift Lift Anchor as the hand wheel is turned, the jaws are pulled into the pressure plate and they are securely clamped around the head of the anchor. The pressure plate should now be tight against the face of the precast concrete element. For precast concrete pipes, it is sufficient that the pressure plate be tight against the crown of the pipe. The hand wheel DOES NOT require the use of force to clamp the jaws onto the head of the anchor. Once the jaws are clamped into position, the safety bore-hole should be visible outside the hand wheel. In order to guarantee proper operation, the faces of both jaws must be clean and free of any dirt or debris. DO NOT attempt to lift and rotate a precast concrete element unless the above instructions have been completed. To remove the unit from the precast pipe, back off the hand wheel until the jaws are released from the head of the anchor. The parts that make up this product are subject to a certain amount of wear and damage. The user must ensure that a qualified person inspects the P-74 Pipe Turning Device, before it is used each day. Clean and grease the unit after every 100 uses. Worn and/or damaged parts are to be replaced by NEW parts supplied by Dayton Superior. For assistance in determining proper maintenance and inspection, contact the nearest Dayton Superior Technical Services office.
06/09 43
Jaws Pressure Plate Hand Wheel
Swift Lift System

P-74-S Pipe Laying Sling
Swift Lift System
Advantages Reduced construction time Reduced construction costs Improved safety The Dayton Superior P-74-S Pipe Laying Slings have been designed to reduce the costs in lifting, transporting and laying precast concrete pipes. Substantial cost savings have been proven when compared to laying pipes by conventional methods. P-74-S Pipe Laying Slings are available for use with 4-ton Swift Lift Anchors. They can be used to lift, transport, and lay precast concrete pipe. Available as two different styles for laying 60" to 96" pipe and 96" to 138" pipe.
Clevis Links B CL Hook
CL D C
To Order: Example:
P-74-S Pipe Laying Sling
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) style. 4, P-74-S Pipe Laying Slings, Short Style.
P-74-S Sling Dimensions and Proper Hardware Attachment

The Dayton Superior P-74-S Pipe Laying Sling is manufactured as a three-legged chain sling with three P-50 Universal Lifting Eyes and three clevis links to enable the chain lengths to be shortened, as needed. The clevis links are also used to hold the chains when they are not in use (when changing from symmetrical to asymmetrical operations). The sling is so constructed that either a symmetrical or asymmetrical lifting sling can be made.
C
15 to 60 D Extended Lip Pointed Inward A
Pipe Lengths 60" to 96" 96" to 138"
Sling Style Short Long
A 57" 75"
B 16" 24"
C 41" 51"
D 76" 110"
44
06/09
Pipe Turning System

Transporting, Lowering and Placing Pipe in Trench
When pipes are laid on fill, without a footing, care must be taken to clear the fill away from the area of the joint to ensure that fill is not introduced into the pipe joint. The pipes may be prevented from rolling laterally by partial backfilling.
As Close As Possible B A C
Direction of Laying Pipe
Joining the Pipes

The long leg of the Pipe Laying Sling is attached to the farthest anchor on the previously laid pipe. The free leg is attached out of the way on the clevis link provided. Locate the center of lift over the closest anchor of the previously laid pipe. This will properly align the direction of pull. The pipe is pulled into position by slowly raising the boom on the crane or backhoe without moving the boom forward or backward.
Roller Block
D C
Releasing the Load

When the pipe has been pulled into position, the load is released and the Pipe Laying System is moved to the next pipe, and the process is repeated.
Warning: Anchors can become overloaded and fail if the crane or backhoe continues to apply load after the connection has been completed. When handling precast concrete elements, extreme care should be taken to ensure that impact or dynamic loads are kept to a minimum. Impact or dynamic loads can greatly increase the applied load to the anchors. Failure to observe the above warnings may lead to property damage, personnel injury and death.
D C
06/09
45
Swift Lift System
Pipes are transported and laid into position using the Pipe Laying Sling in its symmetrical mode. They are lowered into the trench close to the previous pipe laid.
Notes and Sketches
Swift Lift System
46
06/09
Fleet-Lift System
The Dayton Superior Fleet-Lift System comprises two main parts, the Fleet-Lift Anchor and the Fleet-Lift Ring Clutch. The design of the system allows loads to be applied from any direction.
Fleet-Lift System Components
The selection of the proper capacity Fleet-Lift System is based on several factors, such as: Size of precast element Rigging configuration Compressive strength of concrete at initial lift Embedment depth of anchor Edge distance Anchor spacing Direction of applied load Use of tension bars, shear bars or shear plates.
Each Fleet-Lift anchor is stamped with its MAXIMUM safe working load and the letters DSC, which identifies it as a Dayton Superior Corporation product. The hole near the top of the anchor head is designed to receive the appropriate size ring clutch. Both the anchor and ring clutch are rated with a safe working load. The safe working load of the anchor is based on a factor of safety of 4 to 1 (ultimate to safe). Each ring clutch has a Load Range embossed on it, which shows the anchors it can be used with. A factor of safety of 5 to 1 is applied to the highest load in the range for each size of ring clutch. To use, simply push the ring clutch onto the head of the anchor that is located in a recess created by a Fleet-Lift recess plug. Once the ring clutch is pushed onto the head of the anchor, the ring clutchs curved bolt is pushed through the hole in the anchor. This locks the ring clutch and anchor into a single unit ready to lift the precast concrete element. To disengage the anchor and ring clutch, simply pull the curved bolt free of the anchor this allows the ring clutch to be easily removed form the head of the anchor. Dayton Superior recommends a minimum 3/4" cover between the bottom of an anchor and the concrete surface. This minimum recommended concrete cover is to prevent anchor corrosion.
06/09
47
Fleet-Lift System
Fleet-Lift System
P-91-S Fleet-Lift Ring Clutch

The P-91-S Fleet-Lift Ring Clutch consists of a clutch body, a curved bolt and a high strength bail. Installation and release is safe and simple. After the clutch is inserted over the anchor head and into the recess, the curved bolt is rotated into the closed position. Rotation of the standard bail is a full 360 . Once engaged and supporting four hundred pounds of load, the ring clutch cannot be released.
Fleet-Lift System
A B
E G C F
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code, (3) system size. 9, P-91-S Fleet-Lift Ring Clutches, FL002S, 4/6-ton units.
P-91-S Fleet-Lift Ring Clutch

D
P-91-S Fleet-Lift Ring Clutch Selection Chart Safe Working Load

(Tons)
Load Range
(Tons)
Product Code FL001S FL002S FL003S
A 3-3/4" 4-3/4" 5-7/8"
B 2-3/8" 2-5/8" 3"
C 10-1/2" 12-1/2" 17-3/4"
D 3" 4" 5-7/8"
E 7" 8-1/4" 11"
F 3" 3-1/2" 4-1/2"
G 1" 1-1/2" 2-1/8"
3 6 10
2-3 4-6 8-10
Installation of P-91-S Ring Clutch
The P-91-S Ring Clutch is located directly over the head of a Fleet-Lift Anchor.
The ring clutch is pushed down onto the anchor head and the curved bolt is rotated through the engagement hole of the anchor and locked into position. The process of engaging anchor and ring clutch is completed in seconds.
06/09
48
Fleet-Lift System
P-91-NC Fleet-Lift Cable Bail Ring Clutch

The Fleet-Lift Ring Clutch with cable bail can be the solution to many difficult lifting and rotating-to-vertical situations. Cable bails can also be used to replace bent or damaged bails on standard clutches. The engagement, use and release of the Cable Bail Ring Clutch are similar in operation to the standard Ring Clutch with the fixed bail. Once the load is relaxed, the ring clutch can be easily released. P-91-NC Fleet-Lift Cable Bail Ring Clutch Selection Chart
Load Range (Tons) Product Code A B C D E E D
Safe Working Load (Tons)
3 6 10
2-3 4-6 8-10
FL001NC FL002NC FL003NC
30" 36" 36"
9/16" 3/4" 1"
2-3/4" 3-11/16" 5-5/16"
2-3/8" 3-38" 3-3/4"
4-3/8" 6-5/8" 7-1/8"
Safe working load provides a factor of safety of approximately 5 to 1.
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code, (4) system size. 9 P-91-NC Fleet-Lift Cable Bail Ring Clutches, FL002NC, 4/6-ton units.
Inspection and Maintenance of Ring Clutches

The Fleet-Lift P-91-S and P-91-NC Ring Clutches may be subject to wear, misuse, overloading and many other factors that may affect a Ring Clutchs safe working load. The users must establish a program for inspection of their Ring Clutches based on their frequency of use. Inspections should consist of the following: 1) Determine the general overall condition and wear. 2) Make certain the bail can rotate freely in all directions. 3) If evidence of heat application is found, the clutch must be destroyed. 4) Check for bent or twisted bails. 5) Check for worn or bent curved bolt. 6) Check for worn or deformed main clutch body. 7) Check for enlarged engagement slot. During inspection of the clutch body, if the engagement slot is found to exceed dimension W, remove the ring clutch from service and destroy it.
Safe Working Load
(Tons)
Load Range
(Tons)
W 0.562" 0.781" 0.921"
3 6 10
2-3 4-6 8-10
Note: Destroy all units if found to be worn, damaged, bent or twisted. The proper method for use in destroying a Ring Clutch is to cut off and remove the bail. No repair or welding on Fleet-Lift Ring Clutches is permitted.
Additional Inspection of Cable Bails

Before every use, inspect the wire cable for: 1) Damage or extreme wear 2) Bends or kinks 3) Fraying or loosening of outer strands 4) Squeezes in the free length 5) Squeezes in the support area 6) Cable swelling
06/09
7) Cable ruptures in excess of four runners in three diameters of the cable length, six runners in six diameters of the cable length or sixteen runners in 30 diameters of cable length. If the cable is damaged, it must be replaced. Dayton Superior can arrange for cable replacement. Contact the nearest Dayton Superior Sales Service Center for information and cost.
49
Fleet-Lift System
P-91-NC Fleet-Lift Cable Bail Ring Clutch
Fleet-Lift System
P-92 Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor

Fleet-Lift P-92 Erection Anchors are specifically designed for horizontal to vertical edge lifts and handling of thin-walled precast concrete elements. Two steel protrusions or ears on the head of the anchor provide protection against concrete spalling. These protrusions restrict the ring clutch rotation during lateral pulls. As a result, lateral forces are transmitted directly to the edge of the anchor instead of the concrete. The body of the Erection Anchor is shaped to allow full reinforcement for secure support and spall-free rotation. P-92 Erection Anchors are available plain or hot-dipped galvanized.
X A
E F
D C
Fleet-Lift System
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) anchor style, (4) corrosion resistance, if required. 200 P-92 Fleet-Lift Erection Anchors, FL047, hot-dipped galvanized.
H J
P-92 Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor Dimensions Safe Working Load

(Tons)
Product Code FL047 FL048 FL349 * FL049
A 2" 2-1/2" 3-3/4" 3-3/4"
B 8" 10-7/16" 13-1/4" 13-1/4"
C 3/8" 5/8" 5/8" 3/4"
D 1-13/16" 2-1/2" 3-1/8" 3-1/8"
E 2-3/8" 3-3/16" 4" 4"
F 3-3/8" 4-7/16" 5-3/4" 5-3/4"
G 5/8" 3/4" 1" 1"
H 1" 1-1/4" 1-3/4" 1-3/4"
J 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4"
X 3/8" 7/16" 5/8" 5/8"
2 4 6 8
Note: Dimension X is distance from surface of concrete to anchor. * Use 8-10T P-99 Recess and P-91 Ring Clutch with FL349
Shear Reinforcement
Stress is caused during the edge lift of a panel, making supplemental reinforcement around the anchor necessary in thin panels. Fleet-Lift P-98-S Shear Bars are designed expressly for this purpose. Place the shear bar in the side notch of the anchor as shown in the sketch at right. Reference P-98-S Shear Bar on page 68.
Note: A properly installed P-98-S Shear Bar is required to develop the shear safe working loads shown in the chart on the following page.
Direction of Lift
Tension Reinforcement
The P-92 Dayton Superior Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor is manufactured with a steel tension pin that resists pullout during normal erection situations. The safe working load chart, on the following page, list two sets of tension values. If the higher safe working load is used, the anchor must be properly reinforced using the P-98-T Tension Reinforcement. The tension bar should be placed through the lower hole of the anchor. Reference P-98-T Tension Reinforcement on page 68.
Typical P-92 Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor/ Shear Bar Application
Typical P-92 Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor/Tension Bar Application

06/09
50
Fleet-Lift System
P-92 Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor Tension and Shear Capacities

(ton x length)
Product Code FL047 FL047 FL047 FL047 FL047 FL047 FL047 FL047 FL047 FL048 FL048 FL048 FL048 FL048 FL048 FL048 FL048 FL349 FL349 FL349 FL349 FL349 FL349 FL049 FL049 FL049 FL049 FL049 FL049
Precast Concrete Panel Thickness 4" Min. 5" 6" 7" 8" 9" 10" 11" 12" 5-1/2" Min. 6" 7" 8" 9" 10" 11" 12" 7-1/2" Min. 8" 9" 10" 11" 12" 7-1/2" Min. 8" 9" 10" 11" 12"
Shear Safe Working Load with Shear Bar 1,650 lbs. 1,875 lbs. 2,125 lbs. 2,400 lbs. 2,700 lbs. 2,925 lbs. 3,275 lbs. 3,575 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 2,400 lbs. 3,075 lbs. 3,250 lbs. 3,425 lbs. 3,825 lbs. 4,250 lbs. 4,650 lbs. 5,050 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,200 lbs. 4,550 lbs. 4,950 lbs. 5,050 lbs. 5,175 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,200 lbs. 4,550 lbs. 4,950 lbs. 5,050 lbs. 5,175 lbs.
Tension Safe Working Tension Safe Working Load with Anchor Only Load With Tension Bar 2,575 lbs. 3,350 lbs. 3,850 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,700 lbs. 5,050 lbs. 5,825 lbs. 6,600 lbs. 7,350 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 7,500 lbs. 7,775 lbs. 8,300 lbs. 8,800 lbs. 10,000 lbs. 11,300 lbs. 7,500 lbs. 7,775 lbs. 8,300 lbs. 8,800 lbs. 10,000 lbs. 11,300 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs.
Fleet-Lift System 51
2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long
1) Safe Working Loads are based on approximately a 4 to 1 factor of safety in 3,500 psi normal weight concrete. 2) Install shear bar and tension bar, when required, per instructions on preceding page. 3) FL349 uses 8-10T P-99 Recess and P-91 Ring Clutch
Notes:
06/09
Fleet-Lift System
P-92-P Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with Shear Plate

The P-92-P Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with Shear Plate is designed specifically for edge tilting precast concrete elements from the horizontal to a vertical position. An integral shear plate eliminates any possibility of forgetting to install a required shear bar. As on other Fleet-Lift Erection Anchors, two steel protrusions or ears at the head of the anchor provide protection against concrete spalling. These ears restrict the ring clutch rotation during lateral pulls. As a result, lateral forces are transmitted directly to the edge of the anchor instead of the concrete. The body of the erection anchor is shaped to allow full reinforcement for secure support and spall-free rotation. P-92-P Erection Anchors are available plain or hot-dipped galvanized.
Fleet-Lift System
To Order:
S pecify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code, (4) corrosion resistance, if required.
Example:
200, P-92-P Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with Shear Plate, FL148, hot-dipped galvanized.
P-92-P Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with Shear Plate

C 3" 3" 3-1/2" 3-1/2"
Safe Working Load

(Tons)
Product Code FL147 FL148 FL449 * FL149
A 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 3" 3"
B 3/4" 1-1/4" 1-5/8" 1-5/8"
2 4 6 8
Anchor dimensions not shown are the same as the P-92 Erection Anchor of the same load range. * Use 8-10T P-99 Recess and P-91 Ring Clutch with FL449.
Shear Reinforcement
Stress is caused during the edge lifting of a precast panel, making supplemental reinforcement around the anchor necessary in thin panels. The Fleet-Lift P-92-P Erection Anchor with integral Shear Plate is designed expressly for this purpose. Install the anchor so that the shear plate is opposite the direction of lift.
Direction of Lift
The P-92-P with Shear Plate Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor is manufactured with a steel tension pin that resists pullout during normal erection situations. The safe working load chart on the following page lists two sets of tension values. If the higher safe working load is used, the anchor must be properly reinforced using the P-60-T Tension Bar. The tension bar should be placed through the lower hole.
Typical P-92-P Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with Shear Plate Application
Typical P-92-P Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor Shear Plate/ Tension Bar Application
52 06/09
Fleet-Lift System
P-92-P Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with Shear Plate Capacities

(ton x length)
Product Code FL147 FL147 FL147 FL147 FL147 FL147 FL147 FL147 FL147 FL147 FL148 FL148 FL148 FL148 FL148 FL148 FL148 FL148 FL148 FL449 FL449 FL449 FL449 FL449 FL449 FL449 FL149 FL149 FL149 FL149 FL149 FL149 FL149
Precast Concrete Panel Thickness 3-1/2" Min. 4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 9" 10" 11" 12" 4" Min. 5" 6" 7" 8" 9" 10" 11" 12" 6" Min. 7" 8" 9" 10" 11" 12" 6" Min 7" 8" 9" 10" 11" 12"
Shear Safe Working Tension Safe Working Tension Safe Working Load with Shear Plate Load with Anchor Only Load With Tension Bar 1,450 lbs. 1,625 lbs. 2,050 lbs. 2,350 lbs. 2,625 lbs. 2,850 lbs. 3,050 lbs. 3,225 lbs. 3,425 lbs. 3,675 lbs. 2,150 lbs. 2,625 lbs. 3,100 lbs. 3,525 lbs. 3,925 lbs. 4,275 lbs. 4,600 lbs. 4,900 lbs. 5,150 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,250 lbs. 4,475 lbs. 4,725 lbs. 4,950 lbs. 5,200 lbs. 5,450 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,250 lbs. 4,475 lbs. 4,725 lbs. 4,950 lbs. 5,200 lbs. 5,450 lbs. 2,575 lbs. 2,575 lbs. 3,350 lbs. 3,750 lbs. 3,850 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 3,450 lbs. 4,250 lbs. 5,075 lbs. 5,825 lbs. 6,600 lbs. 7,350 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 5,580 lbs. 6,870 lbs. 7,775 lbs. 8,300 lbs. 8,800 lbs. 10,000 lbs. 11,300 lbs. 5,580 lbs. 6,870 lbs. 7,775 lbs. 8,300 lbs. 8,800 lbs. 10,000 lbs. 11,300 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs.
Fleet-Lift System 53
2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long
4,000 lbs.
1) Safe Working Loads are based on approximately a 4 to 1 factor of safety in 3,500 psi normal weight concrete. 2) FL449 uses 8-10T P-99 Recess and P-91 Ring Clutch.
Notes:
06/09
Fleet-Lift System
P-92-DP Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with Shear Plate and Shear Pin
The Dayton Superior P-92-DP Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with a Shear Plate and a Shear Pin is similar to the P-92-P anchor with the addition of a shear pin. By welding a solid shear pin opposite the shear plate, the anchor can resist shear loads in both directions. Installation and Primary Shear Loading The P-92-DP anchor is set in the form with the shear plate in the down position to resist the primary shear load. Secondary Shear Loading When the panel is placed on an A frame or is required to be rotated 180, the addition of the shear pin works with the shear plate to resist the shear load in the opposite direction of the shear plate. The shear pin helps to protect the concrete from spalling when the shear loads are applied in a secondary direction. P-92-DP Erection Anchors are available either plain or hot-dipped galvanized steel.
B
A Solid Shear Pin
Fleet-Lift System
F C
To Order:

pecify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product S code, (4) corrosion resistance, if required.
Example:
200 P-92-DP Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with Shear Plate/Pin, FL744, 4/6-ton system size, hot-dipped galvanized.
Load Range
(Tons)
P-92-DP Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with Shear Plate/ Pin
Shear Plate
Product Code FL647 FL648 FL749* FL649
A 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 3" 3"
B 3/4" 1-1/4" 1-5/8" 1-5/8"
C 3" 3" 3-1/2" 3-1/2"
D 1/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4"
E 1/2" 3/8" 3/4" 3/4" 3/8" 3/8" 3/4"
F 2-3/4" 2-7/8" 2-7/8" 2-7/8"
2 4 6 8
Anchor dimensions not shown are the same as the P-92 Erection Anchor of the same load range. * Special Order: Uses 8-10T P-99 Recess and P-91 Ring Clutch with FL749
The P-92-DP Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor is manufactured with a steel tension pin that resists pullout during normal erection situations. The safe working load chart on the following page lists two sets of tension values. If the higher safe working load is used, the anchor must be properly reinforced using the P-60-T Tension Bar. The tension bar should be placed through the lower hole of the anchor.
Direction of Lift for Primary Shear

54
Direction of Lift for Secondary Shear

06/09
Fleet-Lift System
P-92-DP Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with Shear Plate and Shear Pin Capacities
(ton x length)
Product Code FL647 FL647 FL647 FL647 FL647 FL647 FL647 FL647 FL647 FL647 FL648 FL648 FL648 FL648 FL648 FL648 FL648 FL648 FL648 FL749 FL749 FL749 FL749 FL749 FL749 FL449 FL649 FL649 FL649 FL649 FL649 FL649 FL649
Precast Concrete Panel Thickness 3-1/2" Min. 4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 9" 10" 11" 12" 4" Min. 5" 6" 7" 8" 9" 10" 11" 12" 6" Min. 7" 8" 9" 10" 11" 12" 6" Min. 7" 8" 9" 10" 11" 12"
Shear Safe Working Load for Primary Shear 1,450 lbs. 1,625 lbs. 2,050 lbs. 2,350 lbs. 2,625 lbs. 2,850 lbs. 3,050 lbs. 3,225 lbs. 3,425 lbs. 3,675 lbs. 2,150 lbs. 2,625 lbs. 3,100 lbs. 3,525 lbs. 3,925 lbs. 4,275 lbs. 4,600 lbs. 4,900 lbs. 5,150 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,250 lbs. 4,475 lbs. 4,725 lbs. 4,950 lbs. 5,200 lbs. 5,450 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,250 lbs. 4,475 lbs. 4,725 lbs. 4,950 lbs. 5,200 lbs. 5,450 lbs.
Shear Safe Working Load for Secondary Shear 1,150 lbs. 1,300 lbs. 1,650 lbs. 1,750 lbs. 1,875 lbs. 2,100 lbs. 2,275 lbs. 2,450 lbs. 2,575 lbs. 2,950 lbs. 1,725 lbs. 2,100 lbs. 2,475 lbs. 2,825 lbs. 3,150 lbs. 3,425 lbs. 3,675 lbs. 3,925 lbs. 4,125 lbs. 3,200 lbs. 3,400 lbs. 3,575 lbs. 3,775 lbs. 3,950 lbs. 4,150 lbs. 4,375 lbs. 3,200 lbs. 3,400 lbs. 3,575 lbs. 3,775 lbs. 3,975 lbs. 4,150 lbs. 4,350 lbs.
Tension Safe Working Load Anchor Only 2,575 lbs. 2,575 lbs. 3,350 lbs. 3,750 lbs. 3,850 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 3,450 lbs. 4,250 lbs. 5,075 lbs. 5,825 lbs. 6,600 lbs. 7,350 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 5,580 lbs. 6,870 lbs. 7,775 lbs. 8,300 lbs. 8,800 lbs. 10,000 lbs. 11,300 lbs. 5,580 lbs. 6,870 lbs. 7,775 lbs. 8,300 lbs. 8,800 lbs. 10,000 lbs. 11,300 lbs.
Tension Safe Working Load With Tension Bar 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. Fleet-Lift System 55
2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 2-ton x 8" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 4-ton x 10-7/16" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long
Notes:
1) Safe Working Load is based on an approximate factor of safety of 4 to 1 in 3,500 psi normal weight concrete. 2) Install anchors as shown on preceding page to develop safe working loads in chart. 3) FL749 uses 8-10T P-99 Recess and P-91 Ring Clutch
06/09
Fleet-Lift System
P-92-FE Fleet Lift Forged Erection Anchor
The Dayton Superior P-92-FE Forged Erection Anchor is specifically designed to provide greater lifting capacities for horizontal to vertical edge lifts. The anchors are forged to provide 20% greater safe working loads. The head of the anchor is designed with two protrusions or "ears" on the head of the anchor which provide protection against concrete spalling. These protrusions restrict the ring clutch rotation during lateral pulls. As a result, lateral forces are transmitted directly to the edge of the anchor instead of the concrete. The P-92-FE Forged Erection Anchor utilizes the Fleet P-91-S or Fleet P-91-NC lifting hardware and the P-99 Recess Plugs. P-92-FE Forged Erection Anchors are available in plain or hot-dipped galvanized finishes.
Safe Working Load (tons) 3 6 10 Product Code 126748 126749 126747 A 2" 2-1/2" 3-3/4" B 8" 10-3/8" 12-3/4" C 3/8" 5/8" 3/4" D 1-13/16" 2-1/2" 3-1/8" E 2-3/8" 3-3/16" 4" F 3-3/8" 4-7/16" 6-1/8" G 5/8" 3/4" 1"
A C D E F
Fleet-Lift System
B G
To Order:

pecify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product S code, (4) finish.
Example:
200 P-92-FE Fleet-Lift Forged Erection Anchors, #126748, hot-dipped galvanized.
P92-FE Forged Erection Anchor

Ton x Length 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 6-ton x 10-3/8 6-ton x 10-3/8 6-ton x 10-3/8 6-ton x 10-3/8 6-ton x 10-3/8 6-ton x 10-3/8 6-ton x 10-3/8 6-ton x 10-3/8 10-ton x 12-3/4 10-ton x 12-3/4 10-ton x 12-3/4 10-ton x 12-3/4 10-ton x 12-3/4 10-ton x 12-3/4 Product Code 126748 126748 126748 126748 126748 126748 126748 126748 126748 126749 126749 126749 126749 126749 126749 126749 126749 126747 126747 126747 126747 126747 126747 Slab Thickness 4 Min. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5-1/2Min. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 7 1/2 8 9 10 11 12 Insert Height 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 12-3/4 12-3/4 12-3/4 12-3/4 12-3/4 12-3/4 Minimum Edge Distance 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 6 2-3/4 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 6 3-3/4 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 6 Minimum Corner Distance 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 19 19 19 19 19 19 Shear Safe Working Load with Shear Bar 1,390 lbs. 1,680 lbs. 1,980 lbs. 2,300 lbs. 2,630 lbs. 2,980 lbs. 3,340 lbs. 3,720 lbs. 4,110 lbs. 2,840 lbs. 3,030 lbs. 3,430 lbs. 3,840 lbs. 4,270 lbs. 4,710 lbs. 5,010 lbs. 5,540 lbs. 4,180 lbs. 4,420 lbs. 4,920 lbs. 5,430 lbs. 5,950 lbs. 6,490 lbs. Tension Safe Working Load Anchor Only 2,500 lbs. 3,130 lbs. 3,760 lbs. 4,380 lbs. 5,010 lbs. 5,640 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 4,720 lbs. 5,150 lbs. 6,010 lbs. 6,870 lbs. 7,730 lbs. 8,590 lbs. 9,450 lbs. 10,310 lbs. 7,920 lbs. 8,440 lbs. 9,500 lbs. 10,560 lbs. 11,610 lbs. 12,670 lbs. Tension Safe Working Load with Tension Bar 6,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 20,000 lbs. 20,000 lbs. 20,000 lbs. 20,000 lbs. 20,000 lbs. 20,000 lbs.
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety approximately 4 to 1 in 3,500 psi normal weight concrete. 56 06/09
Fleet-Lift System
P-92-FEW Fleet Lift Forged Erection Anchor

The P92-FEW Forged Erection Anchor with Shear Plate eliminates the need for a shear bar. The P92-FEW has the identical dimensions (length, thickness, hole spacing) as the P92-FE. The P92-FE and P92-FEW anchor is stocked in a plain finish and can be galvanized locally.
Safe Working Load (tons) 3 6 10
A C
127619 127615 127616
3/8 5/8 3/4
1-13/16 2-1/2 3-1/8
2-3/8 3-3/16 4
3-3/8 4-7/16 6-1/8
5/8 3/4 1
3.5 4 4
2.5 3 3
0.40 0.45 0.45
H B
2-1/2 10-7/16 3-3/4 12-9/16
To Order:

pecify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product S code, (4) finish.
Example:
200 P-92-FEW Fleet-Lift Forged Erection Anchors, #127619, hot-dipped galvanized.
P92-FEW Fleet Forged Erection Anchor

Ton x Length 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 3-ton x 8 6-ton x 10-3/8 6-ton x 10-3/8 6-ton x 10-3/8 6-ton x 10-3/8 6-ton x 10-3/8 6-ton x 10-3/8 6-ton x 10-3/8 6-ton x 10-3/8 10-ton x 12-3/4 10-ton x 12-3/4 10-ton x 12-3/4 10-ton x 12-3/4 10-ton x 12-3/4 10-ton x 12-3/4 Product Code 127619 127619 127619 127619 127619 127619 127619 127619 127619 127615 127615 127615 127615 127615 127615 127615 127615 127616 127616 127616 127616 127616 127616 Slab Thickness 4 Min 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5-1/2 Min 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 7-1/2 8 9 10 11 12 Insert Height 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 10-3/8 12-3/4 12-3/4 12-3/4 12-3/4 12-3/4 12-3/4 Minimum Edge Distance 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 6 2-3/4 3 3-1/2 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 6 3-3/4 4 4-1/2 5 5-1/2 6 Minimum Corner Distance 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 19 19 19 19 19 19 Shear Safe Working Load with Shear Plate 1,232 lbs 1,550 lbs 1,800 lbs 2,340 lbs 2,784 lbs 2,800 lbs 2,900 lbs 3,000 lbs 3,079 lbs 2,231 lbs 2,400 lbs 2,800 lbs 2,928 lbs 3,600 lbs 4,100 lbs 4,600 lbs 6,471 lbs 3,162 lbs 3,430 lbs 4,432 lbs 4,920 lbs 5,430 lbs 5,760 lbs Tension Safe Working Load Anchor Only 2,500 lbs 3,130 lbs 3,760 lbs 4,380 lbs 5,010 lbs 5,640 lbs 6,000 lbs 6,000 lbs 6,000 lbs 4,720 lbs 5,150 lbs 6,010 lbs 6,870 lbs 7,730 lbs 8,590 lbs 9,450 lbs 10,310 lbs 7,920 lbs 8,440 lbs 9,500 lbs 10,560 lbs 11,610 lbs 12,670 lbs Tension Safe Working Load with Tension Bar 6,000 lbs 6,000 lbs 6,000 lbs 6,000 lbs 6,000 lbs 6,000 lbs 6,000 lbs 6,000 lbs 6,000 lbs 12,000 lbs 12,000 lbs 12,000 lbs 12,000 lbs 12,000 lbs 12,000 lbs 12,000 lbs 12,000 lbs 20,000 lbs 20,000 lbs 20,000 lbs 20,000 lbs 20,000 lbs 20,000 lbs
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety approximately 4 to 1 in 3,500 psi normal weight concrete. 06/09
57
Fleet-Lift System
Product Code
Fleet-Lift System
P-92-H Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Erection Anchor P-92-HP Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Erection Anchor with Shear Plate
Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Erection Anchors combine the strength, spall resistance and high tension performance of the P-92 Erection Anchor. The P-92-H Two-Hole Erection Anchor was designed for use where the lift direction applies a tension load ONLY to the anchor. A properly installed P-98-T Tension Bar is always required when using this erection anchor. The P-92-HP Two-Hole Erection Anchor was designed for use where the lift direction applies both a shear and tension load to the anchor. As with the P-92-H anchor, a properly installed P-98-T Tension Bar is always required when using the P-92-HP Erection Anchor. Shear loading for this anchor is resisted by the P-92-HP anchors integral shear plate. Both the P-92-H and P-92-HP Erection Anchors are available in 2, 4, 6 or 8-ton capacities. In addition, they are available in either plain or hot-dipped galvanized finish.
B A E A
Fleet-Lift System
D B
To Order:

Example:
200, P-92-H Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Erection Anchor, FL075, hot-dipped galvanized.
P-92-H Fleet-Lift P-92-HP Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Erection Anchor Two-Hole Erection Anchor (Tension Loadings ONLY) with Shear Plate
(Shear and Tension Loading)
P-92-HP Two-Hole Erection Anchor w/ Shear Plate
(ton x length)
P-92-H Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Erection Anchor

(ton x length)
Product Code FL403 FL903 FL075 FL975 FL385L* FL185L
Product Code FL423 FL403L FL275 FL175L FL485L* FL285L
2-ton x 4-1/4" long 2-ton x 8-1/4" long 4-ton x 7-7/8" long 4-ton x 10-7/8" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long
2" 2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 3-3/4" 3-3/4"
4-1/4" 8-1/4" 7-7/8" 10-7/8" 13-1/4" 13-1/4"
3/8" 3/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 3/4"
2-ton x 4-1/4" long 2-ton x 8-1/4" long 4-ton x 7-7/8" long 4-ton x 10-7/8" long 6-ton x 13-1/4" long* 8-ton x 13-1/4" long
2-1/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 3" 3"
3" 3" 3" 3" 3-1/2" 3-1/2"
1/4" 1/4" 3/8" 3/8" 3/8" 3/8"
Anchor dimensions not shown are the same as the P-92 Erection Anchor of the same load range. * Use 8-10T P-99 Recess and P-91 Ring Clutch with FL385L and FL485L.
Shear Reinforcement
Stress is caused during the edge lifting of a precast concrete panel, making supplemental reinforcement around the anchor necessary in thin panels. The Fleet-Lift P-92-HP Erection Anchor with integral Shear Plate is designed expressly for this purpose. Install the anchor so that the shear plate is opposite the direction of lift.
Direction of Lift
The P-92-HP Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with Shear Plate must be properly reinforced using the P-60-T Tension Bar. The tension bar should be placed through the lower hole.
58
Typical P-92-HP Fleet-Lift Typical P-92-HP Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Erection Anchor Two-Hole Erection Anchor with Shear Plate Application with Shear Plate/Tension Bar Application
06/09
Fleet-Lift System
P-92-H Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Erection Anchor and P-92-HP Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Erection Anchor with Shear Plate Capacities
P-92-H or P-92-HP Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Erection Anchor
(ton x length)
Product Code FL403 FL423 FL403 FL423 FL403 FL423 FL403 FL423 FL403 FL423 FL403 FL423 FL903 FL403L FL903 FL403L FL903 FL403L FL903 FL403L FL903 FL403L FL903 FL403L FL903 FL403L FL903 FL403L FL903 FL403L FL075 FL275 FL075 FL275 FL075 FL275 FL075 FL275 FL075 FL275 FL075 FL275 FL975 FL175L FL185L FL285L
Precast Concrete Panel Thickness
P-92-HP With Shear Plate Safe Working Load 1,325 lbs. 1,525 lbs. 1,525 lbs. 1,750 lbs. 1,900 lbs. 2,075 lbs.
P-92-H or P-92-HP Tension Safe Working Load With Tension Bar 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs.
2-ton x 4-1/4" long 2-ton x 4-1/4" long 2-ton x 4-1/4" long 2-ton x 4-1/4" long 2-ton x 4-1/4" long 2-ton x 4-1/4" long 2-ton x 8-1/4" long 2-ton x 8-1/4" long 2-ton x 8-1/4" long 2-ton x 8-1/4" long 2-ton x 8-1/4" long 2-ton x 8-1/4" long 2-ton x 8-1/4" long 2-ton x 8-1/4" long 2-ton x 8-1/4" long 4-ton x 7-7/8" long 4-ton x 7-7/8" long 4-ton x 7-7/8" long 4-ton x 7-7/8" long 4-ton x 7-7/8" long 4-ton x 7-7/8" long 4-ton x 10-7/8" long 8-ton x 13-1/4" long Notes:
3-1/2" Min. 4" 5" 6" 7" 8"
4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4" 1,650 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 5" 1,875 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 6" 2,125 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 7" 2,400 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 8" 2,700 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 9" 2,925 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 10" 3,275 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 11" 3,575 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 12" 3,975 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 5-1/2" Min. 2,025 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 6" 2,250 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 7" 2,600 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8" 3,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 9" 3,375 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 10" 3,750 lbs. 8,000 lbs. Same panel thickness and SWLs as FL048 Same panel thickness and SWLs as FL148 Same panel thickness and SWLs as FL049 Same panel thickness and SWLs as FL149
1) Safe Working Load provides an approximate factor of safety of 4 to 1 in 3,500 psi normal weight concrete. 2) Dayton Superior recommends the use of the P-90-HP Fleet-Lift Anchor when shear loads will be encountered.
06/09
59
Fleet-Lift System
Fleet-Lift System
P-92-S Fleet-Lift Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor P-92-SP Fleet-Lift Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor with Shear Plate
The Fleet-Lift Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor is designed to erect precast, insulated sandwich panels with a minimum loss of insulation. The anchor uses standard Fleet-Lift recess plugs and ring clutches. The P-92-S Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor is designed for use with 2", 3" and 4" thick insulated sandwich panels.
Fleet-Lift System
E A
The design of the anchor allows it to distribute anchor loads evenly to both concrete wythes. This is accomplished by the use of two specially bent rebars per sandwich panel anchor. The sandwich panel erection anchor, with its unique anchor head shape, in combination with the two bent rebars, transfers both the anchors shear and tension loads evenly into each of the concrete wythes. Place one bent rebar through the anchors top hole and the second rebar through the anchors bottom hole. The rebar extend from the anchor into the top and bottom wythe of concrete. The two specially bent rebar must be used with the sandwich panel erection anchor to achieve the safe working loads shown. The P-92-SP Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor is similar in design and action to the P-92-S anchor, and has a built-in shear plate. The shear plate improves shear capacity when used in the 2", 3" and 4" thick wythes. Both the P-92-S and P-92-SP anchors are available in plain or hot-dipped galvanized finish.
To p Bo In tto
P-92-S Fleet-Lift Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor

A F
su
yt
lat
he n
io
Parallel to Thickness
D B
yt
he
C
P-92-SP Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor with Shear Plate

Perpendicular to Thickness
To Order:

pecify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code, S (4) finish.
Typical Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor Application
Example:
200, P-92-S Fleet-Lift Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor, FL220, hot-dipped galvanized.
Anchor Tonnage 4-ton 8-ton 4-ton 8-ton 10-ton 10-ton 60
Product Code FL077 FL184 FL230 FL284 127351 127350
Shear Plate No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
A 6 6 6 6 7 8
B 3-3/4 4-3/4 3-3/4 4-3/4 4-3/4 4-3/4
C 4-3/8 4-3/8 4-3/8 4-3/8 5 6
D 1-13/16 3-3/8 1-13/16 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-3/8
E 5/8 3/4 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4
F 3 3 8 8
G 2 3-1/2 3 3 06/09
Fleet-Lift System
P-92 Fleet-LIft Sandwich Panel Reinforcing Bars

Anchor Tonnage 4-ton 8-ton 10-ton Product Code FL077 FL184 127351 FL220 FL284 127350 Rebar #4 Grade 60 x 34" overall #5 Grade 60 x 42" overall #5 Grade 75 x 50" overall
3"
2" Min. Radius Detail A 5/8" 3"
3" x 2" x 3" Panel
8"
4" 30 32" Detail A
Overall Length 2"
30 3"
Rebar for 2" x 2" x 2" Panel
Rebar for 3" x 2" x 3", 2" x 2" x 4", 3" x 3" x 3" and 3" x 4" x 3" Panels
3"
2" x 3" x 3" Panel
Fleet Lift Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor Safe Working Loads

Anchor Tonnage 4-ton 4-ton 8-ton 8-ton 10-ton 10-ton For Anchor FL077 FL077 FL184 FL184 127351 127350 Concrete Compressive Strenth 4,500 psi 3,500 psi 3,500 psi 4,500 psi 4,500 psi 4,500 psi Insulated Panel Thickness 2 x 2 x 4 3 x 2 x 3 3 x 2 x 3 2 x 2 x 4 3 x 3 x 3 3 x 4 x 3 Shear Parallel to Thickness 3,300 lbs 3,425 lbs 3,000 lbs 3,450 lbs 4,700 lbs 4,400 lbs Shear Perpendicular to Thickness 8,000 lbs 8,000 lbs 9,400 lbs 10,500 lbs 10,900 lbs 9,200 lbs Tension 8,000 lbs 8,000 lbs 16,000 lbs 16,000 lbs 20,000 lbs 20,000 lbs
06/09
Safe working loads based on 4:1 SF Minimum edge distance is 20 Must use proper tension bar to achieve loads
61
Fleet-Lift System
Fleet-Lift System
P-92-AH Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with 45 Head with Shear Plate
The Dayton Superior P-92-AH Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with 45 Head and Shear Plate is designed for use when the lifting edge is beveled at a 45 angle. The factory installed shear plate eliminates the need for any additional shear reinforcement. Installation To install the P-92-AH anchor, position the anchor a minimum of 3/4" and a maximum of 1-1/2" clear of the casting bed. This can be accomplished using any of the standard recess members. After the anchor has been secured in place, tension reinforcement may be added, if desired. After the concrete has set, removal of the edge form and recess member will expose the head of the anchor for easy attachment of the lifting eye. Tension Reinforcement Due to the geometry of the anchor the loads shown in the table should not be exceeded, even if additional tension reinforcement is present. P-92-AH Erection Anchors are available plain, or hot-dipped galvanized.
45 A
C D
Fleet-Lift System
P-92-AH Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with 45 Head with Shear Plate To Order:

Example:
100, P-92-AH, Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor with 45 head, FL454, hot-dipped galvanized.
Chamfer
3/4" Min. to 1-1/2" Max.
Shear Lift
P-92-AH Fleet-Lift Erection Anchor
(ton x length)
Tension Lift
Product Code FL452 FL452 FL454 FL454 FL458
Precast Concrete Panel Thickness 5" Min. 6" 6" Min. 8" 8" Min.
Shear Safe Working Load for Shear 1,750 lbs. 2,150 lbs. 2,400 lbs. 3,500 lbs. 3,500 lbs.
Tension Safe Tension Safe Working Working Load Anchor Load with Only Tension Bar 2,650 lbs. 3,850 lbs. 5,200 lbs. 6,200 lbs. 7,500 lbs. 2,650 lbs. 3,850 lbs. 5,200 lbs. 6,200 lbs. 7,500 lbs.
2-ton x 8-1/2" long 2-ton x 8-1/2" long 4-ton x 11" long 4-ton x 11" long 8-ton x 13-3/4" long
2" 2-1/2"
8-1/2" 11"
3/8" 5/8" 3/4"
3-1/2" 4" 5-3/8"
3-3/4" 13-3/4"
Notes:
1) Safe Working Load provides an approximate factor of safety of 4 to 1 in 3,500 psi normal weight concrete. 2) Safe Working Load is based on the anchor being located in the panel so that the shear plate is 3/4" minimum to 1-1/2" maximum from casting surface. 3) Panel will not hang plumb, as the panel thickness, center of gravity and anchor location will determine the exact angle at which the panel will hang. 4) Due to the design of this anchor, DO NOT attempt to use this anchor at loads higher than shown in this table even with a properly installed 62 06/09
Fleet-Lift System
P-93 Fleet-Lift L-Anchor

The Dayton Superior P-93 Fleet-Lift L-Anchor is a very efficient anchor. This anchor is used for both stripping and erection carrying tension and/or shear loads (except for edge shear in thin panels). The L-Anchor produces exceptionally high pullout strength for its size, due to its foot design. The L-Anchor can be placed on the face, back, or thicker panel edge allowing for backstripping and their rotation from horizontal to vertical. The P-93 anchor is available in plain or hot-dipped galvanized finish. This anchor requires the use of the 2/5-ton range ring clutch and the 2/3-ton load range recess plug.
A
To Order:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code, (4) finish.
D C
Example:
200, P-93 Fleet-Lift L-Anchor, FL050, hot-dipped finish.

P-93 Fleet-Lift Product Precast Concrete Minimum Edge or Shear Safe Tension Safe L-Anchor Code Working Load Working Load Panel Thickness Corner Distance (ton x length) 1-ton x 4" long FL050 5" Min. 12" 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs.
Notes: 1) Safe Working Load provides an approximate factor of safety of 4 to 1 in 3,500 psi normal weight concrete. 2) Anchor is not designed for use in thin edge shear conditions. 3) Anchor must use FL051 (P99) Reusable Recess Plug
A 1-1/4"
B 4"
1-7/16" 3/16"
P-94 Fleet-Lift T-Anchor

The P-94 Fleet-Lift T-Anchor is a versatile anchor available in many sizes and lengths. Its high pullout strength allows it to be used for back-stripping and erection. T-Anchors can be placed on the face, back or edge of panels allowing for backstripping and rotation from horizontal to vertical. P-94 anchors are available in plain or hot-dipped galvanized finish.
To Order:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code, (4) finish.
Example:
200, P-94 Fleet-Lift T-Anchors, FL 850, hot-dipped galvanized.

Precast Concrete Minimun Panel Thickness 4-3/4" 5-7/8" 4-5/8" 5-1/8" 5-5/8" 6-1/8" 6-5/8" 7-1/8" 7-5/8" 8-1/8" 11-1/2" 6-1/8" 11-1/2" Minimum Edge or Corner Distance 8" 11" 8-1/2" 9-1/2" 10-1/2" 11-1/2" 12-1/2" 13-1/2" 14-1/2" 15-1/2" 23" 12-1/4" 23" Shear Safe Working Load 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 5,500 lbs. 7,100 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 7,950 lbs. Tension Safe Working Load
D

(ton x length)
Product Code FL110 FL059 FL848 FL849 FL850 FL851 FL852 FL853 FL854 FL855 FL319* FL055 FL119
D
A C
2-ton x 4" long 2-ton x 5-1/2" long 4-ton x 4-1/4" long 4-ton x 4-3/4" long 4-ton x 5-1/4" long 4-ton x 5-3/4" long 4-ton x 6-1/4" long 4-ton x 6-3/4" long 4-ton x 7-1/4" long 4-ton x 7-3/4" long 6-ton x 11-1/8" long 8-ton x 6-1/8" long 8-ton x 11-1/8" long
4,000 lbs. 1-1/4"
4"
3/8" 3/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 3/4"
1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4"
4,000 lbs. 1-1/4" 5-1/2" 5,500 lbs. 1-1/2" 4-1/4" 7,100 lbs. 1-1/2" 4-3/4" 8,000 lbs. 1-1/2" 5-1/4" 8,000 lbs. 1-1/2" 5-3/4" 8,000 lbs. 1-1/2" 6-1/4" 8,000 lbs. 1-1/2" 6-3/4" 8,000 lbs. 1-1/2" 7-1/4" 8,000 lbs. 1-1/2" 7-3/4" 7,950 lbs. 2-1/2" 6-1/8"
P-94 Fleet-Lift T-Anchor 4-ton
B D
12,000 lbs. 12,000 lbs. 2-1/2" 11-1/8" 5/8" 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs. 2-1/2" 11-1/8" 3/4"
1) Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 3,500 psi normal weight concrete. 2) Side notches are provided on 4-ton T-Anchors only. 3) No side notches are provided on 2, 6 and 8-ton T-Anchors. 4) Use 8-10T P99 Recess and P91 Ring Clutch with FL319*. 06/09
P-94 Fleet-Lift T-Anchor 2, 6 and 8-ton

63
Fleet-Lift System
Fleet-Lift System
P-94-H Fleet-Lift H-Anchor 2-Ton
The Dayton Superior Fleet-Lift H-Anchor (P-94-H) is unique in design simplicity. It offers exceptional strength for lifting and handling precast elements, yet can be used in panels as thin as 3". The P-94-H anchor can be easily preset in the form or wet set after the concrete has been poured. The H-Anchor is the strongest and most economical precast lifting anchor available for back-stripping. H-Anchors are available in plain and hot-dipped galvanized finish.
Load
Fleet-Lift System
FL524 FL523
2.3"
3.3"
Optional Reinforcement
P-94-H Safe Working Load

Tension Shear Shear
Product Load Code Range FL523 FL524 2 Ton 2 Ton
Tension Load 4:1 SF 2,205 lbs. 3,255 lbs.
Tension with Reinforcement** 4:1 SF 2,900 lbs. 4,000 lbs.
Shear Load 4:1 SF 2,205 lbs. 3,255 lbs.
Minimum Edge Distance 8" 10"
Ultimate Mechanical Strength 16,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs.
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1. Table is based on a minimum concrete compressive strength of 3,500 psi. *When panel edge installation is required, use the H-Anchor or Two-Hole Anchor with a tension bar. Contact a Dayton Superior Technical Service Department for minimum tension reinforcement.
Optional Reinforcement
**#4 x 12" long placed directly at centerline and against bottom of hole. See sketches at left.
Resists Tension and Shear Loads
P-94-H Dimensions Product Code A B C D Minimum Slab Thickness

3" 4"
Weight Each
.28 lbs. .36 lbs.
2/3 Ton Ring Clutch System (2-Ton Anchor)

FL523 FL524 1.25" 1.25" 2.30" 3.30" .35" .38" .56" 1.44"
3/8"
FL525 .38" 1.25" are 4.30" 1.44" 5" galvanized. .53 lbs. P-94-H H-Anchors available in plain and hot-dipped FL529 .38" 1.25" 9.30" 1.44" 10" 1.38 lbs.
3/8"
To Order:

pecify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code, S (4) finish, if other than plain.
Example:
200, P-94-H Fleet-Lift H-Anchor, FL525, hot-dipped galvanized.

64 06/09
Fleet-Lift System
P-94-S Fleet-Lift S-Anchor 6-Ton

The Dayton Superior P-94-S Fleet-Lift S-Anchor is a high-strength, hot forged anchor that can be wet set or used with the optional T-41 Plastic base in face-lift applications. When the P-94-S anchor is used with the Fleet-Lift high capacity ring clutches, safe working loads up to 12,000 pounds can be realized. See the chart below for appropriate anchor lengths and concrete compressive strengths. P-94-S anchors are available in plain and hot-dipped galvanized.
1-1/2"
Insert Height 5/8"
To Order:
Example:
400, P-94-S Fleet-Lift S-Anchors, FL505 with hotdipped galvanized finish.
P-94-S Fleet-Lift S-Anchor

1-7/8"
P-94-S Fleet Lift S-Anchor Ton x Length

6-ton x 3-1/8" Long 6-ton x 3-7/8" Long 6-ton x 4-1/8" Long 6-ton x 4-7/8" Long 6-ton x 5-1/8" Long 6-ton x 5-7/8" Long 6-ton x 6-1/8" Long 6-ton x 6-7/8" Long 6-ton x 7-7/8" Long
Fleet Code
FL501 FL502 FL503 FL505 FL506 FL509 FL510 FL513 FL515
Product Code
122782 122784 122785 122788 122789 122792 122793 122796 122800
Tension Safe Working Load @ 4:1 SF

3,930 lbs. 5,000 lbs. 5,370 lbs. 6,560 lbs. 6,970 lbs. 8,250 lbs. 8,700 lbs. 10,070 lbs. 12,000 lbs.
Shear Safe Working Load @ 4:1 SF

3,930 lbs. 5,000 lbs. 5,370 lbs. 6,560 lbs. 6,970 lbs. 8,250 lbs. 8,700 lbs. 10,070 lbs. 12,000 lbs.

15" 18" 18" 20" 21" 24" 24" 26" 30"

24" 24" 27" 28" 30" 34" 36" 38" 42"
Safe working load is based on an approximate factor of safety of 4 to 1 in 3,500 psi normal weight concrete Use FL062 Recess Member and FL002S Ring Clutch (both 4-6T) with these anchors.
Optional T-41 Plastic Base

The T-41 Plastic Base is available to facilitate setting the P-94-S anchor in back-strip applications. The insert and base assembly may be ordered pre-assembled from the factory, or the plastic base can be ordered separately for field or shop installation. The insert and base can be assembled by hand, with a simple assembly fixture available from Miamisburg. The P-99-D Disposable Recess Member (part #FL0675) or T-90 Two-Part Recess Member (part #122024) can be used in this application.
Panel Thickness 5" 6" 7" 8" P-94-S Length 3-7/8" 4-7/8" 5-7/8" 6-7/8" P-94-S Part # FL502 FL505 FL509 FL513
Assembly Fixture
06/09
P-94-S S-Anchor/ T-41 Base Assembly

65
Fleet-Lift System
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code, (4) finish
Fleet-Lift System
P-95-F Fleet-Lift Flat Foot Anchor
The Dayton Superior P-95-F Fleet-Lift Flat Foot Anchor is a versatile anchor that can be used to back-strip and transport thin panels. This anchor may also be used to erect the panels. The anchors safe working load may be increased by adding four 18" lengths of #4 rebar as shown in the sketch.
P-95-F Fleet-Lift Flat Foot Anchor
To Order:

Fleet-Lift System
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code
B D
Example:
200, P-94-F Fleet-Lift Flat Foot Anchor, FL058.

#4 x 18" Long
Precast Concrete P-95-F Fleet-Lift Product Minimum Code Flat Foot Anchor Panel Thickness 2-ton x 2-3/4" long 2-ton x 3-3/8" long 3-ton x 3-3/4" long FL058 FL400 FL157 3-7/8" 4-1/2" 3-7/8"
Minimum Edge or Corner Distance 5-1/2" 6-3/4" 7-1/2"
Shear Safe Working Load 1,325 lbs. 1,875 lbs. 2,350 lbs.
Tension Safe Working Load 1,325 lbs. 1,875 lbs. 2,350 lbs.
Shear Safe Tension Safe Working Working Load Load Reinforced Reinforced 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs.
1-1/4" 2-3/4" 1-1/4" 3-3/8" 1-1/2" 3-3/4"
3/8" 3/8" 1/2"
4" 4" 4"
Safe Working Load provides an approximate factor of safety of 4 to 1 in 3,500 psi normal weight concrete.
P-95-P Fleet-Lift Plate Anchor

The Dayton Superior P-95-P Fleet-Lift Plate Anchor is manufactured with a wide base designed to increase its pull-out capacity in concrete. The wide base allows the anchor to have an increased safe working load. The design of the anchor, with its wide base, permits four #4 rebar, each 18" in length to be easily secured to the insert, as illustrated in the sketch. The addition of the rebar increases the safe working load of the anchor. C P-95-P anchors are available in plain or hot-dipped galvanized finish.
A D A B C
To Order:

pecify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code, S (4) corrosion resistance, if required
P-95-P Fleet-Lift Plate Anchor
(FL043 only)
Example:
200, P-95-P Fleet-Lift Plate Anchor, FL847.

#4 x 18" Long
P-95-P Fleet-Lift Plate Anchor 2-ton x 2-1/4" long 4-ton x 3" long 4-ton x 3-1/2" long 4-ton x 4-3/8" long 8-ton x 6-7/8" long
Precast Concrete Product Minimum Code Panel Thickness FL128 FL846 FL847 FL044 FL043 3-3/8" 4-1/8" 4-5/8" 5-5/8" 8-1/4"
Minimum Edge or Corner Distance 4-1/2" 6" 7" 8" 13-5/8"
Shear Safe Working Load 950 lbs. 3,575 lbs. 4,700 lbs. 4,725 lbs.
Tension Safe Working Load 950 lbs. 3,575 lbs. 4,700 lbs. 4,725 lbs.
Shear Safe Tension Safe Working Working Load Load Reinforced Reinforced 4,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 7,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 6,000 lbs. 7,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 11,750 lbs.
1-1/4" 2-1/4" 1-1/2" 3" 1-1/2" 3-1/2" 1-1/2" 4-3/8" 2-1/2" 6-7/8"
3/8"
4"
5/8" 3-3/8" 5/8" 3-3/8" 5/8" 3/4" 4" 3"
10,850 lbs. 10,850 lbs. 11,750 lbs.
Safe Working Load provides an approximate factor of safety of 4 to 1 in 3,500 psi normal weight concrete. A minimum 3/4" of concrete is required below bottom of insert to achieve load. 66 06/09
Fleet-Lift System
P-96 Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Anchor
The Dayton Superior P-96 Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Anchor is always used in conjunction with the Dayton Superior P-98-T Tension Bar. The anchor has a bottom hole especially designed to accept the tension bar. Place the P-98-T Tension Bar through the bottom hole in such a manner that the ends of the tension bar are pointing downward. Fasten the tension bar tight against the bottom side of the hole. The tension bar distributes the tension forces, developed from the lifting process, deep into the precast concrete. This allows the lifting of very thin and/or low concrete compressive strength panels. Do not use the P-96 Two-Hole Anchor in the following situations: 1) Without a correct size and located tension bar. 2) In the edge of thin panels where shear loads will be applied to the anchor.
D E B
P-96 Fleet-Lift Two Hole Anchor
F A C
To Order:

pecify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code, S (4) corrosion resistance, if required. See P-98-T Fleet-Lift Tension Bar on page 70.
Example:
200, P-96 Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Anchor, FL124.
P-96 Fleet-Lift Two-Hole Anchor Product Code (ton x length) 2-ton x 2 3/4" long 2-ton x 4" long 4-ton x 5-1/2" long 8-ton x 7" long FL190 FL122 FL124 FL125
Tension Safe Working Load with Tension Bar 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs.
1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2 2-1/2
2-3/4 4 5-1/2 7
3/8 3/8 5/8 3/4
9/16 3/4 7/8 1-3/16
15/16 7/8 1 1-1/2
9/16 9/16 11/16 1
Safe working load is based on an approximate factor of safety of 4 to 1 in 3,500 psi normal weight concrete. NOTE: Tension reinforcement must be used with Two Hole Anchors.
The Dayton Superior T-110 Superior Lift Insert is a face lift insert and consists of a forged foot anchor, 4-leg wire base and plastic void former. The insert utilizes the P-91 Ring Clutch 8-10 T. The T-110 Superior Lift Inserts are shipped assembled, ready to go and are sized 1/8 less than the panel thickness.
T-110 Superior Lift System

T-110 Superior Lift System
T-110 Face Lift Insert Selection Chart

Structural Panel Thickness
5 5-1/2 6
SWL 4:1** Safety Factor

4,375 lbs. 5,500 lbs. 6,500 lbs. 7,250 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 8,500 lbs.
To Order: Specify:(1) Quantity, (2) Name, (3) Panel Thickness, (4) bottom face exposed aggregate or form liner thickness Example: 150, T-110 Superior Lift Inserts, 9 Panel with 1/2 form liner panel
06/09
6-1/2 7 8
** Safe working load provides approximate safety factor shown in chart with minimum 2500 psi concrete. Ultimate mechanical load of the insert is 48,000 lbs. Ultimate safe working load is 12,000 lbs. @ 4.1 SF 67
Fleet-Lift System
Fleet-Lift System
P-98-S Fleet-Lift Shear Bar
The Dayton Superior P-98-S Fleet-Lift Shear Bar is designed and manufactured especially for use with Fleet-Lift Erection Anchors. It is a simple, easy to use, yet very efficient design that transfers shear forces from the erection process deeper into the edge of a precast concrete panel. It is stronger and less expensive than a shear bar fabricated from reinforcing steel. The design of the shear bar allows it to fit over the top edge of an erection anchor. It is placed in the top notch and secured so that it bears tightly against the bottom of the notch. Accurate placement of the shear bar provides for spall-free edge lifts.
Fleet-Lift System
The P-98-S Shear Bar is available to fit 2, 4 and 8-ton Fleet-Lift Erection Anchors. Available in plain or hot-dipped galvanized finish.
Typical Shear Bar Application
P-98-S Fleet-Lift Shear Bar
Shear Bar Equal C L Equal Erection Anchor Shear Bar Minimum 3/4" Concrete Cover Erection Anchor
Top View
Section View
Minimum Panel Thickness 4" 5-1/2" 7-1/2" Dimensions H 2-1/2" 3-5/16" 4-15/16" L 13-7/8" 13-7/8" 13-7/8"
Anchor Tonnage 2-3 ton 4-6 ton 8-10 ton
Product Code FL140 FL141 FL142
Shear Bar Diameter 1/2" 1/2" 1/2"
To Order:

Example:
200, P-98-S Fleet-Lift Shear Bar, FL141, HDG.
P-98-T Fleet-Lift Tension Bar

The Dayton Superior P-98-T Fleet-Lift Tension Bar is used with various
Anchor Tonnage 2-ton 3-ton or 4-ton 6-ton 8-ton or 10-ton
(Grade 60)
Tension Bar #3 #4 #5 #6
L=Overall Length of P-98-T Tension Bar 3,000 psi 32" 44" 54" 66" 4,000 psi 28" 38" 48" 56" 5,000 psi 26" 34" 42" 50"
30 L
Fasten tension bar tight against the bottom side of hole.
L = Overall length of tension bar based on concrete compressive strength at time of lift.
Correct Installation of Tension Bar (Installed with equal length legs.)

06/09
68
Fleet-Lift System
P-99 Fleet-Lift Reusable Recess Plug

The Dayton Superior P-99 Fleet-Lift Reusable Recess Plug is molded from an elastomeric thermal-set urethane for multiple reuse. Embedded in the recess plug is a stainless steel stud that securely captures a Fleet-Lift Anchor, providing a positive connection to the form during the placement of concrete. Attachment to the form is accomplished with a P-100 Holding Rod and P-101 Fleet-Lift Holding Plate. P-99 Recess Plugs are resistant to heat and form release agents encountered in a precast plant.
E C Stainless Steel Stud
Section View
To Order:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code.
Example:
200, P-99 Fleet-Lift Reusable Recess Plug, FL062.

B D
P-99 Fleet-Lift Reusable Recess Plug

Anchor Tonnage 1-ton Product Code FL051 FL200 FL062 FL121 A 1-11/16" 1-11/16" 2-1/8" 3-1/8" B 1-3/4" 1-3/4" 2-5/16" 3-5/16" C 4-1/16" 4-1/16" 5-3/16" 7-13/16" D 3/16" 3/8" E 1-3/16" 1-3/16" 1-11/32" 1-31/32" F 3/8" 3/8" 3/8" 3/8"
2-3 ton 2-ton 4-6 ton 4-ton 8-10 ton 8-ton Typical Reusable Recess Plug Application
5/8" 3/8"
3/4"
Note: Recess Plug style FL051 is used with the 1-ton L-Anchor and 2-ton Ring Clutch combination ONLY.
P-100 Fleet-Lift Holding Plate and P-101 Fleet-Lift Holding Rod

P-100 Fleet-Lift Holding Plate
A
Fixed Wing Nut C
Anchor Tonnage 1-ton
Product Code FL160 FL160 FL144 FL111
5/8" 5/8" 1-1/4" 1-3/4"
2-3/4" 2-3/4" 3-3/8" 4-7/8"
10mm 10mm 10mm 12mm
P-100 Fleet-Lift Holding Plate
6" Standard
2-3 ton 2-ton 4-6 ton 4-ton 8-10 ton 8-ton
P-101 Fleet-Lift Holding Rod Anchor Tonnage 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10-ton 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10-ton Standard Thread Recess Product Diameter Rod Plug Code Length and Type Material Urethane Steel FL131 FL131C 6" 6" 3/8" Coil 1/2" Coil
P-101 Fleet-Lift Holding Rod To Order:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code
Example:
Note: Holding Rod may be special ordered in longer lengths. 06/09
200 P-100 Fleet-Lift Holding Plates, FL144.

69
Fleet-Lift System
Fleet-Lift System
Installation and Removal of Anchors and Reusable Recess Plugs
Installing an Anchor in the Recess Plug: A) Open the slot of the recess plug by placing a holding rod or screwdriver into an outside hole and squeeze the recess open. (B) Place the anchor over the steel stud and close the recess plug. The assembly is ready for installation.
Fleet-Lift System
B A
Attaching the Assembly to the Form: A) Place the assembly against the form and position over the predrilled hole. (B) Insert the 3/8" holding rod through the hole and thread into the recess plug. (C) Pull the assembly tight to the form by firmly tightening the wing nut on the holding rod.
B A
Attachment Using a Holding Plate: A) Position and attach the holding plate to the form. B) Slide the anchor assembly over the holding plate studs and firmly against the form. (C) Installation is complete.
Note: The holding plate can be used to hold the recess plug/insert assembly in the closed position to facilitate working the anchor into fresh concrete (wet setting). It is recommended that the back of the recess plug be covered with tape to protect it from being filled with concrete. Be sure to vibrate to properly consolidate the concrete around the anchor. To strip, simply remove the tape and/or cover/patch and pry the holding plate out of the recess plug with a blade screwdriver or similar tool.
B A C
Removing the Recess Plug from the Concrete: A) After the back of the recess plug is exposed, insert a steel rod or screwdriver into the half of the recess plug opposite the threaded stud and rotate it to loosen that half of the recess plug. (B) After the first half of the recess plug has been loosened, use the holding rod in the other side in a scissor motion to free the recess plug.
A
70 06/09
Fleet-Lift System
P-99-C Fleet-Lift Cast Steel Recess Plug
The Dayton Superior P-99-C Fleet-Lift Cast Steel Recess Plug Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code. is designed for high reuse, high curing temperatures and cold weather Example: applications. The recess Plug uses a Steel Wedge (P-102) through the 200 P-99-C Fleet-Lift Cast Steel Recess anchor eye to securely hold the anchor in place. A Foam Strip (P-103) fits Plug, FL100. over the head of the anchor to prevent concrete from entering the void. The recess plug/anchor assembly is secured to the form work with the 1/2" diameter Holding Rod (P-101) or simply nailed to the form. Recess plug, steel wedge and foam insert are sold separately.
3/8" Dia. (1/2" dia. optional) C
To Order:
P-102 Steel Wedge
P-99-C Cast Steel Recess Plug
P-99-C Fleet-Lift Cast Steel Recess Plug

P-99-C Fleet-Lift Cast Steel Recess Plug Anchor Tonnage 2- or 3-ton 4- or 6-ton 8- or 10-ton Product Code FL078 FL100 FL015 Dimensions A 1-7/8" 2-3/8" 3-3/8" B 1-3/4" 2-3/8" 3-3/8" C 4" 5-3/8" 7-3/8"
P-103 Foam
P-102 Fleet-Lift Steel Wedge

P-102 Steel Wedge Anchor Tonnage 2- or 3-ton 4- or 6-ton 8- or 10-ton Product Code FL017 FL084 FL085
P-103 Fleet-Lift Foam

P-103 Foam Anchor Tonnage 2- or 3-ton 4- or 6-ton 8- or 10-ton Product Code FL087 FL069 FL091
Typical Fleet-Lift Anchor
P-99-C Fleet-Lift Cast Steel Recess Plug Assembly Sequence
06/09
71
Fleet-Lift System
Fleet-Lift System
Installation and Removal of the Fleet-Lift Cast Steel Recess Plug

Installing the Cast Steel Recess Plug to an Anchor: A) Place the foam strip over the top of the anchor. (B) Place the anchor and foam into the recess slot . (C) Slide the curved steel wedge into the top of the recess plug and through the anchors eye and wedge tightly.
Fleet-Lift System
B C A Complete Assembly
Attaching the Recess Plug/Anchor Assembly to the Form: A) Place the assembly over the predrilled hole. (B) Insert a holding rod through the hole and thread it into the recess plug. Tighten the holding rod against the anchor with the fixed wing nut. (C) Tighten the assembly against the form with the free-running wing nut.
Fixed Nut
Free-Running Nut
Removing the Cast Steel Recess Plug: A) Remove the holding rod from the recess plug. (B) Remove the form. (C) Remove the steel wedge by tapping on the small end with a hammer. (D) Thread the holding rod back into the recess plug and tighten until it pushes the recess out of the void.
D C
72
06/09
Fleet-Lift System
P-99-D Fleet-Lift Disposable Recess Plug (PVC)

The Dayton Superior P-99-D Fleet-Lift Disposable Recess Plug can be used to preset Fleet-Lift face-lift or edge-lift anchors or can be used to wet set P-94 Anchors. The Cover/ Patch fits tightly onto the recess plug to fully protect the unit. The Cover/Patch is concrete gray in color and can be used as a patch over the recess opening for temporary or permanent cover. Recess Plug Components: The Disposable Recess Plug can be ordered in sets consisting of a body with a preinstalled clip and a lid, or as individual pieces. This gives the system the versatility to meet your requirements without having to order parts that are not needed.
Standard Anchor Clip Body
Cover/Patch
Disposable Recess Set To Order:

pecify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) complete S sets or individual part, (4) product code.
Example:
200, P-99-D Fleet-Lift Disposable Recess Plug Cover/Patches, FL067S.

Cover/Patch
B Standard Anchor Clip
Body C
P-99-D Fleet-Lift Disposable Recess Plug
Anchor Tonnage
Product Description Body Lid Set Body Lid Set Body
Product Code FL066B FL066L FL066S FL067B FL067L FL067S FL068B FL068L FL068S
B 2" 2-1/2" 3-1/2"
C 4-1/4" 4-1/4" 5-1/2" 5-1/2"
D 3/8" 5/8" 3/4"

73
1, 2 and 3-ton
2-7/16" 2-5/16" 2-7/16" 2-5/16"
4 and 6-ton
2-7/8" 2-3/4" 2-7/8" 2-3/4"
8 and 10-ton
Lid Set
3-7/8" 3-3/4" 3-7/8" 3-3/4"
8-5/16" 8-1/8" 8-5/16" 8-1/8"
06/09
Fleet-Lift System
Fleet-Lift System
Installation of P-99-D Disposable Recess Plug and Erection Anchors

Installing an Erection Anchor in a Disposable Recess Plug: (A) Remove the clip from the recess plug. The clip will not be used with the erection anchor. (B) Open the body of the recess plug enough to allow the anchor to slide into the recess plug. (C) Close the recess plug around the anchor. Recess plug/anchor assembly is completed. Attaching the Erection Anchor/Recess Plug to the Form: Four methods are displayed in the sketches: 1) Edge Installation Two-Step Method (A) Nail the cover/ patch to the edge form for position. (B) Push the anchor/recess assembly onto cover/patchs studs until fully seated and nail the recess plug to the form. 2) Edge Installation One-Step Method Place the anchor/ recess plug assembly (with cover/patch attached) in the desired position and nail the assembly to the edge form. 3) Edge Installation Double-Faced Tape Place doublefaced tape on the cover/patch and press the assembly onto the edge form in the desired position. 4) Edge Installation With Holding Rod (A) Drill out and remove one of the studs on the cover/patch. (B) Install the cover/patch on the recess plug body with the drilled-out hole over the threaded insert in the recess plug body. (C) Place the recess plug/anchor assembly over a predrilled hole in the edge form. (D) Firmly attach the assembly to the edge form with a 3/8" holding rod.
Erection Anchor Installed Ready for Cover/Patch Clip Removed Ready for Erection Type Anchor
Remove the Clip
Fleet-Lift System
1) Edge Installation Two-Step

1A) 1B)
2) Edge Installation One-Step
Remove stud with drill
3) Edge Installation Double-Faced Tape
Double-Faced Tape
4) Edge Installation With Holding Rod

Holding Rod
74
Reusable Recess Plug
06/09
Fleet-Lift System
Installation of P-99-D Disposable Recess Plug and Standard Anchors
Installing Standard Anchors in the Disposable Recess Plug:
To install standard, non-erection head anchors, open the Dayton Superior P-99-D Disposable Recess Plug just enough to allow the anchor to be inserted fully into the body of the recess plug. Do not excessively open the body to avoid damaging the recess plug. Note that the anchor clip fits snugly against the anchor to seal out any concrete leakage. Snapping the cover/patch onto the recess plug completes the installation.
Installing an Anchor
Setting Standard Anchors with the Disposable Recess Plug:

The recess plug/anchor assembly can be set in position in a variety of methods: (1) by nailing it to a support beam and suspending it above the surface of the concrete, (2) nailed or double-faced taped to the form face or (3) wet set. Wet setting is accomplished by nailing or taping the assembly to a small template board and then working the assembly down into the freshly poured concrete. Light vibration is usually needed to ensure good bond around the anchor. A properly placed anchor will have the cover/patch slightly below the surface of the concrete. This will facilitate screeding operations and will aid in locating the recess Block after curing. Support Top of Concrete
Edge Form
Install Cover/Patch
Wet-Set
Nail or Double-face Tape
S-Anchor Installed
Remove recess body by inserting screwdriver into each round hole and rotate to release. Remove body.
Note: Body clip may remain in recess and require separate removal.
Disposable Recess Plug Removal:

(A) To remove the cover/patch Place a blade screwdriver in the center of cover/patchs side and carefully dislodge and remove the cover/patch. (B) To remove the recess plugs body Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into each round hole in the recess plug and rotate the tool to remove the body. The anchor clip may remain in the recess and require a separate removal.
06/09
75
Fleet-Lift System
Fleet-Lift System
P-99-D Temporary Cover/Patch Installation

The Dayton Superior P-99-D Cover/Patch can be used as a temporary cover to keep sand, rain, snow, debris, etc., out of the recess. Under normal precast plant yard conditions, it will stay in place without adhesive.
Fleet-Lift System
When planning to use the cover/patch as a temporary cover, be careful when removing the cover to avoid damage. Simply replace the cover/patch into the formed recess, flush with the surface of the concrete. A silicone adhesive may be used on the inner rim of the recess to prevent water from entering the recess.
Support Rim: use silicone adhesive on this area for permanent or water tight patch
Permanent Cover/Patch Installation

When used as a permanent patch, the cover/patch eliminates the need to grout and will protect the anchor from the environment. The light gray color of the unit will blend with most normal concrete, or it can be painted to closely match other color applications. When anticipating the use of the cover/patch as a permanent application, be careful during removal to protect the integrity of the concrete around the perimeter of the recess. An application of a silicone or other type adhesive to the inner rim of the recess will seal out the elements or other contaminants. If the recess plug/anchor assembly was installed flush with the concrete surface, the cover/patch will be flush in its permanent position. Future access to the anchor is easily accomplished by removing the cover as described earlier. Additional cover/patches may be purchased separately, if required.
Reinstalled as a temporary or permanent patch
Protective Cap for Reusable Recess Plugs

The cover/patch can be used as a protective cap for the reusable recess plug. This will protect the recess plug and will eliminate the use of duct tape to cover the back of the recess plug. After installing the anchor in the recess plug, snap the cover/patch onto the recess plug. The cover/patch can be ordered separately for this purpose and can be used and reused many times in this type of installation.
T-Anchor Reusable Plastic Recess Plug
Disposable Cover/Patch
76
06/09
Fleet-Lift System
P-99-P Fleet Patch

The Dayton Superior P-99-P Fleet Patch is a durable plastic patch designed to quickly cover 2-ton and 4-ton Fleet-Lift setting plug recesses. The P-99-P patch is fabricated from an additive stabilized polypropylene to maintain the patchs slightly convex shape. The convex shape helps to keep a constant gripping pressure after installation. The patch is supplied in a concrete gray color with a matte finish that allows subsequent painting, if desired.
Fleet Patch Advantages:

Special shape-holding composition. Fast, one-piece push-on installation. Paintable concrete gray matte finish. Full eight (8) inch diameter. Weather and chemical resistant. Self adjusting grippers. The P-99-P Fleet Patch is a high quality, one piece plastic patch that is easy to install and maintain. It will provide a quick and economical solution to covering Fleet-Lift anchor recesses.
Fleet-Lift System
Typical P-99-P Fleet Patch Installation:

1) Start the patch grippers on the top edge of the anchor. 2) Push the patch onto the anchor and flush with the concrete.
Note: The P-99-P Fleet Patch will not prevent corrosion or rusting of an embedded anchor that is subject to wet conditions. Spraying the anchor with a corrosion resistant compound and applying a bead of silicone around the underside of the patch will help prevent moisture penetration.
P-99-P Fleet Patch

Fleet Patch Sales Category P-99-P Product Code No. FL 612 Weight For 100 24 lbs.
To Order:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code.
Example:
200, P-99-P Fleet Patch, FL612.
06/09
77
Fleet-Lift System
Setting Stud Setting Stud
P-100-M Fleet-Lift Magnetic Plate

The Dayton Superior P-100-M Fleet-Lift Magnetic Plate eliminates the for drilling setting-bolt holes in steel forms. Installed into a rubber base of strong, reliable magnets. These magnets, along with an attachment and setting screw, work together to hold a Fleet-Lift anchor tightly in during the placement of concrete. The P-100-M Magnetic Plate is available in three sizes to fit the three Fleet-Lift Recess Plugs.
need is a set stud position P-99
P-100-MS Setting Screw

Provided with 3/8" coil threads and used to attach the magnetic setting plate to the P-99 Recess Plug, this unit has either a slot or hex head.
Fleet-Lift System
P-100-M Fleet-Lift Magnetic Plate P-100-MS in the Setting Screw

and the
Use the 1-1/2" long setting screw with the 1, 2 and 3-ton system 2-3/8" long setting screw with both the 4 to 6-ton and the 8 to 10-ton systems.
P-100-M Fleet-Lift Magnetic Plate Installation
1) Attach Fleet-Lift Anchor to recess plug.
2) Push recess plug onto setting stud of the magnet using the non-threaded middle hole.
3) Place the P-110-MS Setting Screw through the hole in setting plate, securing setting plate tightly to recess plug.
4) Carefully set complete anchor assembly into proper position in the form.
P-104 Fleet Lift One Piece Magnetic Recess

The Dayton Superior P104 One Piece Magnetic Recess allows installation of the Fleet anchors in a metal face form using a one piece rubber recess with magnets imbedded in the top of the recess. Available in 2T, 4T and 8T products.
78
06/09
Utility Anchor System
The Dayton Superior Utility Anchor System is designed to economically simplify the lifting and handling of precast concrete elements. Its economics, ease of use and versatility will be a welcome addition to your precast operations. Key Advantages High strength up to 24,000 lbs. SWL No special lifting hardware required Uses a standard hook or clevis Easy to install and use Utilizes reusable 90 and 45 polyurethane recess plugs Eliminates through holes in the precast element An economical and versatile system applicable to any precast concrete element Added Benefit Utility contractors can use the utility anchor effectively as a pulling iron. When used as a pulling iron, the safe working loads may be increased by 33%, based on the use of a 3 to 1 factor of safety. The design of the Dayton Superior Utility Anchor Utility System assures the precaster of an economical, user-friendly system for lifting and handling precast concrete elements. Utilize the Utility Anchor System to: Remove precast elements from their forms Handle in the precast yard Load for shipment Unload and place at the job site The precaster is able to do it all without the need for any special lifting equipment or hardware. Simply use a standard hook or shackle to connect slings to the utility anchor for a safe lift. The Utility Anchor System uses a polyurethane recess plug to create a void in the concrete. The concrete void created for the P-75-H utility anchor is sufficiently large to accept the following: 1) 6-ton Grade 8 alloy hook or 2) 7-ton forged alloy shackle For the P-75-S Utility Anchors: 3) 15-ton cast/alloy hook or 4) 15-ton forged alloy shackle DO NOT use larger hooks or shackles; they will apply additional and unintended loads to the utility anchor and could cause a premature failure of the concrete or anchor.
Lift
Anchor Placement
Placement of the Utility Anchor is dependent on the structural shape of the precast element. Utility anchors are not designed for thin edge installation. Always maintain minimum edge distances. For special conditions, contact the nearest Dayton Superior Technical Service Department for assistance.
Lift
Pulling Iron
Lift
Typical Applications
Minimum Edge
06/09
Used To Load/Install
79
P-75 and P-75-H Utility Anchor
The Dayton Superior Utility Anchors are available in three diameters and a series of lengths for specific concrete thickness. The utility anchor can be set in either a 90 or a 45 anchor orientation using the appropriate setting plug.
P-75 and P-75-H Utility Anchor Anchor Type 4UA444 5UA444 P-75 6UA444 5UA671 6UA671 8UA671 P-75-H 12UA875 Product Code No. 121877 123442 121888 123441 121889 121891 124738 A 5-1/4" 6" 7-3/8" 6 7/16" 7-3/8" 9-3/4" 15-7/8" B 3-1/8" 3-3/4" 4-3/4" 3-3/4" 4-3/4" 6-3/4" 11" C 0.444" 0.444" 0.444" 0.671" 0.671" 0.671" 0.875" End Shape Swift Lift Swift Lift Swift Lift Swift Lift Swift Lift Swift Lift Swift Lift
P-75 Utility Anchor
Anchor
Type
Product Code No.
Minimum Panel Thickness 4" 5" 5 5/8" 5" 5 5/8" 7 5/8" 12"
Safe Working Load Tension 90 3,200 3,860 4,460 4,560 7,320 10,830 24,000
Safe Working Load Shear 90 5,800 7,710 9,460 8,430 15,780 18,850 24,000
Safe Working Load Tension/Shear 45 2,260 2,730 3,150 3,220 5,170 7,660 24,000
Minimum Edge Distance 9" 11" 15" 11" 15" 20" 30"
4UA444 5US444 P-75 6UA444 5UA671 6UA671 8UA671 P-75 H 12UA875
121877 123442 121888 123441 121880 121801 124738
P-75-H Utility Anchor

To Order:

pecify: (1) quantity, (2) name, S (3) product code.
200, P-75 Utility Anchors, 5UA444. Note: 1) Compressive strength of normal weight concrete to be 4,000 psi at time of initial lift. 2) Safe working loads provide an approximate factor of safety of 4 to 1. 3) Utility anchors to be installed at 90 to surface of the concrete. 4) Shear safe working loads are based on loading in the direction of the top of the precast concrete element.
Example:
P-75-C Utility Anchor with Clip
The Dayton Superior Utility Anchor with Clip is designed to allow the Utility Anchor to be secured to the wire mesh cage. This product utilizes the P-75 Utility Anchors with 2 wire clips welded to opposite legs of the anchor. These wire clips are positioned to hold the utility anchor with Void to the wire mesh in the proper position in the wall for lifting your precast product. Both the 5UA and 6UA anchors in 0.444 and 0.671 diameters for 9" wire spacing are in stock. Other anchor and wire spacing are readily available from our Parsons KS plant.
To Order:

pecify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product code S (4) anchor size, (5) wire spacing (6) wall thick ness.
Example:
200, P-75-C, #121443, 5UA444anchor, 9" wire spacing, 5" wall. Product Code 123443 121890 121892 121893 127446
80
Utility Anchor 5UA444 5UA671 6UA444 6UA671 8UA671
Wire Clip Lengths 9" 9" 9" 9" 9"
Wall Thickness 5" 5" 6" 6" 8"

06/09

P-76 Utility Anchor Setting Plug Type 90P444 45P444 90P671 90P671 Product Code No. 123175 123176 123177 127786 Length 8.00" 8.00" 8.00" 8.00" Width 3.25" 3.25" 3.25" 4.58" Depth 3" 3" 3" 3.35" Color Blue Blue Orange Orange
The Dayton Superior Utility Anchor Setting Plugs are manufactured from polyurethane plastic in 90 and 45 anchor orientation versions.
P-76 Utility Anchor Setting Plugs
The reusable setting plug properly sets the anchor 45P671 123178 8.00" 3.25" 3" Orange approximately 1/2" below the surface of the con90P875 124685 15.00" 6.13" 5" Blue crete and provides an adequate recess for easy sling attachment. After final positioning of the concrete element, the recess formed by the recess To Order: member can be easily grouted or conveniently covered by the Utility Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product Anchor Cover/Patch. code.
Utility Anchor Lifting System 81
The 90-P-875 Setting Plug used with the P-75-H 24,000 lb. anchor requires 2 each P-101 holding rods to attach setting plug to the form. No holding plate or magnetic plate are available for this setting plug.
200, P-76 Utility Anchor Setting Plugs, 90P444.
Example:
90
45
P-76 Utility Anchor Setting Plugs
P-76-D Disposable Utility Anchor Setting Plugs 0.671
The Dayton Superior Disposable Setting Plug is manufactured to offer the precaster an inexpensive alternate to urethane setting plugs. This 2 piece high density polyethylene plastic setting plug is used with the 0.671 Dayton Superior Utility Anchors. The two piece design snaps To Order: tightly together Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) product P-76-D Disposable Utility Anchor around the legs code. of the anchor eliminateing concrete entering the void. The setting Setting Plugs 0.671 Example: plug is installed to the formwork using nail holes on each end of the 200, P-76-D, #126214. plug. This plug can also be used with the P-77 Double Tee Anchors.
P-76-C Utility Anchor Cover/Patch

06/09
P-76-C Utility Anchor Cover/Patch
The Dayton Superior P-76-C Utility Anchor Cover/Patch installs

P-76-M Utility Anchor Magnetic Setting Plate
The Dayton Superior P-76-M Utility Anchor Magnetic Setting Plates are available for easy setting of utility anchors in steel precast forms. Use 3/8" P-101 Holding Rod in threaded through hole to strip magnet from steel form.
To Order:

Example:
Threaded Through-Hole used to release magnet from form.
200, P-76-M Utility Anchor Magentic Setting Plates.
P-76-M Utility Anchor Magnetic Setting Plate
P-100 Utility Anchor Holding Plate P-101 Utility Anchor Holding Rod
The Dayton Superior P-100 Utility Anchor Holding Plate and P-101 Holding Rod are used in various applications to install Utility Anchors in the form. The Holding Plate can be nailed, screwed, welded or double-face taped to the form. The setting plug/anchor assembly is pushed onto the projecting studs of the plate and held firmly in place through the concrete placement. The Holding Rod is placed through a predrilled hole in the form and into the threaded insert in the setting plug. After fully seating the holding rod in the setting plug, the setting plug can be pulled up tightly to the form with the holding rods freerunning wing nut.
To Order:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) anchor diameter.
Example:
200, P-100 Utility Anchor Holding Plates, 0.671 anchor diameter.
P-100 Utility Anchor Holding Plate (FL111)
6" (Typ.)
P-101 Utility Anchor Holding Rod (3/8" Coil Thread) (FL131)
P-104 One Piece Magnetic Utility Anchor Recess

The Dayton Superior P-104 One Piece Magnetic Utility Anchor Recess allows installation of Utility Anchors in a metal face form using a one piece rubber recess with Magnet imbedded in the top of the recess. Available for 0.444 or 0.671 Utility
To Order:

Example:
200, P-104 One Piece Magnetic Utility Anchor Recess.
82
06/09
Anchor Placement
Placement of the Utility Anchor is dependent on the structural shape of the precast unit and/or the manufacturers preference. The Utility Anchors are not designed for thin edge installations. Always maintain minimum edge distances and adjust anchor capacities if concrete strengths, other than those noted in the capacity chart, are encountered. Refer to edge distance chart on page 82.
1. Assemble setting plug and anchor. 2. Affix holding plate (nail, weld, magnetic setting plate, double-face tape) to the form. 3. Push the setting plug/anchor assembly onto the holding plate and firmly against the form.
In-Form setting:
Through-Form Setting
1. Assemble setting plug and anchor. 2. Insert holding rod through form and line up setting plug. 3. Finger-tighten holding rod and lock assembly in place with the running wing nut.
Wet Setting
1. Assemble setting plug holding plate and anchor. 2. Use cover/patch or duct tape to seal setting plug cavities. 3. Work the assembly down into the wet concrete until the top surface of the plug is flush with the surface of the concrete.
Place long stud at top Utility Anchor Setting Plug Form Utility Anchor Setting Plug
Utility Anchor Holding Rod Utility Anchor Utility Anchor
Utility Anchor Holding Plate (8-Ton Fleet-Lift Unit) Form Cover/Patch may be added to this installation if future sealing of recess is required. Drill out one stud of Cover/Patch to pass holding rod through.
In-Form Setting
Through-Form Setting
Setting Plug Cover/Patches are available
Holding Plate
Wet Setting
06/09 83

P-77 Double Tee Anchor
The Dayton Superior P-77 Double Tee Anchor is specifically designed to provide greater lifting capabilitites for Double Tees and other concrete products. This Anchor has the capacity of 7.5T SWL. The anchors are designed to utilize the standard field Crosby Hooks for lifting of the Precast Product, requiring no special hardware be purchased by the precaster or erector. The head of the anchor is 1/2" below the concrete surface to prevent rusting and to eliminate any removal of steel, a common practice when using "strand" as an anchor. The recess member (P-75-D) utilized to form the void is designed to allow up to a 30% angle on the sling to prevent spalling of the concrete from the contact with the Crosby Hook. A smaller void is also available if sling angle and hook size are reduced. See P-76-D 4T and 7.5T Disposable Void Former. P-77 Double Tee Anchorrs are available in 3 common lengths of 9-1/2, 15-1/2" and 23-1/2" All are stocked in plain finish and available in Hot-dipped galvanized finish. B Safe Working Product A B C Safe Working
Load Code Load *
7.5T 7.5T 7.5T
126728 126726 126727
9-1/2" 15-1/2" 23-1/2"
5/8" 5/8" 5/8"
3-3/4" 4" 4"
13,500 # 13,500 # 13,500 #
* Mechanical Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of 4:1

To Order:

pecify: (1) quantity, (2) name. (3) product code, (4) S finish
Example:
200, P-77 Double Tee Anchor #126728, plain C
P-76-D 7.5 T Disposable Void Former
The Dayton Superior P-76-D 7.5 T Disposable Void Former was created to allow a large enough void for the P-77 Double T Anchor to utilize Crosby Hooks For Lifting of the double T and other precast products. The 7.5T Disposable Void Former is a 2 part recess plug fabricated from high density polyethylene plastic. The two-piece design snaps together around the head of the anchor to securely grasp the anchor. The tight fit eliminates the concrete entering into the void. The design secures the anchor in proper position and maintains 1/2" clearance between top edge of the anchor and the top surface of the concrete. The tabs on the ends of the void former provide a convenient method to nail the assemble to a form. The Void Former is removed and discarded after usage.
To Order:

pecify: (1) quantity, (2) name. (3) product S code, (4) finish
Example:
200, P-76D Disposable Void Forms #126608
P-76 Utility Anchor & Double Tee Anchor Setting Plug

The new P-76 Setting Plug is a re-usable polyurethane setting plug designed to provide a larger recess in the concrete for the 0.671 Utility Anchors and the Double Tee Anchors. This setting plug is 9.0" in length, 4.5" in width across the top, and 3.3" in depth. This recess member positions the anchor at a 90 degree angle to the surface of the concrete product. The reusable setting plug sets the anchor approximately 1/2" below the top of the concrete. The setting plug is attached to the form with the P-101 Holding Rod and/or the P-100 Holding Plate. The P-76 Setting Plug is stripped from the concrete by placing two 3/8" dia. rods into the holes provided in the plug and using a 'scissor action' to strip the plug from the anchor.
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) Part Number 127786
200, P-76 Utility Anchor & Double Tee Anchor Setting Plug #127786
Example:
84
06/09

P-110 Wire Rope Lifting System
The Wire Rope Lifting System is an economical lifting loop for utility type structures. It is used in either face or edge lifts applications and is mucked into the surface of the concrete. The galvanized wire rope is formed in a figure 8 shape, with the ends of the rope secured by a positive swaged clamp, and a steel band at approximately the mid point to establish the proper shape. The Wire Rope Lifting System is embedded 2/3 of its length into the concrete. The hardware must be standard hook or clevis with a diameter at least twice the rope diameter. Each anchor has a color-coded tag which identifies the SWL in tension of the anchor. Product FEATURES AND BENEFITS: 7 standard sizes handles most precast applications up to 10,000 lb SWL Mucked into surface no recess members required by the precaster Uses standard jobsite Crosby Hooks no hardware purchases required by precaster. Galvanized wire rope reduces rusting of the anchor Can be cut off or left exposed reduces labor cost for precaster Economical for the cost conscious precaster
To Order:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name. (3) product code
Example:
200, P-110 Wire Rope Lifting System #127327 Part # #127326 #127327 #127328 #127329 #127330 #127331 #127332 Description 0.8 T 1.2 T 1.6 T 2.0 T 2.5 T 3.8 T 5.0 T Safe Working Load 1,600# 2,400# 3,200# 4,000# 5,000# 7,600# 10,000# A 8.07" 9.06 9.84 11.81 12.80 14.57 14.96 B 3.7 3.9 5.1 5.3 5.5 6.5 7.6 C 3.3 3.5 4.9 4.9 4.9 5.7 5.7 D 5.7 6.6 7.1 8.7 9.4 10.7 11.1 E 2 2.50 2.75 3.13 3.38 3.88 3.80 F 0.24 0.275 0.313 0.375 0.375 0.473 0.630
NOTE: SWL is 4:1 SF in 3000 psi concrete
Tag Color: White= 0.8T, Red= 1.2T, Pink= 1.6T, Light Green= 2.0T, Dark Green= 2.5T, Emerald Green= 3.8T, Light Yellow= 5.0T Wire Loop Parellel To Wall Thickness
Anchor Tonnage 0.8 ton 1.2 ton 1.6 ton 2.0 ton 2.5 ton 3.8 ton 5.0 ton Minimum Wall Thickness 4.0" 4.5" 4.75" 6" 7.0" 9.0" 12" Overall Length 8.0625" 9.375" 9.8125" 11.8125" 12.34" 14.5" 14.9375" Emdedment Depth 5.7" 6.5" 7" 8.7" 9.4" 10.7" 11.1" Minimum Edge Distance 2.0" 2.25" 2.375" 3" 3.5" 4.5" 6" Minimum Corner Distance 8.75" 9.75" 10.5" 13.25" 14.25" 16.25" 16.75" SWL @ 3000 psi 1,600 lbs 2,400 lbs 2,841 lbs 3,547 lbs 4,898 lbs 6,796 lbs 9,539 lbs Concrete Strength For maximum SWL 3,000 psi 3,000 psi 4,000 psi 4,000 psi 3,500 psi 4,000 psi 3,500 psi Maximum SWL 1,600 lbs. 2,400 lbs 3,200 lbs 4,000 lbs 5,000 lbs 7,600 lbs 10,000 lbs

Anchor Tonnage 0.8 ton 1.2 ton 1.6 ton 2.0 ton 2.5 ton 3.8 ton 5.0 ton 06/09
Wire Loop Perpendicular To Wall Thickness

Minimum Wall Thickness 5.5" 6" 6.5" 7" 7.5" 9.0" 12" Overall Length 8.0625" 9.375" 9.8125" 11.8125" 12.34" 14.5" 14.9375" Emdedment Depth 5.7" 6.5" 7" 8.7" 9.4" 10.7" 11.1" Minimum Edge Distance 2.75" 3" 3.25" 3.5" 3.75" 4.5" 6" Minimum Corner Distance 8.75" 9.75" 10.5" 13.25" 14.25" 16.25" 16.75" SWL @ 3000 psi 1,600 lbs 2,400 lbs 2,700 lbs 3,474 lbs 4,251 lbs 5,468 lbs 7,739 lbs Concrete Strength For maximum SWL 3,000 psi 3,000 psi 4,500 psi 4,000 psi 4,500 psi 6,000 psi 5,000 psi Maximum SWL 1,600 lbs. 2,400 lbs 3,200 lbs 4,000 lbs 5,000 lbs 7,600 lbs 10,000 lbs 85
86
06/09

B-1 or B-2 Coil Ties
Used as Inserts
The Dayton Superior B-1 Two Strut Coil Tie and B-2 Four Strut Coil Tie, when used as inserts for lifting and handling thin wall precast elements are extremely effective. Coil ties are available with an optional B-3 Screw-on Coil for use with the B-30 Screw-on Plastic Cone to set the insert back from the face of the concrete. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the corner distance.
Minimum Corner Distance or Greater Minimum Corner Distance or Greater Minimum Edge Distance or Greater Minimum Edge Distance or Greater
Shear Direction
B-1 or B-2 Coil Ties

Insert Type B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 Bolt Diameter 3/4" 3/4" 1" 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 3/4" 3/4" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" Insert Height 6" 6" 6" 6" 8" 8" 6" 6" 8" 8" 12" 12" 8" 8" 12" 12" Minimum Edge Distance 8" 14" 8" 16" 10" 16" 8" 12" 10" 16" 10" 15" 12" 15" 15" 20" Minimum Corner Distance 14" 21" 14" 24" 15" 24" 14" 16" 15" 24" 15" 22" 18" 22" 22" 30" Safe Working Load Tension 4,500 lbs 4,500 lbs 5,447 lbs 6,120 lbs 6,750 lbs 6,750 lbs 5,536 lbs 6,220 lbs 7,897 lbs 9,000 lbs 9,000 lbs 9,000 lbs 9,400 lbs 9,400 lbs 13,500 lbs 13,500 lbs Safe Working Load Shear 2,810 lbs 4,500 lbs 3,200 lbs 6,120 lbs 4,670 lbs 6,750 lbs 4,710 lbs 6,220 lbs 5,640 lbs 9,000 lbs 6,100 lbs 9,000 lbs 7,840 lbs 9,390 lbs 10,500 lbs 13,500 lbs A 6" 6" 6" 6" 8" 8" 6" 6" 8" 8" 12" 12" 8" 8" 12" 12" B 1 5/8" 1 5/8" 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 2 1/2" 2 1/2" 1 5/8" 1 5/8" 2" 2" 2" 2" 2 1/2" 2 1/2" 2 1/2" 2 1/2" C 0.375" 0.375" 0.440" 0.440" 0.440" 0.440" 0.375" 0.375" 0.375" 0.375 0.375" 0.375" 0.440" 0.440" 0.440" 0.440"
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. Safe Working Loads are based on 1/2" setback from face of concrete. NOTE: Contact Dayton Superior Technical Services Department for shear loads for inserts located near an edge smaller than mentioned in the table.
To Order:

B-1 Two Strut Coil Tie

A C B
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter, (4) length, (5) finish. B-1 or B-2 Coil Ties
Insert Type A B-1 B-1 B-1 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2
Bolt Diameter 3/4" 1" 1 1/4" 3/4" 1" 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/4"
Insert Height 6" 6" 8" 6" 8" 12" 8" 12"
Safe Working Load Mechanical 4,500 lbs 6,750 lbs 6,750 lbs 9,000 lbs 9,000 lbs 9,000 lbs 13,500 lbs 13,500 lbs
Safe Working Load Tension Concrete * 6,220 lbs 6,120 lbs 9,400 lbs 6,220 lbs 9,514 lbs 17,525 lbs 9,400 lbs 17,369 lbs
A 6" 6" 8" 6" 8" 12" 8" 12"
B 1 5/8" 2 1/4" 2 1/2" 1 5/8" 2" 2" 2 1/2" 2 1/2"
C 0.375" 0.440" 0.440" 0.375" 0.375" 0.375" 0.440" 0.440"
C B
B-2 Four Strut Coil Tie
NOTE: * SWL Tension Concrete values are provided for use with the tables on pages 17 & 18 for tension load reduction due to edge distance conditions closer than 1.5 x the insert length. Installed SWL is determined by the actual concrete capacity (edge conditions, strength, etc.), but can never be greater than the mechanical rating of the anchor.
06/09
Most Dayton Superior 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4" or 1-1/2" diameter coil inserts are available with an 11 gauge mounting washer welded to the upper ends of the strut wires. The 1/2", 3/4" and 1" diameter coil inserts use a 2" x 2" square washer, while the 1-1/4" and 1-1/2" inserts use a 3" x 3" square washer. The mounting washer allows an insert to be fastened to wood forms with ease. When inserts are ordered with mounting washers, they are supplied with Ethafoam plugs to keep concrete out of the coil. Removal of the Ethafoam plug clears the insert, allowing for proper engagement of the lifting bolt.
Mounting Washers
3/16" diameter nail holes, 2 places
Mounting Washer
87

B-11 Flat Washer
Made from carbon steel. Maximum space spanned
by washer should not exceed bolt diameter plus 1/4".
Type B-11 Standard B-11 Heavy
Bolt Diameter 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 1" 1" 1 - 1/4" 1 - 1/4" 1 - 1/2" 1 - 1/2"
Safe Working Load 1,800 lbs. 2,700 lbs. 2,700 lbs. 3,600 lbs. 7,200 lbs. 15,000 lbs. 10,800 lbs. 15,000 lbs. 15,000 lbs. 15,000 lbs.
Sizes 3" x 4" x 1/4" 4" x 5" x 1/4" 4" x 5" x 3/8" 5" x 5" x 3/8" 5" x 5" 1/2" 7" x 7" x 3/4" 5" x 5" x 5/8" 7" x 7" x 3/4" 5" x 5" x 3/4" 7" x 7" x 3/4"
B-11 Flat Washer
B-11 Standard B-11 Heavy B-11 Standard B-11 Heavy B-11 Standard B-11 Heavy B-11 Standard B-11 Heavy
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) type, (3) diameter of bolt to be used, (4) finish.
Example:
200, B-11 Heavy Flat Washers, 1" bolt dia., plain finish.
B-12 and P-49 Coil Rod
A vailable in low tensile (P-49) or high tensile
(B-12) strengths. M ay be cut with carborundum blades without damaging the threads. Do not use cutting torch to cut coil rod to length. U sed with B-13 or B-25 Coil Nuts for making special coil bolts. B -12 requires two B-13 or one B-25 Coil Nut to develop safe working loads. B -12 standard length is 12'-0" and P-49 standard length is 10'-0". Available in any length up to 20'-0" on special order.
Diameter 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" B-12 Safe Working Load Tension 3,600 lbs. 7,200 lbs. 15,000 lbs. 22,500 lbs. 27,000 lbs. Shear 2,400 lbs. 4,800 lbs. 10,000 lbs. 15,000 lbs. 18,000 lbs.
Coil Rod To Order: Example:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) diameter, (4) length. 200, B-12 Coil Rod, 1" dia. x 12'-0" long.
P-49 Safe Working Load Tension 2,700 lbs. Shear 1,800 lbs.
B-13 Coil Nut and B-25 Heavy Coil Nut

Type
Height Height
Diameter 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 1" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2"
Approx. Height 7/16" 1-3/16" 5/8" 1-3/16" 1" 2" 1-1/4" 1-1/2"
Safe Working Load Tension Using One B-13 Nut 2,400 lbs. 3,600 lbs. 9,600 lbs. 14,400 lbs. 19,000 lbs. Using Two B-13 Nuts or One B-25 Heavy Nut 3,600 lbs. 3,600 lbs. 7,200 lbs. 7,200 lbs. 15,000 lbs. 15,000 lbs. 22,500 lbs. 27,000 lbs.
B-13 B-25 B-13 B-25 B-13 B-25 B-13 B-13
B-13 Coil Nut To Order:
B-25 Heavy Coil Nut
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) diameter.
Example:
200 B-13 Coil Nuts, 1" diameter.
88
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 5 to 1. 06/09

B-14 Coil Bolt
B-14 coil bolts are available in 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4" and 1-1/2" diameters with integrally formed heads. Coil Bolts have fast-acting and self-cleaning threads. They can be reused, but will wear and must be regularly inspected for wear and damage. Keep bolts clean and lubricated at all times. When determining the overall length of a coil bolt, you must consider: Height of hardware and/or formwork grip. Insert Setback. Minimum coil penetration T he minimum coil penetration shown in the charts below, apply to all coil products. See page 99 for examples on determining proper bolt length.
Hardware Height Hex Head Coil Insert Setback
Minimum Coil Penetration
Minimum Thread Length Bolt Length
Sufficient void beyond coil created by setting bolt, setting stud or insert locator plug to keep lifting bolt from bottoming out.
To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) diameter, (4) length,
(5) type.
Example:

200, B-14 Coil Bolts, 1" dia. X 12" long, forged head.
B-14 Coil Bolts with Integrally Formed Hex Heads (Fabricated from Blanks Meeting ASTM A-325 Standards) 1/2" Diameter Forged Hex Head Safe Working Load Tension Shear 3/4" Diameter Forged Hex Head Safe Working Load Tension Shear 1" Diameter Forged Hex Head Safe Working Load Tension Shear 1-1/4" Diameter Forged Hex Head Safe Working Load Tension Shear 1-1/2" Diameter Forged Hex Head Safe Working Load Tension Shear
3,600 lbs. 2,400 lbs. 8,000 lbs. 5,300 lbs. 14,500 lbs. 9,600 lbs. 20,300 lbs. 13,500 lbs. 29,500 lbs. 19,600 lbs. Minimum Coil Penetration 2" Bolt Length 3" 4" 5" 6" Minimum Thread Length 2-1/4" 3-1/4" 4-1/4" 5" Minimum Coil Penetration 2-1/4" Bolt Length 3" 4" 5" 6" Minimum Thread Length 2-3/4" 3-3/4" 4-3/4" 5-3/4" Minimum Coil Penetration 2-1/2" Bolt Length 3" 4" 5" 6" Minimum Thread Length 2-3/4" 3-3/4" 4-3/4" 5-3/4" Minimum Coil Penetration 2-1/2" Bolt Length 3" 4" 5" 6" Minimum Thread Length 2-3/4" 3-3/4" 4-3/4" 5-3/4" 5-3/4" Minimum Coil Penetration 3" Bolt Length 4" 5" 6" Over 6" Minimum Thread Length 3-3/4" 4-3/4" 5-3/4" 5-3/4"
5-3/4" 5" provides Over 6" Over 6" 5-3/4" 5 Over Over 6" Safe Working Load a factor of safety of approximately to 1. 6"
06/09
89

B-16 Straight Coil Loop Insert
A
Although simple in design and fabrication, the B-16 Straight Coil Loop Insert is highly efficient for lifting and handling precast concrete elements. Standard inserts are shown in the chart. Special inserts for use with larger diameter coil bolts, or with loops having longer lengths and of heavier wire can be furnished, if required, on special order.
B
B-16 Straight Coil Loop Insert Selection Chart

Insert Bolt Diameter Length Minimum Edge Distance 2" 3" 5" 10" 2" 3" 5" 8" 2" 3" 5" 12" Minimum Safe Safe Corner Working Load Working Load Distance Tension Shear 5" 810 lbs. 200 lbs. 5" 1,310 lbs. 325 lbs. 10" 1,950 lbs. 1,050 lbs. 10" 1,950 lbs. 1,350 lbs. 5" 1,190 lbs. 200 lbs. 5" 1,910 lbs. 325 lbs. 10" 1,950 lbs. 1,050 lbs. 10" 1,950 lbs. 2,250 lbs. 7" 1,420 lbs. 225 lbs. 7" 2,240 lbs. 425 lbs. 7" 3,600 lbs. 775 lbs. 12" 3,600 lbs. 3,600 lbs. A B
B-16 Straight Coil Loop Insert
1/2"
3"
3"
0.223"
To Order:
1/2" or 3/4" 1/2" 3/4" or 1" Lifting/Handling Inserts and Accessories
S pecify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter, (4) length, (5) finish.
4"
4"
0.223"
Example:
6"
6"
0.306"
200, B-16 Straight Coil Loop Inserts, 1/2" dia. X 6" long, electro-plated finish.
Safe Working Loads are based on 1/2" setback from face of concrete. Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. Note: Dayton Superior does not recommend the use of 1/2" diameter bolts for lifting/handling of precast panels.
B-17 Double Flared Coil Loop Insert
The safe working load of the B-17 Double Flared Coil Loop Insert is greatly increased over that of a B-18 Single Flared Coil Loop. This increase in capacity is achieved by welding a second loop to the same coil. By adding the additional loop, it doubles the cross-sectional area of steel embedded in the concrete and at the same time, increases the area of the shear cone. The design of the B-17 insert leaves an open space between the two loops, allowing the B-17 insert to straddle reinB forcing steel or prestressing strands. C D Standard sizes are shown in the chart and other sizes are available on special order. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the minimum corner distance. To Order:
Example:
400, B-17 Double Flared Coil Loop Inserts, 1-1/4" dia. X 12-3/8" long, plain finish.
B-17 Double Flared Coil Loop Insert Selection Chart

Bolt Insert Diameter Length 1" 1-1/4" or 1-1/2" 1" 1-1/4" or 1-1/2" Minimum Edge Distance 5" 9" 12" 18" 5" 9" 12" 18" Minimum Safe Safe C D A B Corner Working Load Working Load Distance Tension Shear 15" 4,910 lbs. 2,780 lbs. 15" 9,500 lbs. 6,720 lbs. 12-3/8" 0.375" 5-9/16" 5-9/16" 18" 9,500 lbs. 9,500 lbs. 27" 9,500 lbs. 9,500 lbs. 15" 4,950 lbs. 2,940 lbs. 15" 9,810 lbs. 7,120 lbs. 12-1/2" 0.440" 5-3/4" 5-3/4" 18" 11,150 lbs. 10,960 lbs. 27" 13,500 lbs. 13,500 lbs.
12-3/8"
12-1/2"
Safe Working Loads are based on 1/2" setback from face of concrete. Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. 90 06/09

B-18 Single Flared Coil Loop Insert
The load carrying capacity of any cast-in-place concrete insert is largely dependent upon the ability of the insert to draw upon the tensile strength of the mass of concrete within which it is embedded. The B-18 Single Flared Coil Loop Insert makes effective use of this principle by increasing the depth and width of concrete embedment. B-18 inserts are available with an optional B-3 Screw-on Coil for use with the B-30 Screw-on Plastic Cone which acts to set the insert back from the face of the concrete. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the corner distance.
B A

Minimum Corner Distance or Greater
To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter,

(4) length, (5) finish.
Make certain setting bolt is of sufficient length to form a cavity for lifting bolt. Minimum Edge Distance or Greater Shear Direction
Example:
200, B-18 Single Flared Coil Loop Inserts, 1" dia. X 12" long, plain finish.

Bolt Diameter 1/2 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 1 1" 1 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 Insert Height 4 4 6 6 9 9 12 12 9 9 12 12 6 6 9 9 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 Minimum Edge Distance 5 8 5 12 5 12 5 12 5 15 5 12 5 12 5 12 5 12 5 14 7 7 7 14 Minimum Corner Distance 10 10 10 12 10 12 10 12 10 15 10 12 10 12 10 12 10 12 12 14 10 14 10 14 Safe Working Load Tension 2,250 lbs. 2,250 lbs. 2,930 lbs. 3,750 lbs. 3,750 lbs. 3,750 lbs. 3,750 lbs. 3,750 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 2,920 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 5,970 lbs. 7,500 lbs. 7,500 lbs. 7,500 lbs. 7,500 lbs. 7,500 lbs. Safe Working Load Shear 1,510 lbs. 2,250 lbs. 1,770 lbs. 3,750 lbs. 1,770 lbs. 3,750 lbs. 1,770 lbs. 3,750 lbs. 1,960 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 1,960 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 1,960 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 1,960 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 1,960 lbs. 4,500 lbs. 2, 130 lbs. 7,500 lbs. 3,530 lbs. 3,530 lbs. 3,530 lbs. 7,500 lbs. 12 2 3/4 5 7/8 0.440 12 2 1/2 5 7/8 0.440 12 2 1/4 5 7/8 0.440 12 1 7/8 5 5/8 0.375 9 1 7/8 5 5/8 0.375 6 1 7/8 5 5/8 0.375 12 1 3/4 5 5/8 0.375 9 1 3/4 5 5/8 0.375 12 1 5/8 5 1/2 0.306 9 1 5/8 5 1/2 0.306 6 1 5/8 5 1/2 0.306 A B C D
Lifting/Handling Inserts and Accessories 91
1 3/16
0.223
Safe Working Loads are based on 1/2" setback from face of concrete. Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 3,000 psi concrete. Note: Dayton Superior does not recommend the use of 1/2" diameter bolts for lifting/handling of precast panels. 06/09

A
The safe working load of the B-33 Double Flared Coil Loop Insert is identical to that of the B-17 Double Flared Coil Loop. However, its crisscross design will not allow the insert to straddle reinforcing steel or prestressing strands. Standard sizes are shown in the chart and other sizes are available on special order. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the minimum corner distance. B-33 Double Flared Coil Loop Insert Selection Chart
Bolt Insert Diameter Length 1" 1-1/4" or 1-1/2" 1" 1-1/4" or 1-1/2" Minimum Edge Distance 5" 9" 12" 18" 5" 9" 12" 22" Minimum Safe Safe C D A B Corner Working Load Working Load Distance Tension Shear 15" 4,910 lbs. 2,780 lbs. 15" 9,500 lbs. 6,720 lbs. 12-3/8" 0.375" 5-9/16" 5-9/16" 18" 9,500 lbs. 9,500 lbs. 18" 9,500 lbs. 9,500 lbs. 15" 4,870 lbs. 2,940 lbs. 15" 9,650 lbs. 7,100 lbs. 12-1/2" 0.440" 5-3/4" 5-3/4" 18" 10,960 lbs. 10,940 lbs. 22" 13,500 lbs. 13,500 lbs.
B
D C
12-3/8"
12-1/2"
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. Safe Working Loads are based on 1/2" setback from face of concrete.
To Order:
Example:
400, B-33 Double Flared Coil Loop Inserts, 1-1/4" dia. X 12-3/8" long, plain finish.
F-47 Double Flared Loop Insert

The Dayton Superior F-47 Double Flared Loop Insert has been designed for use in 3-1/4" or thicker precast concrete elements. This insert is available for use with 3/4" diameter coil bolts only.
Bolt Diameter Safe Working x Load Insert Height Tension Concrete Strength Minimum Edge Distance
3/4" Coil
3/4" x 2-3/4"
2,750 lbs.
2,500 psi
6"
2-3/4" Minimum Height .223" Diameter
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in normal weight concrete. Safe Working Loads are based on 1/2" setback from face of the concrete.
To Order:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) finish. 200, F-47 Double Flared Loop Inserts, plain finish.
4-5/8"
3-1/
8"
Example:
F-47 Double Flared Loop Insert
92
06/09

F-48 Eye Nut, F-49 Eye Bolt and F-49-A Eye Bolt
The Dayton Superior F-48 Eye Nut is cast from ductile iron that meets ASTM Standard A-536 Grade 80-55-06. The eye nut is cast with coil threads and is intended to be used with B-12 Coil Rod that has been cut to the proper length. The use of the eye nut will eliminate the need to inventory several different lengths of eye bolts. To make permanent length eye bolts, it is possible to weld lengths of coil rod to the casting. Since improper welding techniques can result in reduced safe working loads, Dayton Superior recommends that you contact your local welding supply house for proper welding instructions and techniques. The F-49 Eye Bolt is an F-48 Eye Nut supplied with a specified length of coil rod that has been welded in place. In order to develop the F-49 eye bolts rated load, the shoulder must be tightened securely against the face of the concrete. The F-48 Eye Nut and F-49 Eye Bolt are intended for straight tensile loading only; pulling or lifting at an angle drastically reduces the safe working load and is not recommended.
F-48 Eye Nut and F-49 Eye Bolt Selection Chart Safe Working Load Tension
Weld Area
F-48 Eye Nut
Coil Rod Diameter 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4"
Dimensions A 3-1/4" 3-1/2" 5" 6-1/4" B 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" C 1" 1" 1-3/4" 2-1/4" D 3/4" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" E 2" 2" 3" 4"
2,700 lbs. 3,600 lbs. 7,200 lbs. 10,800 lbs.
Length
Thread
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 5 to 1. Note: Dayton Superior does not recommend the use of 1/2" diameter bolts for lifting/handling of precast Coil panels.
F-48 Eye Nut: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter.
F-49 or F-49-A Eye Bolts: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter, (4) length.
F-49 Eye Bolt

A B
Example:

200, F-48 Eye Nuts, 1" dia. bolt.
Example:

200, F-49 Eye Bolts, 1" dia. X 12" long.
The F-49-A Eye Bolt is a forged, carbon steel, one piece, shoulder pattern eye bolt. It is available with 3/4" or 1" diameter coil threads and is stocked in 3-1/2" and 6" lengths. Longer lengths are available on special order. In order to develop the F-49-A Eye Bolts rated load, the shoulder must be tightened firmly against the face of the concrete. The eye bolt is intended for straight tensile loading only; pulling or lifting at an angle drastically reduces the safe working load and is not recommended. The F-49-A Eye Bolt meets material requirements of ASTM Standard A-489.
F-49-A Eye Bolt Selection Chart A 2-7/8" 3-1/2" Bolt Diameter 3/4" 1" Tension Safe Working Load 3,600 lbs. 6,400 lbs. B 1-1/2" 1-3/4" Length 3" or 6 3"
Length
F-49-A Eye Bolt
The P-21 Dayton Superior Wire Rope Loop provides a fast method for handling precast items. Designed to work with 3/4" and 1" diameter coil inserts under straight tension loads only. Do not use under shear loading conditions, instead, use a swivel lift plate and coil bolt. With proper care, the wire rope loop can be reused. Visual evidence of any deterioration of the wire rope is a safety feature of this product.
P-21 Wire Rope Loop
To Order:
A
Diameter x Type of Thread 1/2" Coil 3/4" Coil 1" Coil
Safe Working Load Tension 2,000 lbs. 5,200 lbs. 8,000 lbs.
Loop Dimensions B 2" 2 - 1/2" 3"
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) diameter.
A 6" 8 - 3/4" 12"
C 1 - 1/4" 1 - 3/4" 2 - 1/4"

Diameter C B
P-21 Wire Rope Loop

93
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 5 to 1. 06/09
To Order:
To Order:

F-53 Thin Slab Coil Insert
The Dayton Superior F-53 Thin Slab Coil Insert is designed for lifting thin precast concrete panels from the casting bed and for handling the panels until they are set into their final position. Inserts should be set back 1/2" from the surface of the concrete, maintaining at least 3/4" of concrete below the insert. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the minimum corner distance. Available in insert heights up to 4".
A C A A 15

(4) height, (5) finish.
F-53 Thin Slab Coil Insert
Example: 200, F-53 Thin Slab Coil Inserts, 1" dia. X 4" height,
plain finish.
F-53 Thin Slab Coil Insert Selection Chart Bolt Diameter 3/4" 1" Lifting/Handling Inserts and Accessories 1-1/4" 1-1/2" Insert Height 3" 4" 4" 4" Minimum Edge Distance 8" 10" 10" 10" Minimum Safe Safe Corner Working Load Working Load Distance Tension Shear 12" 15" 15" 15" 2,340 lbs. 3,520 lbs. 3,520 lbs. 3,520 lbs. 2,340 lbs. 3,460 lbs. 3,460 lbs. 3,460 lbs. A 3" 4" 4" 4" B 7-1/8" 9-3/8" 9-5/8" 9-7/8" C 0.306" 0.306" 0.306" 0.306"
94
06/09

F-56, F-58 and F-60 Expanded Coil Inserts
Expanded Coil Inserts are fabricated in two, four or six strut versions, as required. A standard coil is welded at one end of the strut wires and on the opposite end, an expanded pitch coil is welded. The expanded pitch coil welded to the more deeply embedded end of the insert, serves to distribute the applied loads over a larger volume of concrete. Ethafoam Plug installed when mounting washers are ordered. M inimum spacing between inserts is twice the minimum corner distance. Longer lengths available, if required.
C
Expanded Pitch Coil A
F-56 Expanded Coil Insert for Coil Threaded Bolts

(4) finish.
Example: 200, F-60 Expanded Coil Inserts, 1-1/2"

diameter, plain finish.
Expanded Coil Insert Selection Chart

Lifting/Handling Inserts and Accessories 95 Insert Type F-56 Coil Bolt Diameter Insert Length Minimum Edge Distance 2-1/2" 4" 8" 14" 2-1/2" 4" 8" 16" 3" 5" 8" 18" 3" 5" 8" 22" Minimum Safe Safe Corner Working Load Working Load Distance Tension Shear 6" 1,800 lbs. 680 lbs. 8" 2,220 lbs. 1,380 lbs. 12" 4,250 lbs. 2,760 lbs. 20" 4,250 lbs. 4,250 lbs. 7" 2,000 lbs. 740 lbs. 9" 2,560 lbs. 1,500 lbs. 12" 5,300 lbs. 3,250 lbs. 24" 6,250 lbs. 6,250 lbs. 10" 2,480 lbs. 1,270 lbs. 12" 3,600 lbs. 2,730 lbs. 15" 5,700 lbs. 4,790 lbs. 26" 10,480 lbs. 10,590 lbs. 12" 2,820 lbs. 1,500 lbs. 15" 3,880 lbs. 3,230 lbs. 15" 6,680 lbs. 6,260 lbs. 30" 14,580 lbs. 16,430 lbs. A B C
3/4"
4-1/2"
4-1/2"
0.375"
1-1/2"
F-56 Coil
1"
5-1/2"
5-1/2"
0.440"
2-1/2"
F-58 Coil
1-1/4"
7-1/2"
7-1/2"
0.440"
2-3/4"
F-60 Coil
1-1/2"
9-1/2"
9-1/2"
0.440"
3-5/8"
06/09

F-63 Flared Thin Slab Coil Insert
The Dayton Superior F-63 Flared Thin Slab Coil Insert is designed for use in very thin slabs or other conditions where a longer insert cannot be used. Inserts should be set back 1/2" from the surface of the concrete, maintaining at least 3/4" of concrete below the insert. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the minimum corner distance.
A B
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter, (4) height, (5) finish. 200, F-63 Flared Thin Slab Coil Inserts, 1" dia. x 4-1/2" plain finish.
F-63 Flared Thin Slab Coil Insert Selection Chart
Bolt Insert Diameter Height 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 1" 1" Lifting/Handling Inserts and Accessories 1-3/4" 2-5/16" 3-1/2" 2-5/16" 4-1/2" Minimum Edge Distance 6" 8" 9" 8" 12" Minimum Safe Safe Corner Working Load Working Load Distance Tension Shear 6" 8" 9" 8" 12" 1,520 lbs. 2,170 lbs. 3,570 lbs. 2,460 lbs. 5,280 lbs. 1,090 lbs. 1,640 lbs. 2,600 lbs. 1,970 lbs. 4,000 lbs. A 1-3/4" 2-5/16" 3-1/2" 2-5/16" 4-1/2" B 4-1/8" 4-7/8" 4-7/8" 5-1/4" 5-1/4" C 0.223" 0.306" 0.306" 0.306" 0.306"
F-63 Flared Thin Slab Coil Insert
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. Note: Dayton Superior does not recommend the use of 1/2" diameter bolts for lifting/handling of precast panels.
The Dayton Superior F-65 Type L Coil Insert is designed for use in lifting and handling lightweight precast concrete elements. Inserts should be set back 1/2" from the surface of the concrete. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the minimum corner distance.
B
F-65 Type L Coil Insert
To Order:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter, (4) finish. 200, F-65, Type L Coil Inserts, 1/2" diameter, plain finish.
A
Example:
F-65 Type L Coil Insert

F-65 Type L Coil Insert Selection Chart
Bolt Diameter 1/2" Insert Length 4" Minimum Edge Distance 2-1/2" 5" 8" 2-1/2" 5" 8" Minimum Safe Safe Corner Working Load Working Load Distance Tension Shear 10" 1,150 lbs. 530 lbs. 10" 2,250 lbs. 1,230 lbs. 12" 2,250 lbs. 1,980 lbs. 10" 1,140 lbs. 600 lbs. 10" 2,630 lbs. 1,400 lbs. 12" 3,520 lbs. 2,250 lbs. A B C
4"
2-3/8"
0.223"
3/4"
4"
4"
3-3/8"
0.306"
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. Note: Dayton Superior does not recommend the use of 1/2" diameter bolts for lifting/handling of precast panels. Note: Chart based on Face Lift usage of inserts. 96 06/09

T-1 Single Pickup Insert
Dayton Superior T-1 Single Pickup Inserts are available with plastic or stainless steel tips and with or without T-21 Insert Locator Plugs installed. T-1 inserts are designed for use with T-12 or T-26 Swivel Lifting Plates. Do not use T-1 inserts as an edge or end pick-up insert. Height of insert is 3/8" less than the panels structural thickness. Standard panel thickness is shown in the chart and other panel thickness is available on special order. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the minimum corner distance. T-1 Single Pick-up Insert Selection Chart
Panel Bolt Diameter Thickness 4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 4" 5" 6" 7" 8" Minimum Edge Distance 9" 11" 12" 14" 16" 10" 12" 13" 14" 16" 10" 12" 14" 15" 15" 12" 14" 14" 15" 16" Minimum Safe Safe Corner Working Load Working Load Distance Tension Shear 9" 2,360 lbs. 2,360 lbs. 16" 3,540 lbs. 3,540 lbs. 18" 4,880 lbs. 4,880 lbs. 21" 6,350 lbs. 6,350 lbs. 24" 7,950 lbs. 7,950 lbs. 10" 2,450 lbs. 2,450 lbs. 12" 3,650 lbs. 3,650 lbs. 16" 5,000 lbs. 5,000 lbs. 21" 6,480 lbs. 6,480 lbs. 24" 8,080 lbs. 8,080 lbs. 10" 2,540 lbs. 2,540 lbs. 14" 3,750 lbs. 3,750 lbs. 15" 5,110 lbs. 5,110 lbs. 18" 6,610 lbs. 6,610 lbs. 24" 8,200 lbs. 8,200 lbs. 12" 2,640 lbs. 2,640 lbs. 14" 3,860 lbs. 3,860 lbs. 16" 5,230 lbs. 5,230 lbs. 21" 6,740 lbs. 6,740 lbs. 24" 8,200 lbs. 8,200 lbs.
3/4"
1"
1-1/2"
T-1 Single Pickup Insert To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) diameter, (4) panel structural thickness, (5) type of tips.
Example: 200, T-1 Single Pickup Inserts,
3/4" dia., 5" panel structural thickness, plastic tipped feet.
06/09
97
1-1/4"

T-3 and T-3-A End Pickup Inserts
.375" Diameter Loop for Tension .375" Diameter Loop for Tension
12" .375" Diameter Shear Bar
12"
.375" Diameter Shear Bar
12" 5-1/2" 23" 11-1/2"
5-3/4"
T-3 End Pickup Insert
T-3-A End Pickup Insert
T-3 and T-3-A End Pickup Insert Selection Chart

Insert Type
Bolt Diameter 3/4" Single 1" Single 3/4" Double 1" Double
Load Condition Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear
4" Panel 1,500 lbs. 1,250 lbs. 2,500 lbs. 1,500 lbs.
5" Panel
5-1/2" Panel
6" Panel
6-1/2" Panel
7" Panel
7-1/2" Panel
8" Panel
T-3-A T-3-A T-3 T-3
Safe working load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete.
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) diameter. 120, T-3 End Pickup Inserts, 1" diameter.
98
06/09

T-7-S and T-7-ST Slotted Setting Studs
The Dayton Superior T-7-S Slotted Setting Stud has a slot to facilitate installation and removal. The T-7-ST stud has a slot and is drilled 1" deep Length Length and tapped with 1/4"-20 threads to allow the stud to be used as an insert setting plug. U sed with standard coil threaded inserts to provide void for B-14 coil bolts. Made from continuous threaded steel rod. T-7-S T-7-ST Top is cut off square so screed can pass over. T hreads and slot should be coated with non-staining lubricant to prevent bonding. To Order: L oosen studs within 2 to12 hours after concrete Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) diameter. placement to ease removal when ready to lift. Example: S tandard steel sizes are 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4" 200, T-7-S Slotted Setting Studs, 1" diameter. and 1-1/2" diameter x 4" long. Other lengths available on request.
The Dayton Superior Plastic Setting Bolt is used to attach 1/2", 3/4" and 1" diameter coil inserts to wood frames. The head of the setting bolt has nail holes allowing easy attachment of the bolt. The plastic setting bolt positions the insert 3/4" from concrete surface.
P-25 Plastic Setting Bolt
Length Thread
Part # 100210 100220 100230
Bolt Diameter 1/2" 3/4" 1"
Length Thread 2" 3-1/4" 4-3/4"
To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) diameter. Example: 200, P-25 Plastic Setting Bolt, 1" diameter.
T-8 Lifting Angle

Designed for use with T-2 Double Pickup Inserts. M ay be use for face lifting inserts and edge lifting inserts
when panel thickness exceeds 6". Cut washers are required under head of all bolts. Made from structural steel angle in the sizes shown below. Safe Working Load is 18,000 lbs.
T-8 Lifting Angle
12" D
B A C
Bolt Diameter 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2"
A 18" 21"
B 12" 15"
C 6" 6"
D 4" 6"
E 5/8" 3/4"
Clevis Hole 1-3/4" dia. 1-1/2" dia.
To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter. Example: 10, T-8 Lifting Angles, 1-1/4" bolt diameter.
06/09
99

T-10 and T-11 End Pickup Inserts
0.440" Insert Length B B 12" 6" 12" 24" 6"
1/2"
0.440"
A 1/2" 0.440" 0.440" A
T-10 Single End Pickup Insert To Order: Example:

T-11 Double End Pickup Insert
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) length, (4) struts. 200, T-11 Single End Pickup Inserts, 1" dia. x 9" height, 4 struts.
T-10 or T-11 End Pickup Insert Selection Chart

Insert Type T-10 T-10 T-10 T-10 T-10 T-11 T-11 T-11 T-11 T-11 Bolt Diameter 1" 1-1/4" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1-1/4" 1" 1" 1" No. of Struts Wires 2 2 4 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 Insert Length 9" 10" 9" 12" 15" 9" 10" 9" 12" 15" Minimum Corner Distance 11" 9" 11" 14" 18" 15" 15" 15" 19" 19" Safe Working Load Tension 3,660 lbs 3,870 lbs 3,660 lbs 5,540 lbs 7890 lbs 7,250 lbs 6,190 lbs 8,730 lbs 11,640 lbs 12,390 lbs Safe Working Load Shear 1,300 lbs 1,520 lbs 1,680 lbs 2,740 lbs 3,950 lbs 2,450 lbs 2,740 lbs 3,180 lbs 4,570 lbs 6,070 lbs Minimum Panel Thickness 9" 10" 9" 12" 15" 9" 10" 9" 12" 15" A 9" 10" 9" 12" 15" 9" 10" 9" 12" 15" B 3-1/16" 3-5/16" 3-1/16" 3-1/16" 3-1/16" 3-1/16"" 3-5/16" 3-1/16" 3-1/16" 3-1/16"
Safe working load provides a factor of safety of approximately 4 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. Safe working load based on 0 setback from face of concrete.
100
06/09

Proper Installation of T-3 and T-11 End Pickup Inserts
When using end pickup inserts, a 1/2" thick wood washer, length of plastic pipe or cut washers must be used against the ends of the loops. This is necessary so that when the lifting plate is tightened down, it will bear against the concrete and not against the loop ends. This procedure is necessary to develop the safe working load of the end pickup inserts. End pickup inserts must be located in the center of the panel structural thickness to obtain their safe working load.
Form cavity for lifting bolt with Insert Locator Plug or Cut Washers or 1/2" Thick Wood Washer 15" Minimum Edge Distance L/2 P L/2
Coil Bolt Casting Surface
Cen Stru ter Line ctur al Thof ickn
ess
Note: Shear Bar must be on top of coils for T-3 or T-3-A inserts.
To achieve Safe Working Load,Lifting Plate must be centered on T-3 or T-11 Insert
How To Determine Bolt Length

Minimum Coil Penetration and Void
Minimum Coil Penetration Insert Setback Form Lumber T-27 Lifting Plate Void Required Bolt Length Insert Setback
Plate Thickness
Setting Bolt
Setting Bolt for Edge Inserts Form Lumber Insert Setback Minimum Coil Penetration Minimum Void Total Bolt Length 1-1/2" 1/2" 2-1/2" 1/2" 5" Lifting Bolt for Edge Inserts T-27 Plate Thickness Insert Setback Minimum Coil Penatration Total Bolt Length 1" 1/2" 2-1/2" 4"
Lifting Bolt
Note: Face insert lifting bolt lengths are calculated in a similar manner to that shown above.
Safety Notes Coils must be perpendicular to the slab edge to

achieve safe working loads shown. Inserts must be set back 1/2" from the concrete shown above. surface in order to achieve safe working loads shown.
Coil bolt penetration must agree with minimums

101
06/09
Always check to make certain that you have the proper clearance under the coil to prevent the lifting bolt from bottoming out against the concrete. You must be able to tighten the bolt securely to prevent the lifting hardware from slipping and applying unexpected loads to the insert.

T-12 Swivel Lifting Plate
Designed for use with single pickup inserts. Can be used for face lifting or edge lifting. Complete unit made of forged steel.
Safety Notes

T-12 Swivel Lifting Plate
5" 1-3/8"
All plates must have full bearing on flat,
smooth surfaces. Lifting plates must be used with a bolted fastener of sufficient strength to develop the required loads. Lifting plates are to be used only with the bolt diameter for which they were designed. For example, use a 3/4" bolt with a 3/4" T-12 Swivel Lifting Plate, do not use a 3/4" bolt with a 1", 1-1/4" or 1-1/2" T-12 Swivel Lifting Plate. All Plates must be securely fastened to slabs. For exposed aggregate panels, a grout pad is required to provide bearing for the plate. Coil bolt penetration must agree with minimums.
Type T-12
Bolt Diameter 3/4" 1"
Safe Working Load 7,200 lbs. 10,000 lbs.
Bearing Plate Size 1/2 x 2-1/2" x 5"
To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter. Example: 10, T-12 Swivel Lifting Plates, 1" bolt diameter.
T-21 Insert Locator Plugs

The Dayton Superior T-21 Insert Locator Plug is a two piece plastic unit designed to engage the top and bottom of 3/4", 1", 1-1/4" and 1-1/2" diameter insert coils. The top piece has a protruding stem that marks the insert location. Plug removal is easily accomplished with a screw driver or similar device. The bottom portion of the plug forms a cavity for final bolt clearance. T-21 plugs are available factory installed in the inserts or loose for field installation.
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter. 10, T-21 Insert Locator Plug, 1-1/4" bolt diameter.
3/4" diameter only 1", 1-1/4", and 1-1/2" diameters
T-21 Insert Locator Plugs
T-26 Double Swivel Lifting Plate

D esigned for use with 1", 1-1/4" and 1-1/2" diameter coil bolts. R otates 360 in horizontal plane and 180 in vertical plane. R ound bearing plate provides maximum safety
H
when used with any coil bolt lifting system. Heavy forged bail is made of high-strength material. D ouble swivel action allows bail to rotate in direction of applied load Safe Working Load is 9,000 lbs. for 1" diameter. S afe Working Load is 13,500 lbs. for 1-1/4" and 1-1/2" diameter.
Type Bolt Diameter H D Safe Working Load
T-26 Double Swivel Lifting Plate
To Order: Example:
T-26 T-26 T-26

102 102
1" 1 - 1/4" 1 - 1/2"
2 - 11/16" 2 - 3/4" 2 - 3/4"
5" 7" 7"
9,000 13,500 13,500
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter. 10, T-26 Double Swivel Lifting Plate, 1-1/4" bolt diameter.
12/06 06/09

T-27 Edge Lifting Plate
Designed for use with T-3 or T-11 pickup inserts. Made from structural steel plate 1" x 4" x 18" long. Cut washers are required under head of all bolts. For use with 3/4" or 1" diameter bolts. For use on panels up to 6" thick; on panels
thicker than 6", use T-8. Safe Working Load is 8,800 lbs.
Warning: Never use T-27 with face lift inserts.
T-27 Edge Lifting Plate
5 1/2"
1" Thick
12" 18"
4"
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter. 10, T-27 Edge Lifting Plate, 1" bolt diameter.
Dos and Donts

Do not modify, weld or alter, in any way, lifting hardware units. P rior to lifting any precast element, apply an initial cable tension making certain that the bail or clevis attachment plate is aligned in the direction of the load at all times. Crane line loads must not be allowed to apply a sideward load to the bail or clevis attachment plate, as this condition is dangerous and could lead to a premature failure.
Lifting/Handling Inserts and Accessories 103
T-8 Lifting or T-27 Edge Lifting Plate

Load Load
Clevis Attachment Plate
Clevis Attachment Plate
Right T-12, T-12-H Swivel or T-26 Double Swivel Lifting Plates

Load
Wrong
Load
Bail
Bail
Right Total System and Safe Working Loads
Wrong
The user must be aware of the capacity of the total lifting system since the determination of the safe working load involves concrete strength and safe working loads of the insert, bolt and lifting hardware. All must be evaluated with the lowest safe load component determining the safe working load of the system. This handbook has such values listed in tabular form for all components, including the minimum concrete compressive strengths that must exist at time of use. Therefore, do not assume that an inserts safe working load is that of the system, since the Safe Working Loads of the bolt or lifting hardware may be less than that of the insert. Examine the values of all components.
Danger! Crane line loads and bails of swivel and double swivel lifting plates must be turned in direction of crane forces before lifting operations begin. Crane line loads must not be allowed to apply sideward loads to bails of Swivel Lifting Plates or Clevis Attachment Plates of Lifting Angle or Lifting Plate; this condition is dangerous and could lead to failure of hardware. 06/09
104
Notes and Sketches
06/09
NC Threaded Inserts
For Suspending, Connecting and Anchoring to Concrete
F-5 Threaded Insert

The Dayton Superior F-5 Threaded Inserts have National Course (NC) threads and are recommended for use under permanent loading conditions. This insert has been approved by the Board of Standards and Appeals for use in New York City under Calendar No. 447-60SM. The F-5 insert is cast from ductile iron that meets ASTM A-395, Grade 60-40-18.
C
F-5 Threaded Insert
To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter. Example: 200, F-5 Threaded Inserts, 3/4" bolt diameter.
F-5 Threaded Insert Selection Chart

Bolt Diameter and Threads per Inch 1/2" 13 5/8" 11 3/4" 10 7/8" 9 1" 8 Tension Safe Bolt Working Load Engagement 1,500 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,500 lbs. 3,000 lbs. 3,000 lbs. 15/16" 3/4" 7/8" 1-5/16" 1-5/16" A 1-5/8" 1-5/8" 1-13/16" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" B 2-1/2" 3" 3" 3-3/8" 3-3/8" C 1-5/8" 1-5/8" 1-7/8" 2-5/8" 2-5/8"
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 when the insert is properly embedded in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete.
F-42 Loop Ferrule Insert

The Dayton Superior F-42 Loop Ferrule Insert is fabricated by welding a looped strut to a closed-end ferrule. F-42 insert is available in the sizes shown in the chart below and is well suited for structural connections and the suspension of equipment, piping, etc.
Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the minimum corner distance.
A B Maximum Bolt Engagement
200, F-42 Loop Ferrule Inserts, 3/4" bolt diameter.
F-42 Loop Ferrule Insert

F-42 Loop Ferrule Insert Selection Chart
Safe Bolt Diameter Minimum Minimum and Threads Edge Corner Working Load Tension per Inch Distance Distance 1/4" 20 NC 3/8" 16 NC 1/2" 13 NC 5/8" 11 NC 3/4" 10 NC 7/8" 9 NC 1" 8 NC 5" 5" 10" 5" 7" 5" 8" 5" 8" 8" 10" 8" 10" 5" 5" 15" 5" 10" 7" 8" 7" 8" 8" 15" 8" 15" 650 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 5,300 lbs. 5,300 lbs. 5,300 lbs. 5,300 lbs. Safe Maximum Bolt Working Load Engagement Shear 650 lbs. 1,260 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 1,280 lbs. 2,000 lbs. 1,990 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 1,990 lbs. 2,200 lbs. 4,060 lbs. 5,300 lbs. 4,060 lbs. 5,300 lbs. 3/4" 3/4" 1" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" A 2-3/4" 2-3/4" 2-3/4" 3-1/2" 3-1/2" 6" 6" B 0.243" 0.243" 0.243" 0.258" 0.258" 0.375" 0.375"
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. Safe Working Loads are based on 1/2" setback from face of concrete. 06/09 105
To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter. Example:
1/8"
NC Threaded Inserts
The Dayton Superior F-43 Plain Ferrule (without loops) can be furnished for fabricating special inserts at the job site. Ferrules are manufactured from either 12L1K cold drawn carbon steel or Type 304 Stainless Steel. Contact your local Stainless Steel welding service for proper welding techniques and instructions on welding either Identification Maximum of these materials. Knurl A Bolt When ferrules are produced from Type 304 stainless steel, they will have a knurled rib, as shown. Ferrules that do not have any knurling are produced from 12L1K steel. Minimum bolt engagement for ferrule inserts shall be equal to B the nominal bolt diameter plus 1/8". The use of shorter bolt F-43 Plain Ferrule engagements will result in a lower than expected load carrying capacity. All of the ferrules and ferrule inserts listed in this handbook are F-43 Plain Ferrule Selection Chart tapped with National Course (NC) threads. Dayton Superior can Bolt Diameter Maximum furnish, on special order, ferrules that are tapped with metric A B and Threads Bolt threads. per Inch Engagement
Note: All ferrules are made with a knock-out area in the closed bottom. When knocked out, the hole will accept a #8-32 self tapping screw that is used to attach ferrule inserts to the form face.
1/4" 20 NC 3/8" 16 NC 1/2" 13 NC 5/8" 11 NC 3/4" 10 NC 7/8" 9 NC 1" 8 NC 1-1/4" 7 NC 1-1/2" 6 NC 3/4" 3/4" 1" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-3/4" 2-1/4" 1-1/4" 1-1/4" 1-3/8" 1-5/8" 1-5/8" 1-5/8" 1-5/8" 2-1/2" 3" 9/16" 9/16" 11/16" 7/8" 1" 1-1/4" 1-3/8" 1-5/8" 1-7/8"
F-43 Plain Ferrule
To Order: Specify: 1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter, (4) finish. Example: 2,000 pcs., F-43 Plain Ferrules, 3/8" bolt diameter, type 304 SS.
Special Ferrule Application

Many precasters have found that a 3/4"-10 NC threaded ferrule, when used as a nut in a special shop built insert, will solve many of their connection problems. The safe working loads of the ferrule (nut) when it is subjected to various bolt engagements are listed for your use. Note: As the Ferrule SWL's listed are based on compression loading conditions, do not attempt to use these safe working loads with regular ferrule inserts.
Nominal Bolt Diameter and Threads per Inch 3/4" - 10 3/4" - 10 3/4" - 10 3/4" - 10
Minimum Bolt Engagement 1/4" 7 mm 3/8" 10 mm 1/2" 13 mm 3/4" 19 mm
Maximum Safe working Load 5,500 lbs. 24.4 kN 7,200 lbs. 32.0 kN 8,700 lbs. 38.6 kN 10,300 lbs. 45.8 kN
The SWL's provide approxiamately a 3 to 1 factor of safety against thread stripping.
The SWL's listed in the chart assume that the special precaster built insert has the capacity to safely support at least 3 times the ferrules safe working load.
106
06/09
NC Threaded Inserts
The Dayton Superior F-44 Thin Slab Ferrule Insert is a specially designed insert for use where the depth of embedment is extremely limited and where there is a requirement for limited capacity in both tension and shear. Depending on region, the F-44 will be furnished with either two struts welded to the bottom of the ferrule or one strut looped around the ferrule (see sketch). Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the minimum corner distance.
F-44 Thin Slab Ferrule Insert

B A
F-44 Thin Slab Ferrule Insert Selection Chart

Bolt Diameter and Threads Per Inch Safe Working Load Tension 450 lbs. 450 lbs. 900 lbs. 1,000 lbs. 1,600 lbs. 1,600 lbs. 1,600 lbs. Maximum Bolt Engagement 3/4" 3/4" 1" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" Dimensions A 1-1/4" 1-1/4" 1-3/8" 1-5/8" 1-5/8" 1-5/8" 1-5/8" B 9/16" 11/16" 13/16" 1-1/16" 1-1/16" 1-1/16" 1-1/16"
0.262"
1/4" 20 NC 3/8" 16 NC
4"
1/2" 13 NC 5/8" 11 NC
A
3/4" 10 NC 7/8" 9 NC 1" 8 NC
0.262" 4"
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter, (4) finish. Example: 200, F-44 Thin Slab Ferrule Inserts, 1/2" bolt diameter, plain finish.
F-45 Cap Plug

The Dayton Superior F-45 Cap Plug is the least expensive device available for positioning NCthreaded inserts. The Cap Plug is easily nailed to a wood form. Push an NC Threaded insert onto the plastic cap for a press fit. If care is taken in the placement of concrete and in the use of vibrators, the F-45 Plastic Plug is a satisfactory mounting device. Available for use with 3/8", 1/2", 5/8", 3/4", 1" and 1-1/4" National Course (NC) threaded inserts.
F-45 Cap Plug To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) size.
Example: 200, F-45 Cap Plugs, 1/2" diameter.
06/09
107
NC Threaded Inserts
F-50 Rocket/Kohler Ferrule Insert

The Dayton Superior F-50 Rocket Kohler Ferrule Insert is a two-strut ferrule insert with an extended length ferrule and integral washer face. The F-50 insert is available in diameters from 1/4" through 1-1/4" and is well suited for structural connections or supporting hung ceilings, equipment, piping, etc.
Length
A B
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter, (4) finish.
Example: 200, F-50 Rocket/Kohler Ferrule Insert, 1/2"

bolt diameter, plain finish.
F-50 Rocket/Kohler Ferrule Insert
F-50 Rocket/Kohler Ferrule Insert Selection Chart Bolt Diameter Safe Safe Insert Minimum Minimum and Threads Corner Working Load Working Load Length Edge Per Inch Distance Distance Tension Shear
1/4" 20 NC 3/8" 16 NC 1/2" 13 NC 5/8" 11 NC 3/4" 10 NC 7/8" 9 NC 1" 8 NC
A
1-3/4" 1-3/4" 2-1/4" 3-3/8" 3-3/8" 3-3/4" 3-3/4" 4-1/4" 4-1/4"
B
0.223" 0.223" 0.223" 0.306" 0.306" 0.375" 0.375" 0.375" 0.375"
Maximum Bolt Engagement

1-1/4" 1-1/4" 1-3/4" 2-3/4" 2-3/4" 3-1/8" 3-1/8" 3-5/8" 3-5/8"
1-3/4" 1-3/4" 2-1/4" 3-3/8" 3-3/8" 3-3/4" 3-3/4" 4-1/4" 4-1/4"
4" 4" 6" 6" 6" 7" 7" 8" 8"
6" 6" 9" 11" 11" 12" 12" 14" 14"
750 lbs. 1,050 lbs. 1,575 lbs. 3,000 lbs. 3,000 lbs. 3,800 lbs. 3,800 lbs. 4,350 lbs. 4,350 lbs.
750 lbs. 1,350 lbs. 1,075 lbs. 3,000 lbs. 3,000 lbs. 3,800 lbs. 3,800 lbs. 4,350 lbs. 4,350 lbs.
1-1/8" 7 NC 1-1/4" 7 NC

The Dayton Superior F-52 Thin Slab Ferrule Insert is fabricated with four L-shaped struts resistance-welded to an NC thread ferrule. The F-52 insert is available in 3/4" and 1" bolt diameters and in any height. Maximum insert safe working load is developed at an insert height of 5-1/2"
1/8"
To Order: Example:
A D 15 B C B
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter, (4) insert height, (5) finish. 200, F-52 Thin Slab Ferrule Insert, 1" bolt diameter, 5-1/2" height, plain finish.
F-52 Thin Slab Ferrule Insert Selection Chart
Bolt Diameter and Threads per Inch 3/4" 10 NC 1" 8 NC Insert Length 3-1/8" 4-1/8" Minimum Edge Distance 8" 12" Minimum Corner Distance 12" 18" Safe Working Load Tension 3,680 lbs. 5,300 lbs. Safe Working Load Shear 3,200 lbs. 5,300 lbs. A 3-1/8" 4-1/8" B 3" 4"

Maximum Bolt Engagement 1-1/8" 1-1/8"
C 7" 9-3/8"
D 0.306" 0.306"
Safe Working Loads provide a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. 108 06/09
NC Threaded Inserts
F-54 Ductile Embed Insert

The Dayton Superior F-54 Ductile Embed Insert is a one-piece, integrally hot forged unit fabricated out of smooth, round steel meeting ASTM A-29 Hot Rolled Grade 1045 requirements. Insert top has a round washer face with four nail holes. The user can nail or bolt the insert to side forms or wet set in face of panel as required. The bottom end has a forged, washer-face hex foot to resist pullout from the concrete. Use as a cast-in-place insert or in a core and grout insert application. Several inserts can be laced and/or templated together to provide preset anchorage patterns for closely-spaced multiple insert requirements. Longer insert lengths are available when required. Minimum spacing between the inserts, shown in the chart, is twice the minimum corner distance. Available plain, electro-galvanized, hot-dipped galvanized or epoxy coated as required.
Length Shaft Dia. A
F-54 Ductile Embed Insert

Nail Running Nut
Setting Bolt
Form
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) shaft diameter, (4) overall length. 550, F-54 Ductile Embed Insert, 3/4" x 9" long.
Structural Connectors 109
F-54 Ductile Embed Insert Selection Chart

Bolt Diameter Shaft Insert and Threads Diameter Length per Inch 5/8" 11 NC 3/4" 10 NC 7/8" 9 NC 1" 8 NC 1-1/4" 7 NC 3/4" 7/8" 1" 1-1/8" 1-3/8" 7-1/2" 9" 10-1/2" 12" 15" Safe Working Load Tension 6,700 lbs. 9,030 lbs. 8,800 lbs. 13,360 lbs. 11,150 lbs. 18,350 lbs. 13,790 lbs. 22,980 lbs. 19,960 lbs. 33,150 lbs. Safe Minimum Minimum Flange Maximum Bolt Working Load Edge Corner Diameter Engagement Shear Distance Distance A 4,310 lbs. 5,420 lbs. 5,890 lbs. 8,020 lbs. 8,050 lbs. 11,090 lbs. 10,160 lbs. 14,540 lbs. 15,570 lbs. 20,340 lbs. 7-1/2" 10" 9" 14" 10-1/2" 16" 12" 18" 15" 24" 15" 18" 18" 20" 18" 24" 24" 30" 30" 36" 2" 2-1/4" 2-3/8" 2-1/2" 3-1/4" 15/16" 1-1/8" 1-5/16" 1-1/2" 1-7/8"
Safe Working Loads provide a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. Safe Working Loads are based on 1/2" setback from the face of concrete. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the corner distance. Note: Bolt diameter is 1/8" less shaft diameter all products.
06/09
NC Threaded Inserts
F-57 Expanded Coil Ferrule Insert F-59 Expanded Coil Ferrule Insert F-61 Expanded Coil Ferrule Insert
The Dayton Superior Expanded Coil Ferrule Inserts were developed as a more effective means for increasing the inserts tensile capacity, without increasing its depth of embedment. By increasing the width of the base, the volume of the resisting shear cone is significantly increased. The expanded pitch coils welded to the more deeply embedded end of the insert serve to distribute the applied loads over a larger volume of concrete. Available in longer lengths, as required. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the corner spacing.
F-57 Insert 2 Struts F-59 Insert 4 Struts F-61 Insert 6 Struts
Expanded Coil Ferrule Loop Insert Selection Chart

Insert Type Bolt Diameter Insert and Threads Length per Inch 3/4" 10 NC 1" 8 NC 1-1/4" 7 NC 1-1/2" 6 NC 4-5/8" 5-5/8" 7-5/8" 9-5/8" Minimum Edge Distance 6" 14" 8" 16" 10" 18" 12" 22" Minimum Corner Distance 9" 20" 12" 24" 15" 26" 18" 30" Safe Working Load Tension 4,650 lbs. 5,890 lbs. 6,990 lbs. 8,100 lbs. 9,920 lbs. 13,310 lbs. 13,180 lbs. 18,680 lbs. Safe Working Load Shear 2,730 lbs. 5,890 lbs. 4,300 lbs. 8,100 lbs. 7,940 lbs. 13,310 lbs. 12,450 lbs. 18,680 lbs. A B C D Maximum Bolt Engagement 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-3/4" 2-1/4"
F-57 F-57 F-59 F-61
4-5/8" 5-5/8" 7-5/8" 9-5/8"
2-1/8" 2-3/4" 3" 3-3/8"
1-1/2" 2-1/4" 2-3/4" 3-5/8"
0.375" 0.440" 0.440" 0.440"
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. Safe Working Loads are based on insert 1/2" setback from the face of concrete. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the corner.
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter, (4) finish. 200, F-61 Expanded Coil Ferrule Inserts, 1-1/2" dia., plain finish.
110
06/09
NC Threaded Inserts
F-62 Flared Thin Slab Ferrule Insert

The F-62 Flared Thin Slab Ferrule Insert was designed for use in thin precast concrete elements or for conditions where a longer insert cannot be used. This insert is closed at the back end of the ferrule to keep concrete from getting into the threads. The ferrule will accept only NC threaded bolts of appropriate diameters.
1/8"
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt dia., (4) insert height, (5) finish.
A D C B
1,000 pcs., F-62 Flared Thin Slab Ferrule Insert, 1" bolt x 2-7/16" high, plain finish.
F-62 Flared Thin Slab Ferrule Insert
F-62 Flared Thin Slab Ferrule Insert Selection Chart

Bolt Diameter and Threads per Inch 1/2" 13 NC 5/8" 11 NC 3/4" 10 NC 3/4" 10 NC 1" 8 NC 1" 8 NC Insert Height (A) 1-7/8" 2-7/16" 2-7/16" 3-5/8" 2-7/16" 4-5/8" Minimum Edge Distance 6" 7" 6" 9" 6" 11" Minimum Corner Distance 9" 10" 9" 14" 9" 16" Safe Working Load Tension 2,120 lbs. 2,900 lbs. 2,960 lbs. 4,830 lbs. 3,080 lbs. 6,780 lbs. Safe Working Load Shear 2,120 lbs. 2,900 lbs. 2,960 lbs. 4,830 lbs. B 2" 2-" 2" 2" C 4-3/4" 4-3/4" 4-7/8" 4-7/8" D 0.223" 0.306" 0.306" 0.306" 0.306" 0.306" Maximum Bolt Engagement 1" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-1/8"
3,080 lbs. 2-3/16" 5-1/8" 6,780 lbs. 2-3/16" 5-1/8"
06/09
111
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. Safe Working Loads are based on 1/2" setback from face of concrete. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the corner spacing.
NC Threaded Inserts
F-64 Ferrule Loop Insert

The Dayton Superior F-64 Ferrule Loop Insert is manufactured by welding a wire loop to a steel ferrule which has been machined from bar stock. One end of the ferrule is closed, while the other end is drilled and tapped to accept an NC threaded bolt. Typically, this insert is used to attach a precast wall panel to a building frame, as well as provide attachment of other structural elements that may be required.
B
1/8"
Mounting Washer Option for all Ferrule Type Inserts

All ferrule type inserts are available with a 16 gauge x 2" x 2" mounting washer as an option. The mounting washer allows you to nail a ferrule type insert to the form. To keep concrete from entering the threaded portion of an insert with mounting washer, cover the open face of the washer with duct tape.
F-64 Ferrule Loop Insert
Insert with Optional Mounting Washer.
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. Safe Working Loads are based on 1/2" setback from the face of the concrete. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the minimum corner distance.
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter, (4) insert length, (5) finish. 200, F-64 Ferrule Loop Insert, 5/8" bolt diameter, 6-1/8" insert length, plain finish.
112 06/09
NC Threaded Inserts
F-72 Threaded Setting Plug

The Dayton Superior F-72 Threaded Setting Plugs eliminate the need for putting large holes in formwork in order to secure the inserts to the forms. Basically a socket set screw, it is drilled through and tapped with #8-32 thread. It can be nailed to wood forms, or bolted to steel forms using an #8-32 threaded bolt. The reusable plugs are easily removed using a standard hex wrench.
W Nail or #8-#32 Screw
Diameter
Tapped Internally with #8-32 Thread
F-72 Threaded Setting Plug

F-72 Selection Chart
Bolt Diameter and Threads per Inch Dimensions L 3/8" 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 1" W 3/16" 1/4" 5/16" 3/8" 9/16"
To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) diameter. Example: 200, F-72 Threaded Setting Plugs, 3/4" diameter.
3/8" 16 NC 1/2" 13 NC 5/8" 11 NC 3/4" 10 NC 1" 8 NC
F-74 Threaded Plastic Plug

The Dayton Superior F-74 Threaded Plastic Plug is manufactured with National Course (NC) threads to fit 3/8", 1/2", 5/8", 3/4", 7/8" and 1" NC threaded inserts. A hole is provided through the plug that may be used to attach (nail) the plug to the form.
F-74 Threaded Plastic Plug To Order: Example:

Specify: 1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bolt diameter. 200, F-74 Threaded Plastic Plugs, 3/4" diameter.
06/09
NC Threaded Inserts
The Dayton Superior P-86 Star Inserts are precision die-cast of zinc alloy and have excellent resistance to atmospheric conditions. These inserts are particularly suited for use in precast concrete elements and can be quickly secured to the form with an appropriately sized NCbolt. The Star Insert can also be nailed to the form utilizing the P-87 Star Adapter Plug. P-86 Star Inserts are excellent inserts for securing machinery and equipment, for suspending piping and supporting railing/poles. Two different types of inserts are available: S tandard Insert has a closed bottom to prevent concrete from entering the insert. O pen Bottom Threads run the full depth of the insert.
P-86 Star Insert
P-86 Star Insert To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) insert style. Example: 200, P-86 Star Inserts, P45T.
P-86 Star Insert Selection Chart Insert Style

P10T P15T P24T P25T Structural Connectors P35T P36T P45T P46T P55T P56T
P-87
Insert Type
Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
Bolt Insert Diameter and Threads Length A per Inch

10 24 NC 1/4" 20 NC 3/8" 16 NC 3/8" 16 NC 1/2" 13 NC 1/2" 13 NC 5/8" 11 NC 3/4" 10 NC 11/16" 1-1/2" 1" 1-3/8" 1-1/2" 2-7/8" 2-7/8" 3" 1-3/8" 1-1/2"
Bolt Torque
10 in. lbs. 32 in. lbs.
Safe Working Load Tension

235 lbs.
B
7/16"
P-86 Nail or Screw
Wood Form
750 lbs. 13/16" 7/8" 7/8"
100 in. lbs. 1,125 lbs. 100 in. lbs. 1,300 lbs.
19 ft. lbs. 1,500 lbs. 1-1/4" 19 ft. lbs. 3,600 lbs. 1-3/8" 40 ft. lbs. 1,900 lbs. 1-3/8" 40 ft. lbs. 4,625 lbs. 1-9/16" 56 ft. lbs. 2,275 lbs. 1-9/16" 56 ft. lbs. 4,550 lbs. 1-3/4" 100 in. lbs. 1,300 lbs. 7/8" 19 ft. lbs. 1,500 lbs. 1-1/4"
P-86 Form Installation Using P-87 Adapter Plug
5/8" 11 NC 1-11/16" 3/4" 10 NC 1-11/16"
Steel Form
P25TOB Open Bottom 3/8" 16 NC P35TOB Open Bottom 1/2" 13 NC
P-86
Bolt
Safe working load provides an approximate factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 in 3,500 psi normal weight concrete.
P-86 Form Installation Using Bolt
114
06/09
NC Threaded Inserts
P-87 Star Adapter Plug

The Dayton Superior P-87 Star Adapter Plug is available in all Star Insert diameters. The P-87 plug is a setting plug for installing the insert into precast forms. Its use effectively seals the insert against concrete seepage. Before each use, coat the side of the plug as well as the threaded portion with a form release or water resistant grease. This will allow the plug to be easily removed from the concrete. The plug may be ordered with a 1/8"diameter smooth hole, for use in nailing to wood forms or a #8-32 threaded hole for attaching to steel forms.
A B
P-87 Star Adapter Plug

Nail #8-32 Wood Form
Typical Installations
Steel Form
To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) diameter. Example: 200, Star Adapter Plugs, 3/4" diameter.
P-87 Star Insert Adapter Plug Insert Designation P25A P35A P45A P55A Size 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 3/4" Product Code No. 9525003 9535003 9545004 9555003 A 3/4" 1" 1-1/8" 1-1/4"
C B
B 1/4" 1/4" 3/8" 3/8"
P-88 Star Holzin Insert
The Dayton Superior P-88 Star Holzin Insert is a 1/2" nominal diameter, die cast zinc alloy insert for corrosion-free precast concrete applications. Threads are set back 1" from open end of insert.
P-88 Star Holzin Insert

A
P-88 Star Holzin Insert Selection Chart Bolt Diameter and Threads Per Inch
1/2" 13 NC

550 lbs.
A
2-3/8"
B
1"
T Thread Depth
To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name. Example:

200, P-88 Star Holzin Inserts.
2-5/32" 1-1/8"
Product Code 2355003 Bolt Diameter Threads per Inch Insert Length A Length B Width C Outer Diameter D Thread Length T
Wood Form
1/2" - 13 NC 2=3/8" 7/8" 1-1/4" 11/16" 1-1/8" 2=5/32" 19 550 lbs.
Typical Installations
Closed End Closed End
Wood Form
Stronghold Nail
Total Depth L Torque (ft. lbs. Safe Working Load in 3,500 psi Concrete
Bolt
06/09
115
NC Threaded Inserts
P-90 Connecting Systems Nylon Threaded Inserts

Dayton Superior P-90 Connecting Systems Threaded Inserts are mineral-filled nylon inserts designed for attaching, suspending and fastening objects to precast concrete. They provide the precast manufacturer with an excellent, cost effective fastening system.
Advantages:
Economical Light weight Easy to handle and use Available in five bolt diameters Can be used in hundreds of applications
Typical Applications:
Lifting insert for light loads Secure handles of burial vaults Secure mechanical equipment to concrete pads Secure telephone booths to concrete pads Fasten cable holders to utility poles S ecure benches, picnic tables and other landscape items to concrete bases S uspend pipes, conduits and other utilities from concrete panels and ceilings Plus many, many others
Steel Form
P-90
Bolt
Steel Installation Using Bolt

P-90 Connecting Systems Threaded Insert Selection Chart Bolt Diameter and Threads per Inch
1/4" 20 NC 3/8" 16 NC 1/2" 13 NC 1/2" 13 NC 5/8" 11 NC 3/4" 10 NC
Insert Length (A)

1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1-5/8" 2-5/8" 3" 3-1/4"
B
1" 1" 1-3/8" 1-3/8" 1-1/2" 1-5/8"
C
3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 7/8" 1"

3" 3" 3-1/2" 5-1/2" 6" 6-1/2"

6" 6" 7" 11" 12" 13"

Safe Working Load Shear

Safe Working Loads provides a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 in 5,000 psi normal weight concrete. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the corner distance.
116
06/09
NC Threaded Inserts
D-108-A Headed Dowel Bar Insert

The Dayton Superior D-108-A Dowel Bar Insert is a one-piece unit integrally forged from material meeting ASTM A-615 Grade 60 requirements. This insert works extremely well in areas of heavy rebar congestion and provides excellent anchorage provisions for light standards, signs, posts, fixtures, etc. The D-108-A Headed Dowel Bar Insert is approved by the International Code Council, evaluation report ICC #4028. The top of the insert has a round washer face with four nail holes. Nail or bolt insert to side forms or wet set in face of panel as required. The bottom end has a hot-forged, washer face hex foot to resist pull-out from the concrete. Use this versatile insert as a cast-in-place insert or in a core and grout application. Lace and/or template several inserts together to provide repeat anchorage patterns of two, three, four or more inserts. Longer length inserts are available as required. Minimum spacing between the inserts shown in the chart is twice the minimum corner distance. Available plain, electro-galvanized, hot-dipped galvanized or epoxy coated as required.
A
Length
D-108-A Headed Dowel Bar Insert
To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) bar size,

(4) overall length, (5) finish.
Laced and Template Application Core and Grout Application
Example: 300, D-108-A Headed Dowel Bar Insert,

#5 x 7-1/2" long, plain finish.
D-108-A Headed Dowel Bar Insert Selection Chart Bolt Shaft Diameter and Threads Diameter per Inch
5/8" 11 NC 3/4" 10 NC 7/8" 9 NC 1" 8 NC #4 #5 #6 #7
Insert Length
7-1/2" 9" 10-1/2" 12"

6,000 lbs. 9,300 lbs. 13,200 lbs. 18,000 lbs.
Safe Working Load Shear

4,000 lbs. 6,200 lbs. 8,800 lbs. 12,000 lbs.

8" 11" 13" 16"

12" 15" 20" 24"
Flange Maximum Diameter Bolt A Engagement

1-7/8" 2" 2-1/4" 2-7/16" 7/8" 1" 1-1/8" 1-1/4"
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 in 3,000 psi normal weight concrete. Minimum spacing between inserts is twice the corner distance. Insert Length to bottom of bolt head.
06/09
Notes and Sketches
118
06/09
Threaded Splicing Systems

Dowel Bar Splicer System*
ICC Evaluation Report No. 4028
The Dayton Superior Dowel Bar Splicer System is a two-piece, standard mechanical splicing technique (splicing bars of equal size) that eliminates protruding dowels. Typical applications include splicing reinforcement bars in precast structures, rebar anchorages, future expansion, and dowel bar substitution at construction joints. The components of the system, the Splicer and Dowel-In, are manufactured from standard grade 60 rebar material. Basic fabrication consists of forging and threading operations. No welding or machining is required and the threading operation does not reduce the nominal cross-sectional area of the bar. The completed splice (joined Splicer and Dowel-In) obtains ultimate bar strengths and meets or exceeds all existing code requirements including 160% fy or 95% of bar actual tensile requirements as identified by ICC acceptance criteria AC 133.
System Advantages
The patented Dowel Bar Splicer System has been engineered, tested and proven to meet or exceed all field standards and design/ engineering practices. The System is strong, easy to use and readily identified as rebar material. The easy installation requires no special tools or machinery and simplifies the forming operations. There are no extras, such as wedges, nuts, collars or couplers required and routine cutting, bending, etc., can be easily handled in the field, if required. The Dayton Superior Dowel Bar Splicer System Advantages: Strong Safe Easy to Use Eliminates Protruding Dowels Improves Forming Costs Reduces Forming and Stripping Hassles Saves Forms By Eliminating Drilling Holes No Forming Required
*U.S. Patent No. 4,619,096
System Compliance
The Dowel Bar Splicer System complies with the following standards/specifications:
Miscellaneous Connection Inserts 119
International Conference of Building Officials (ICC Report #4028). City of Los Angeles Research Report RR 24518. American Concrete Institute (ACI Standard 318). State Departments of Transportation. Corps of Engineers (Specification CW03210).
Typical Splicing Specification

The Dayton Superior Dowel Bar Splicer System, consisting of the Dowel Bar Splicer and Dowel-In, shall be used in splicing of rebar. The Dowel Bar Splicer shall be forged from ASTM A-615 grade 60 deformed rebar material, free of external welding and machining. It shall be furnished with an integral nailing flange and threaded with UNC or UN thread to a depth equal to the nominal thread diameter. The Dowel-In shall be fabricated from ASTM A-615 grade 60 deformed rebar material with thread corresponding to the Splicer. The completed splice shall meet 160% fy exceeding tensile requirements of American Concrete Institute Specification 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and the Corps of Engineers Specification CW03210, Civil Works Construction Guide Specification for Steel Bars, Welded Steel Wire Fabric and Accessories for Concrete Reinforcement.
Note: For more information on our threaded Dowel Bar Splicer System, request a copy of our Rebar Splicing Handbook
06/09
Bar-Lock Rebar Coupler System

Dayton Superior Bar-Lock Coupler System*
ICC Evaluation Report No. 5064
The Dayton Superior Bar-Lock Coupler System provides a simple, quick, cost effective method for splicing rebar in tension and/or compression applications. Bar-Lock couplers may be used with plain or deformed bars in sizes #4 through #18. Bar-Lock couplers utilize lock-shear bolts and special grip rails to mechanically splice with the rebar. The serrated grip rails cradle the rebar and are embedded in the rebar as the lock-shear bolts are tightened. The heads of the lock-shear bolts are designed to shear off at a prescribed torque in order to accomplish proper installation.
System Advantages:
Quick and easy to install saves time and money. Eliminates bar threading and/or special bar end treatment. No special installation equipment required. High strength in tension, compression and seismic applications. Available in standard, transition and weldable versions in #4 through #18 sizes. Ideal for new construction and rehab projects.
System Compliance
Bar-Lock couplers are test-certified to exceed the requirements of, are pre-qualified and approved, or recognized by the following building approval agencies: State Departments of Transportation International Conference of Building Officials (ICC) Building Officials and Code Administrators (BOCA) Southern Building Code Congress International (SBCCI) American Concrete Institute (ACI) Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) City of Los Angeles Department of Building and Safety
Typical Bar-Lock Coupler System Splice *U.S. Patent No. 4,666,326 and 5,046,878
Bar-Lock coupler source material is fabricated under ISO9000 quality standards. Bar-Lock couplers are tested by independent, certified testing laboratories in four modes of testing: tension, compression, fatigue and cyclic. All tests are done to the requirements of ICC and/or Caltrans requirements utilizing ASTM A615 grade 60 rebar material. Copies of test reports are available on request.
Typical Specification
By specific name:
Bar-Lock Mechanical Coupler System manufactured by Dayton Superior Concrete Accessories.
By generic description:
Mechanical butt splices utilizing lock-shear bolts and internal serrated grip rails within the coupling sleeve. They shall exceed the specification requirements for both tension and compression specified by ACI 318 and the Uniform Building code, and be recognized by the International Conference of Building Officials (ICC).
Note: For more information on our Bar-Lock Coupler System, request a copy of our Rebar Splicing Handbook
120
06/09

Shelf Angle Inserts
E G
For Secondary Connections

Dayton Superior shelf angle inserts are typically manufactured from ductile iron (ASTM A-536-84). The wedge-shaped track allows for vertical adjustment of the appropriate askew head bolt and eliminates the possibility of slippage. When using Dayton Superior shelf angle inserts, F-7 Askew Head Bolts should be used to assure full development of ultimate loads.
Note: Do not use shelf angle inserts for primary connection of a precast panel to a building frame.
J H
F-7 Shelf Angle Insert
Loading Condition
K J H
LOAD
Bolt Adjustment

The Dayton Superior F-7 Shelf Angle Insert is most commonly used in general construction. It is available for use with 3/4" Askew Head Bolts. Askew Head Bolts, hex nuts, washers and shims for the insert are ordered separately. The F-7 Shelf Angle Insert is approved for use in New York City under Calendar No. 447-60SM. A longer version, the F-7L is available for greater vertical adjustment.
Maximum adjustment of bolt location. Bolt head must have full bearing on insert track.

The F-8 Shelf Angle Insert, because of its T-head design, provides deeper anchorage and offers the best resistance to the forces placed on it by the load. It can be placed 1/2" from bottom of beam and accepts 3/4" diameter Askew Head Bolts. Bolts, nuts, washers and shims are ordered separately.
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) finish. 200, F-7 Shelf Angle Inserts, hot dipped galvanized finish.
Miscellaneous Connection Inserts 121
Shelf Angle Insert Selection Chart

Insert Type F-7 F-7L F-8 Safe Working Load 2,500 lbs. 2,500 lbs. 2,500 lbs. Concrete Strength 4,000 psi. 4,000 psi. 5,000 psi. Askew Head Bolt Diameter 3/4" 3/4" 3/4 Dimensions E 1-5/8" 2-3/8 2" F 1-1/16" 1-1/4 1" G 1-7/8" 2-1/2 2" H 3-1/2" 5-1/4 3-5/8" J 1-1/8" 3-5/8 1-1/8" K 6"
Note: 1. Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 in normal weight concrete. 2. Safe Working Loads are based on minimum of 1-1/2" from insert to bottom edge. 3. Recommended safe working load for all bolts used as permanent structural connections is based on AISC specification 1.5.2. All bolts used in bearing type connections with an applied shear load shall have a working load based on 10,000 psi on the root area of the threaded portion: 3/4" diameter bolts = 3020 lbs. 06/09
4. The face of the inserts must be set level with and 1/8" below the concrete surface. 5. The Safe Working Load of the inserts is independent of the safe working load of the F-7 Askew Head Bolt. When the Dayton Superior F-7 Askew Head Bolt is used, the Safe Working Load is then determined by comparing the Safe Working Load of the bolt against the Safe Working Load of the insert.

F-7 Askew Head Bolt for Shelf Angle Inserts
The Dayton Superior F-7 Askew head bolts are made with the head at a slope to match the wedge-shaped tracks of the shelf angle inserts. They must be put in the insert properly so the head of the bolt has full bearing on the insert. Care must be taken to ensure that the bolt is not installed upside down. F-7 Askew Head Bolt Dimensions
Bolt Diameter and Threads Per Inch Work Load Shear Dimensions A 1-1/2" 3/4"-10 NC 3,020 lbs. 2" 2-1/2" 3"
Recommended working loads for all bolts used as permanent structural connections are based on AISC specification 1.5.2. All bolts used in bearing type connections with an applied shear load shall have a working load based on 10,000 psi on the root area of the threaded portion: 3/4" diameter bolts = 3,020 lbs. Do Not Use Shelf Wedge Angle Inserts for primary connections of a precast panel to the building frame.
3/8" 1-1/4"
Proper tightening of Askew Head Bolts:

Tighten the hex nut to finger tight condition. Finger tight is defined as the tightness attained to ensure that the parts of the material are in full contact with each other, plus 1/2 turn with a 12" long wrench. Careless wrench tightening or turn-of-nut tightening can induce tension loads on the insert in excess of design capacity and must be avoided.
B A 1-1/2" C Bolt Dia.
F-7 Askew Head Bolt
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) length, (4) finish. 200, F-7 Askew Head Bolts, 2" length, hot dipped galvanized finish.
F-7 Hex Nut for Shelf Angle Inserts

The Dayton Superior F-7 Hex Nuts have NC thread, made to American standard B18.2.2 and are available for use with 3/4" Askew Head Bolts.
F-7 Round Cut Washer for Shelf Angle Inserts

The Dayton Superior F-7 Round Cut Washers are used under the F-7 Hex Nuts on shelf angle inserts. F-7 washers are Type A plain, American standard B27.2. For 3/4" nominal diameter washer, the O.D. is 2" with a thickness of 1/8".
B
F-7 Hex Nut

2" A
F-7 Round Cut Washer

F-9 Shimming Washer Dimensions
A 1/8" 1/8" 1/4" B 1-7/8" 3" 2" 3"
F-9 Shimming Washers for Shelf Angle Inserts

The Dayton Superior F-9 Shimming Washers are used between the Shelf Angle F-9 Shimming Washer Insert and the clip, or shelf angle, so solid contact can be maintained between the two. F-9 shims are available with slot for the 3/4" To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) finish. diameter Askew Head Bolt.
13/16"
1/4"
Example:
200, F-9 Shimming Washers, hot dipped galvanized finish.
One of the more economical and effective devices for providing points of anchorage for suspended ceilings is the hanger insert that can be fastened to a beam soffit by nailing or taping. The metal shell provides a cavity and the wire clip provides the anchorage for the attachment of ceiling suspension wires. If preferred, the Hanger Hook provides a simple method for the attachment of perforated metal hanger straps that can be used for the support of pipe, conduit, etc. Both insert and hook are fabricated from galvanized material. The F-12 Hanger Hook is available with 9/32" or 13/32" holes.
F-11 Hanger Insert and F-12 Hanger Hook
F-11 Hanger Insert To Order:
F-12 Hanger Hook
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) hole size in F-12.

122 06/09

Shelf Angle Inserts for Secondary Connections
The concrete surface surrounding the Dayton Superior Shelf Angle Insert must be smooth and flat to ensure that the connection angle will bear against the concrete. To achieve this, it is recommended that the insert body be recessed 1/8" below the concrete surface. Care must be taken not to overtighten the bolt to prevent damage to the insert. Shelf angle inserts are used with connection angles and an askew head bolt. The minimum bolt size should be 3/4", and the shear and tension capacities of the bolts should be checked to ensure that they provide the required capacity. The successful use of shelf angle inserts depends on a full engagement of the askew bolt head in the wedge, snug tightening of the nut and the full fit of the nut with the wedge surface. If this cannot reliably be achieved, stress concentrations at the bolt head may lead to unpredictable behavior. The problems connected with the use of these inserts often outweigh the advantages: (1) the insert must be oriented correctly; (2) insert must be perfectly level; (3) no inspection of the askew head is possible after panel is erected; (4) connection is very sensitive to over-or undertightening of nut; and (5) connection is not able to resist force reversals or earthquake loadings. Considering these limitations, it is recommended that shelf angle inserts be used only for secondary type connections. Prime connections of precast elements to the building frame should not be made with shelf angle type inserts.
Warning: Do not use shelf angle inserts for lifting or handling precast elements.
C L Load C L Equal Equal
Load
Note: When using shelf angle inserts, care should be taken to install with proper orientation. Use for lightly loaded connections only.
lL-g
6
Pu
Pu=Vu
lL
ev ( ei )
Pu 2-1/2" Maximum
Vu must not exceed the safe working load of the insert.

Askew Head Bolt
Connection Angle Rebar Shelf Angle Wedge Insert Vu ev Vu
Vertical Loads Transferred To Insert *

06/09
*PCI-Manual for Structural Design of Architectural Precast Concrete
123
Note: ev 1.0 ei
ei
lL-g

P-30 Corewall Nut Type Slotted Insert P-31 Corewall Strap Type Slotted Insert
Dayton Superior COREWALL Slotted Inserts and accessories are engineered for performance and have proven to be one of the most advanced, adjustable inserts available on the market today. The slotted inserts feature a plastic back and a removable plastic slot cover that keeps the insert clean and saves you valuable time during the erection process. COREWALL slotted inserts from Dayton Superior are available in two different types, the P-30 Nut Type Slotted Insert and the P-31 Strap Type Slotted Insert. Both types have tabs on each end of the insert for easy attachment to your forms.
P-31 Strap Type Slotted Insert
P-30 Nut Type Slotted Insert
Fast, High Strength, Reliable Concrete Connection Inserts
The P-30 Nut Type Slotted Insert uses a spring loaded, zinc-plated, heavy duty 3/4"-10 National Course (NC) threaded nut to provide fast, efficient and reliable connections. The P-31 Strap Type Slotted Insert is used with either the P-32 Standard Strap Anchor or the P-33 Slotted Strap Anchor, depending upon your erection requirements. The P-34 Threaded Strap Anchor is used with the P-30 Nut Type Slotted Insert. The design of the strap anchor allows for fast installation of the anchor into the slotted insert. This speeds up the erection process and saves valuable installation time. As part of the erection process, the strap anchor is welded to the buildings structural frame to make a ductile connection. All COREWALL products are manufactured from a weldable grade of steel. Dayton Superior COREWALL slotted inserts are ideal for use in precast concrete industrial wall panels, architectural panels, structural panels or precast parking structures. The COREWALL slotted inserts are also suitable for use in seismic areas.
124
06/09

P-30 Corewall Slotted Insert Nut Type
The Dayton Superior P-30 Nut Type Slotted Insert uses a spring loaded, zinc plated, heavy duty 3/4"-10 NC threaded nut to provide fast, efficient and reliable connections. The P-30 insert can be used with standard NC threaded bolts or a P-34 Threaded Strap Anchor, if a welded connection is required. P-30 inserts are available in 4", 6" and 8" standard lengths with either blue epoxy-polyester or hot dipped galvanized (HDG) finish. Type 304 or 316 stainless steel is available on request.
E D
13/16"
P-30 Corewall Slotted Insert Nut Type
To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) part number,

(4) finish.
Example: 200, P-30 Corewall Nut Type Slotted Inserts, #CS425, HDG.
For proper connection to the structural frame of the building, use either a 3/4"-10 NC threaded bolt or rod meeting ASTM A-325 or SAE Grade 5 Standards.
Part Tension Safe Number Working Load CS425 CS625 CS825 CS435 CS635 CS835 CS445 CS645 CS845 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 5,350 lbs. 5,350 lbs. 5,350 lbs. 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs.
Shear Safe Working Load 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs.
A 4" 6" 8" 4" 6" 8" 4" 6" 8"
B
3-3/16" 3-3/16" 3-3/16" 3-3/8" 3-3/8" 3-3/8" 3-11/16" 3-11/16" 3-11/16"
C
2-1/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 3-1/2" 3-1/2" 3-1/2" 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4-1/2"
D
5-1/2" 7-1/2" 9-1/2" 5-1/2" 7-1/2" 9-1/2" 5-1/2" 7-1/2" 9-1/2"
Adjustment E 2-1/2"
4-1/2" 6-1/2" 2-1/2" 4-1/2" 6-1/2" 2-1/2" 4-1/2" 6-1/2"
Safe Working Loads provide a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 in 5,000 psi normal weight concrete.
06/09
125
P-30 Corewall Nut Type Slotted Insert Selection Chart

P-31 Corewall Strap Type Slotted Insert P-33 Corewall Slotted Strap Anchor P-32 Corewall Strap Anchor P-34 Corewall Threaded Strap Anchor
The P-31 Corewall Strap Type Slotted Insert and the P-30 Corewall Nut Type Slotted Insert are both quick and versatile precast concrete connection inserts. When used with the slot running in the same direction as the applied load, the inserts act as a tension tie to the structural frame. However, when the inserts are installed so that the slot runs 90 to the applied load, the inserts can support both shear and tension loads.
1 u 2 u 3 u 5 u 4 u
P-31 Corewall Strap Type Slotted Insert

Finish: Hot dipped galvanized (HDG) or blue epoxy-polyester (epoxy) coating. Optional: Inserts fabricated from Type 304 or 316 stainless steel are available on special order. Specify if stainless steel nuts are required.
P-31 B 4" x 13/16" slot P-33 L A 1-1/4" P-32
3/4"
2 1/8"
1/2"
P-34
P-32 Corewall Strap Anchor
C 1-1/16" 1-1/4"
1. Tabs for easy attachment to forms. u 2. Weldable grade of steel. u 3. N otch in strap anchor assures positive u connection to insert 4. S lot allows adjustment for erection tolerances. u 5. S lotted holes for extra reinforcement u where required.
See following page for the minimum edge distance requirements needed to develop the tension and shear safe working loads shown in the chart below.
P-31 Corewall Strap Type Slotted Insert Selection Chart Tension Safe Working Load 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 5,350 lbs. 5,350 lbs. 5,350 lbs. Shear Safe Working Load Up to 2' Eccentricity 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs. 6,650 lbs. Up to 3' Eccentricity 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. 4,000 lbs. A 4" 6" 8" 4" 6" 8" B 4-3/16" 4-3/16" 4-3/16" 4-3/8" 4-3/8" 4-3/8" C 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 3-1/2" 3-1/2" 3-1/2"
Insert Style SA 1425 SA 1625 SA 1825

SA 1435 SA 1635 SA 1835
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 in 5,000 psi normal weight concrete. Eccentricity is measured from face of insert to midpoint of the weld connecting the strap anchor to the structural frame.
Corewall Strap Anchor Selection Chart P-32 Standard Strap Anchor Part Number CE 806 CE 808 CE 810 CE 812 Length 6" 8" 10" 12" P-33 Slotted Strap Anchor Part Number CE 906 CE 908 CE 910 CE 912 Length 6" 8" 10" 12" P-34 Threaded Channel Strap Anchor Part Number CE 675 CE 875 CE 1075 CE 1275 Length 6" 8" 10" 12" P-34 Threaded Plate Strap Anchor Part Number CE 600 CE 800 CE 1000 CE 1200 Length 6" 8" 10" 12"
Note: Longer lengths are available on special order. The P-34 Threaded Strap Anchor is used with the P-30 Nut Type Slotted Insert and P-38 Slotted Insert II. 126 06/09
P-38 Corewall SLOT T ED I NSER T ii

Product Description:
The Corewall Slotted Insert II is the next generation product in the Corewall legacy. The design has been improved to create a higher load capacity and greater ease to install the product. With six different product options and two different finishes, the Corewall Slotted Insert II will meet any application. This product is an addition to the Corewall Slotted Inserts which have been specified and used by precasters for over 20 years. The existing styles of Corewall Inserts remain available for use as well.
Product Specification:
7 guage one piece steel tampered body One piece plastic void former and removable plastic cap 3/4" - 10 special nut deisgn 3 Insert heights - 2.5", 3.5", and 4.5" 3 Insert lengths - 4", 5", 6' Treaded Strap Anchor for attatchment to building frame
TECHNICAL DATA:
P-38 Nut Type Slotted Anchor Insert Selection Chart
Description 2.5 x 4 P38 2.5 x 6 P38 2.5 x 8 P38 3.5 x 4 P38 3.5 x 6 P38 3.5 x 8 P38 4.5 x 4 P38 4.5 x 6 P38 4.5 x 8 P38 Tension Safe Working Load 4,660 lbs. 5,500 lbs. 5,500 lbs. 6,300 lbs. 6,750 lbs. 7,100 lbs. 8,600 lbs. 8,800 lbs. 9,100 lbs. Shear Safe Working Load 5,150 lbs. 6,400 lbs. 7,300 lbs. 8,600 lbs. 8,700 lbs. 8,700 lbs. 10,700 lbs. 10,950 lbs. 10,950 lbs. Length (A) 4 6 8 4 6 8 4 6 8 Width (B) 5-1/2 5-1/2 5-1/2 6 6 6 6-1/2 6-1/2 6-1/2 Depth (C) 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 4-1/2 4-1/2 4-1/2 Length (D) 5-1/4 7-1/4 9-1/4 5-1/4 7-1/4 9-1/4 5-1/4 7-1/4 9-1/4 Adjustment (E) 2-1/2 4-1/2 6-1/2 2-1/2 4-1/2 6-1/2 2-1/2 4-1/2 6-1/2
Safe Working Loads provide a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1 in 5,000 psi normal weight concrete. Engineer is responsible to make sure that connecting threaded rod or bolt is strong enough to carry these loads.
How to order:
Specify: 1. Quantity 2. Name 3. Part Number 4. Description 5. Finish
4.5 x 6 Insert with galvanized finish
3.5 x 8 Insert with epoxy finish
06/09
127

Minimum edge distance, without the use of additional reinforcing steel, is shown below. Edge distance can be reduced if additional reinforcing steel is installed in the insert slots, as shown.
New Corewall Edge and Corner Details
8"
12"
12"
8"
A variety of configurations of extra reinforcing bars can be easily placed through the slotted holes in the legs of the insert. This will allow the insert to be used in seismic areas, as well as close to corners or edges of a precast concrete panel.
3/4" Minimum Cover
Corner Detail
3" 1-1/4" 4" or 6" 3/4" Minimum Cover
3/4" Minimum Cover
Edge Perpendicular Detail

1-1/4"
Slot Detail
2"
2"
4" Insert 2#4 Stepped Hairpins 3#4 Stepped Hairpins
Plan
3"
Plan
1-1/2" 3" 6" Insert 1-1/2" 1-1/4" C 1-1/2"
3/4" Minimum Cover
5/8" 2-1/2" 3/4" Minimum Cover 3" 8" Insert 3/4" Minimum Cover 1-1/4" 3" 2-1/2"
11/16"
Section
Section Corner Detail

3/4" Minimum Cover
3/4" Minimum Cover
4" or 6" 3"
4" or 6"
Varies to suit minimum cover
#4 Rebar 1'-6" 3-1/2" Out/Out
Plan
3 #4 Stepped Hairpins
2#4 Stepped Hairpins
3/4" Minimum Cover
Plan
Half Stepped Hairpin

1-1/4" Varies #4 Rebar 1'-6" 1-3/4" Out/Out
Section 128
3/4" Minimum Cover
Section
3/4" Minimum Cover
06/09
Edge Parallel Detail
Stepped Hairpin

P-11 Shear-Grip Flange Connector
The Dayton Superior P-11 Shear-Grip Flange Connector is the original member of the Flange Connector Family. It is a substantial steel plate shaped and embedded in concrete to facilitate the transfer of loads between adjoining double tees used as walls, untopped floors and roof panels. The P-11 connector is available with 1" face plate height in plain carbon steel, electro plated and stainless steel. The center hole in the face plate may be ordered plain or tapped with 3/8"-16 NC thread to utilize a P-63-PL Holding Rod as a setting bolt. When embedded in normal weight 5,000 psi concrete, the following design values apply:
19-3/4"
P-11 Shear-Grip Flange Connector
1"
Vertical shear 2,100 to 2,480 lbs. Horizontal shear 7,600 to 8,060 lbs. In-plane tension 2,000 to 2,680 lbs.
See page 130 for additional information.
P-11 Shear-Grip Flange Connector Advantages:

2"
Low weight. A ccommodates chamber alignment with minimal

1" Unit
R educes erection costs. Simple, secure installation.

To Order: Example:
loss connection capacity and ductility.
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) face height, (4) tapped or untapped hole, (5) finish. 400, P-11 Shear-Grip Flange Connectors, 1" face height, tapped hole, Stainless Steel.
06/09
129

P-11 Shear-Grip Connectors
The Dayton Superior Shear-Grip Connectors are load transfer devices designed to provide adequate welding surfaces to connect precast floor and/or roof panels and precast wall panels. The shear-grip connectors are embedded in the concrete with the face plate exposed in the edge of the precast panel. As the panels are erected, the exposed connectors face provides a welding surface to connect the panels. A smooth steel bar, of required diameter, is welded between the connectors to complete the panel connection. Dayton Superior Shear-Grip Connectors in plain carbon steel, stainless steel and electro-plated finish depending on the amount of corrosion resistance required.
Tension Horizontal Shear
Horizontal Shear Condition
Precast Panels Used as Wall
Vertical Shear Condition

Precast Panels Used as Floor or Roof
Horizontal and Vertical Shear and Tension Load Resistance

The Dayton Superior flange connectors provide a completed connection that acts as a strong, stiff transfer device for diaphragm loads. They provide excellent transfer of wind and seismic induced horizontal shear and tension forces and allow the double tees to act as part of the buildings diaphragm.
130
06/09

P-12-D Dur-O-Web Shear Reinforcement
The Dayton Superior P-12-D Dur-O-Web is a prefabricated structural web reinforcement assembly that has been developed to replace conventional U-shaped and closed stirrups. The vertical steel wires provide reinforcement for the applied shear stresses. The double, horizontal side wires at the top and bottom of the assembly develop the required anchorage for the vertical wire reinforcement. The design of Dur-O-Web allows the spacing and size of both the vertical and horizontal wires to vary to meet your design requirements.
Availability
Dayton Superior Dur-O-Web is shipped in bundles containing 500 ft. (50 pcs. of 10'-0" long units). Lengths other than 10'-0" can be supplied on special order. The standard finish is bright basic. Galvanized wire, hot dipped galvanized and epoxy coated finishes are also available on special order.
While Dur-O-Web is normally supplied with uniform spacing of vertical wires, variable spacing is available.
Benefits
I deal shear reinforcement for use in prestressed/precast concrete double tees or other precast elements having narrow webs or where space is limited. Wide variety of wire sizes and spacings. Ready to use. Reduces costs by eliminating the cutting and bending of standard rebars or mesh. Easy to place. Available in standard 10'-0" lengths Serves as a mesh support in double tee flanges T he ability to vary wire diameters and spacing guarantees the most economical solution to your reinforcement requirements
Approvals
The use of Dayton Superior Dur-O-Web Shear Reinforcement to replace open and closed stirrups is allowed by American Concrete Institute (ACI-318) Standard Building Code Requirements for Concrete Structures, and Canadian Standards Association Standard CAN3-A23.3 Design of Concrete Structures for Buildings.
Using the Selection Table

The P-12-D Dur-O-Web selection table, shown below, shows the diameter and area of the vertical shear reinforcement wires that are available. It also lists the minimum size horizontal anchor wire that ASTM standards require. In addition, the area of shear reinforcement per foot is shown for the various spacing of the vertical shear reinforcement selected.
Example:
A required shear steel area of 0.100 sq. in. per foot can be provided by using 1 gauge vertical wires spaced at 7-1/2" centers with 7 gauge longitudinal side wires. This example would provide 0.101 sq. in. of steel reinforcement per foot. Another solution would be the use of 5 gauge vertical wires spaced at 4" centers with 10 gauge longitudinal side wires. This combination would provide 0.102 sq. in. of reinforcement per foot.
P-12-D Dur-O-Web Selection Chart
Wire Size W-7.4 W-6.3 W-5.4 W-4.9 W-4.7 W-4.0 W-3.4 W-2.9 W-2.5 W-2.1 W-1.7 W-1.4 Wire Wire Gauge Diameter 0 1 2 1/4" 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0.306" 0.283" 0.263" 0.250" 0.244" 0.225" 0.207" 0.192" 0.177" 0.162" 0.148" 0.135" Steel Minimum Weight Area Side Wire lb. per ft. (sq. in.) Gauge 0.074 0.063 0.054" 0.049" 0.047" 0.040" 0.034" 0.029" 0.025" 0.021" 0.017" 0.014" 0.251 0.214 0.184 0.167 0.158 0.135 0.114 0.098 0.084 0.070 0.059 0.049
6 7 8 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Area of Steel (sq. in.) per Lineal Foot at Indicated Main Shear Reinforcement Spacing 2"
0.444 0.378 0.324 0.294 0.282 0.240 0.202 0.174 0.150 0.126 0.102 0.084
3"
0.296 0.252 0.216 0.196 0.188 0.160 0.136 0.116 0.100 0.084 0.068 0.056
4"
5"
6"
0.148 0.128 0.108 0.098 0.094 0.080 0.068 0.058 0.050 0.042 0.034 0.028
7"
7-1/2"
8"
0.111 0.095 0.081 0.074 0.071 0.060 0.051 0.044 0.038 0.032 0.026 0.021
9"
10"
11"
0.081 0.069 0.059 0.053 0.051 0.044 0.037 0.032 0.027 0.023 0.019 0.015
12"
0.074 0.063 0.054 0.049 0.047 0.040 0.034 0.029 0.025 0.021 0.017 0.014
0.222 0.178 0.189 0.151 0.162 0.130 0.147 0.118 0.141 0.113 0.120 0.096 0.102 0.082 0.087 0.070 0.075 0.060 0.062 0.050 0.051 0.041 0.042 0.034
0.127 0.118 0.108 0.101 0.093 0.086 0.084 0.078 0.081 0.075 0.069 0.064 0.058 0.054 0.050 0.046 0.043 0.040 0.036 0.034 0.029 0.027 0.024 0.022
0.099 0.089 0.084 0.076 0.072 0.065 0.065 0.059 0.063 0.056 0.053 0.048 0.045 0.041 0.039 0.035 0.033 0.030 0.028 0.025 0.023 0.020 0.019 0.017
06/09
131

Material Specifications
Dayton Superior Dur-O-Web is manufactured with smooth, round vertical steel wires and smooth, round horizontal side wires. All materials and products conform to the latest edition of one or more of the following ASTM specifications: A-82 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement A-185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
Weight Calculation
The sample calculation, below, shows how to calculate the approximate weight of steel used in different Dur-O-Web assemblies:
P-12-D Dur-O-Web
Vertical wires: Horizontal side wires: Height: Length" 1 gauge at 6" centers 4 pcs. of 7 gauge 22" overall 10'-0" ertical wires = 22" 12" per ft. x 12" per ft. V 6" centers x .214 lb. per ft. x 10 ft. = 7.87 lb. Side Wires = 4 pcs. x 0.084 lb. per ft. x 10 ft. = 3.36 lb. Total weight per 10 ft. unit = 1 1.23 lb.
Double Tee
2" Minimum Dur-O-Web
Bridge Beams
Dur-O-Web A H D
1" Concrete Cover Assumed
2" Minimum
Depth of Concrete Member "D" 8' 10' 12' 14' 16' 18' 20' 22' 24' 32'
Dimension "A" 2' 4' 6' 8' 10' 12' 14' 16' 18' 26'
P-12-D Dur-O-Web Overall Height "H" 6' 8' 10' 12' 14' 16' 18' 20' 22' 30'
H
Vertical Shear Reinforcement 2" Minimum
Horizontal Side Wires
2" Minimum Spacing Spacing
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) overall height H, (3) name, (4) gauge and spacing of vertical wires, (5) gauge of side wires, (6) overall length (7) finish.
Example:
275 pcs., 22" high, P-12-D Dur-O-Web, 1 gauge verticals at 6" centers, 7 gauge side wires x 10 ft. long, bright basic finish.
132
06/09
Notes and Sketches
06/09
133
Notes and Sketches
134 Miscellaneous Connection Inserts
06/09
Notes and Sketches
06/09
135

P-24 Delta Tie
The Dayton Superior P-24 Delta Tie is a unique insulated precast concrete panel connector. It allows the precaster to fabricate a highly energy-efficient, insulated precast concrete sandwich wall panel using the insulating foam of his choice. This versatile connector allows the foam insulation to be placed from panel edge to panel edge, eliminating thermal bridges and costly energy loss. The foam insulation is sandwiched between two concrete wythes, or layers, to form a long-lasting, energy-efficient precast concrete sandwich wall panel. The three wythes are tied together using P-24 Delta Ties. Spacing of the Delta Ties varies, based on the panels required composite moment capacity. The Delta Tie is produced using an engineered composite matrix. It consists of a geometrically configured, two-dimensional truss manufactured from continuous wound fiberglass embedded in an alkali resistant resin. The design of the Delta Tie produces a connector of remarkable strength and durability. The non-metallic, non-corrosive design of the Delta Tie eliminates any thermal transfer through the panel, increasing the insulating efficiency of the panel.
Patent Pending
P-24 Delta Tie
Advantages
Increased load bearing. Stiffer insulated panels, easier to handle. Design flexibility. Material, labor and transportation cost reduction. Quick and easy installation. Applicable to all brands of foam panel insulation.
136
06/09

P-24 Delta Tie
The standard Delta Tie dimensions are shown in the accompanying detail. The connector is designed so that it can be oriented in the panel either on end or side, depending on the thickness of the panel. For example, the 5" x 7" size can be used on its side in a six-inch panel or on end for thicker panels. The Delta Tie can be used with any rigid insulation from 1" to 4" thick. This versatile, dual-use feature adds to the Delta Ties effective application compatibility and, at the same time, reduces inventory and storage requirements. In individual connector specimen and full size panel tests the Delta Tie has exhibited excellent loading behavior and load capacities.
1/2" Typ.
5"
3"
5" 7"
Increased Load Bearing

Tests have verified the excellent tension and shear strength characteristics of the Delta Tie insulated panel connector.
Stiffer Insulated Concrete Panels

The inherent capabilities of the truss design greatly increase the stiffness of the panel. The added stiffness makes the panel easier to lift, handle, store and/or transport.
Design Flexibility
Due to the composite action gained by using the Delta Tie, panels may be cast in longer lengths or with thinner concrete wythes.
Cost Savings
The Delta Tie design provides a fast and easy installation to save labor. It produces stiffer panels to lessen handling, storage and transportation concerns. The connectors design flexibility allows the cost saving attributes to be designed into the panel. Delta Tie connectors are purchased as a separate item, allowing the precaster to provide the foam insulation of his choice.
Quick and Easy Installation

The two-dimensional design of the Delta Tie lends itself to easy installation. No drilling or special tools required. Simply use the foam as a straight-edge template to quickly place the connectors.
Applicable to All Brands of Foam Panel Insulation

The Delta Tie is not sold as part of a package. It is sold separately and can be used with any brand of foam insulation supplied by the precaster. The many Delta Tie advantages open up a wide area of possibilities for the precaster/designer/producer to improve production, efficiency and costs at his precasting operation. The P-24 Delta Tie has the following ultimate capacities: 3,220 lbs. in shear. 3,100 lbs. in tension. Maximum recommended spacing is 8 square feet of panel per panel connector. For spacing in excess of 8 square feet of panel per connector, contact a Dayton Superior Technical Service Center.
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name. 500, P-24 Delta Ties.
06/09
137

P-24 Delta Tie Design Chart
60%
Notes:
Ipc = Partial Composite Moment of Inertia k = Percentage Composite Icomp = Composite Moment of Inertia Inc = Non-Composite Moment of Inertia Ipc = k(Icomp Inc) + Inc 100
Percent Composite Action (k)
50%
When composite action is not required, maximum connector spacing for a 3"-2"-3" panel is 8 sq. ft. per connector. Test reports are available on request.
40%
30%
20%
10%
0%
10
Square Feet Per Connector
Typical Delta Tie Placement

25% Composite Action No Composite Action
4 sq. ft. per connector
8 sq. ft. per connector
Composite Moment Capacity

For any given sandwich panel, the shear and moment diagrams define the required panel stiffness. The panel stiffness may be altered, as necessary, pending panel parameters, by adjusting the tie distribution as a function of the internal shear and moment forces. The two examples, below, illustrate the required stiffness (percent composite action) necessary to develop the shear and moment forces. 200000 1. A panel measuring 37'-0" long by 6'-0" 3-2-3 wide, with a 3-2-3 wythe pattern, must 18000 have a 5% composite action to achieve a Chart based on 6'-0'' Panel Width flat lift with 4x2 rigging. f'c = 5,000 psi 16000 fba = 424 psi 2. A 2-2-2 panel of same size requires a 14000 10% composite action for the same rigging. 12000 In order to employ the least amount of con2-2-2 crete to save weight, the percent of composite 10000 action must increase. 8000 A small upward adjustment can be realized by a minimal addition of connectors strategically 6000 placed at the zones of maximum shear.
Moment Capacity (ft-lbs)
4000 2000 0
0%
10%
20%
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
Percent Composite
138
06/09

P-24 Delta Tie Insulated Panel Installation Sequence
1. Construct form, place reinforcing mesh, lifting inserts, etc. Place and screed the concrete for the bottom wythe.
2. While the bottom wythe concrete is still pliable, lay the first course of insulating foam flush against the form. Typically, the first course of foam will be 12'' running the length of the panel. Utilize the edge of the foam as a template and push each Delta Tie down into the bottom wythe.
3. Continue to place the connectors in their proper positions along the first course of insulation.
4. Add the remaining courses of insulation and connectors.*
5. When all of the foam sections and connectors have been placed, the top concrete wythe is poured and screeded as necessary.
6. After proper concrete set, the panel may be removed from the form and the process repeated.
* Foam-back tape is available for sealing the insulation joints, if necessary. 06/09 139

P-14 Type L Connector Pin and P-15 Type M Connector Pin
The Dayton Superior Connector Pin is used to tie two wythes together. The pins work in tension and compression to resist wind pressure and suction. The pins also prevent bowing and separation of the individual wythes of the panel. The pins are produced from type 304 stainless steel for excellent corrosion resistance. Since the pins are made from small diameter wire, they are flexible and do not offer any resistance to movement from thermal stresses that build up in the panel.
12 ga. Diameter
Length Length
The P-15 Type M Connector Pin is available in 4-3/4", 5-1/2" and 6-1/4" lengths. The P-14 Type L Connector Pin is available in P-14 Type L Connector lengths of 4-3/4", 5-1/2", 6-1/4" or 7-1/2". Maximum pin spacing Pin is 4'-0" on center, or one pin for each 5 sq. ft. of panel area. However, pins should be spaced at 24" maximum on center along the panel edges.
P-15 Type M Connector Pin
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) length 200, P-14 Type L Connector Pins, 5-1/2" length
Connector Pin Selection Chart

Insulation Thickness 1" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" Safe Working Load Per Pin (lbs.) Tension 300 300 300 300 Compression 1,900 800 450 300
Safe Working Load provides a factor of safety of approximately 3 to 1. Minimum f'c to be 3,000 psi. Minimum embedment length of open end of pin is 2". Note: 14 ga. pins are also available on special order.
Preferred Attachment Method Type L Pin
Maximum Pin Distance From Anchor Center

Insulation Thickness 1" 5'-0" 1-1/4" 7'-0" 1-1/2" 8'-6" 1-3/4" 10'-0" 2" 12'-0" 2-1/2" 17'-0"
Alternate Attachment Method Type L Pin

Note: Larger panel sizes may have non-load bearing wythe divided into two or more sections. Sandwich Panel Connectors 06/09
140

P-9 Precast Sandwich Panel Tie
The Dayton Superior P-9 Precast Sandwich Panel Tie is manufactured to specifications from 3 gauge (0.243" diameter) stainless steel or galvanized wire. Place the connectors at the edge of the foam insulation so the body of the tie is at the joint line between two pieces of foam. Next, the ends of the tie are rotated 90 so they bear against the foam insulation. Spacing of the panel connectors are per job requirements. After the panel ties have been attached to the foam insulation, they are placed on the freshly placed bottom wythe of concrete. Later, the top wythe of concrete is placed. The chart, below, lists the sizes of panel ties produced in the past for various precasters. Other sizes can be produced on special order.
1-1/2" A
B (Insulation Thickness)
P-9 Precast Sandwich Panel Tie
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) A & B dimensions (4) finish 200, P-9 Precast Sandwich Panel Ties, A=4", B=2", stainless steel
P-9 Precast Sandwich Panel Tie A B

3" 1" 4" 1" 4" 2" 5" 3" 6" 3" 7" 3" 8" 3"
P-37 M Anchor Shear Connector

The Dayton Superior P-37 M Anchor Shear Connector is available in various sizes. Fabricated from 1/4" diameter galvanized wire, these connectors are designed for use as a shear connector in precast concrete sandwich panels. For proper use, place the connectors at the following maximum spacing: 18" on center maximum across the width of the panel. 24" on center maximum along the length of the panel. Place additional connectors around the panels lift points. Edge distance requirements are 6" minimum center line to the panel end and 4" minimum center line to the panels edge. Place connectors parallel to the length of the panel. Minimum embedment at the open end is 2"
4" B 1"
A 1/4" Diameter
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) style 1,200, P-37 M Anchor Shear Connectors, No. CP107
P-37 M Anchor Shear Connector
P-37 M Anchor Shear Connectors

Style A 2" 2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" B 6" 7" 6" 7" Maximum Insulation Thickness 2" 3" 2-1/2" 3-1/2"
CP106 CP107 CP206 CP207

Insulation
Typical Installation
06/09 141
Notes and Sketches
142
06/09
Notes and Sketches
06/09
143
Prestress Pumps, Jacks and Chucks

CCL Prestressing Products
CCL offers a comprehensive range of products for the safe accurate and reliable prestressing of concrete.
Prestressing Pump Units Prestressing Jacks
Open Chucks
Wire Splice Chucks
Standard Splice Chucks
Spring Loaded Chucks

Miscellaneous Products 06/09
Note: For more information on the complete prestressing system or individual components, request a copy of the Prestress Strand Deflection Device Handbook
144
Strand Restraining Devices

Prestress Strand Restraining Devices
By deflecting some of the prestressing strands, in a precast prestressed concrete beam, a more favorable distribution of stresses within the concrete beam is obtained. When using deflected strands, the eccentricity of the prestressing force is reduced in the area of decreasing dead load moment. By reducing the tensile stresses in the concrete, the load that can be applied to the beam can be increased by an amount equal to the weight of the beam itself. The benefits obtainable through strand deflection are such that many precast prestressed concrete plants are designed so that the prestress strands can be deflected. When using depressed strands, it is necessary that strand restraining devices be provided at the points within the concrete beam where the strand deflections occur. Working closely with many prestressed concrete producers, Dayton Superior has developed a complete line of strand restraining devices. Since 1958 Dayton Superior strand deflection devices have been recognized and accepted as the industry standard. All units are manufactured on a production basis and are produced with positive (no welding) mechanical connections. These units maintain a clear distance of 1-1/2" from bottom of the strand restraining device to beam bottom yet still hold a 2" dimension from the centerline of the strand to the beam bottom. View of Strand Restraining Device Free-turning rollers contribute additional safety reducing frictional resistance.
Large variety of styles available to fit your needs!
Illustration of swivel action as strand restraining device responds to strand tensioning.
Note: For more information on the complete prestressing system or individual components, request a copy of the Prestress Strand Deflection Device Handbook 06/09 145
Precast Bracing Information

T-14 Precast Wall Braces
The Dayton Superior T-14 Precast Wall Braces are all steel, heavy duty wall braces designed to quickly and easily align and brace tilt-up wall panels. Rough adjustment of the T-14 braces is easily accomplished by telescoping the pipes to the nearest incremental hole.
Final adjustment is then achieved by simply turning the brace. Dayton Superior wall braces are available in numerous sizes to provide a continuous range of panel heights of fifty feet or more. Refer to the chart below for additional information.
T-14 Precast Pipe Brace
Wall Plate
T-14 Precast Jumbo Brace

Wall Plate
Ball Bearing Coupler Telescoping Pipes Danger! To prevent accidental removal of alignment pin, insert a 10d double headed nail through hole in alignment pin, bending the protruding portion of the nail to a 45 degree minimum angle
Fixed Length Pipe
Adjusting Screw
Adjusting Screw Foot Plate
Foot Plate
T-14 Precast Pipe Brace Selection Chart
To Order: Example:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) Name, (3) model. 200, T-14 Precast Wall Braces. Model B-8.
* Note: Field assembly is required for B-14 and B-15 braces.
40, T-15 Pipe Brace Extension, 5 extension for B-8 braces.
146
06/09
The Dayton Superior Pipe Brace Extensions are available for the B-8 and B-12 pipe brace models. The T-15 extension for the B-12 model extends the brace ten feet. Extensions for the B-8 brace are available in five feet and ten feet lengths.
T-15 Pipe Brace Extensions
To Order:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) model.
Example:

Brace Loading
Bracing recommendations are for the sole purpose of temporarily bracing fully erected concrete panels during construction - against wind loads only. This temporary bracing design is based on The American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Minimum Design Loads for Building and other Structures, as recommended by the Tilt-up Concrete Associations Guideline for Temporary Wind Bracing of Tilt-up Concrete Panels During Construction, TCA Guideline 1-05. The ASCE standard and the TCA guideline allow the basic wind speed, which is based on a 50-year mean recurrence interval, to be multiplied by a reduction factor for a 5-year mean recurrence interval which determines the construction wind speed used in the design of bracing systems. Brace anchors and main, knee, lateral and/or end braces are not designed or intended to sustain impact loads. Precautions must be taken to arrange the panel erection sequence so as to avoid the potential for impacting upright panels or portions of the bracing system. Bracing recommendations for other loads or forces that might be applied to the bracing system are beyond the scope of Dayton Superior. For bracing recommendations other than wind loads, the user should engage a design agency with capabilities of performing such a service. This bracing system is designed to temporarily support panels against wind loads until the building structure is complete and self supporting. The bracing system should never be disconnected or removed until the panels are secured by the permanent structural connections and all lateral load resisting systems are in place. If the structural documents do not indicate when the temporary bracing system can be removed, the engineer of record should be consulted.
Brace Removal
Safety Notes:
Panel should be plumb with braces and knee braces installed before crane releases panel.
L ateral bracing should be installed immediately upon the crane and crew clearing the braces and before the next panel is erected. Lateral bracing must be continuous, connected at each brace, and tied off with end braces at the end of each line. Panels require a minimum of two braces per panel. End braces to ground and/or cross braces must be installed every 100 ft. to prevent lateral movement of braces and to provide total brace stability. All members of the brace system must be in place and secured at the end of each day. Knee and lateral bracing must be located at mid-length of pipe brace. K nee brace must be firmly fixed at bottom end to prevent possible upward buckling of main brace. Do not erect panels or continue working during excessive windy or adverse weather conditions. A ll brace inserts should be a minimum of 12 from any panel edge, opening, control joint or construction joint. Panel bracing is designed to withstand specified wind loads until panels are connected to the structural system of the building. Do not remove any members of the bracing system until all structural connections are completed. U se only the brace type as noted on the Panel Layout Sheet. No substitute brace hardware shall be used and all braces must be positioned at the specified locations. For special bracing conditions that require deviation from the bracing dimensions shown on the Panel Layout Sheet contact Dayton Superior for recommendations. See Panel Layout Sheet for type of brace, number of braces per panel, as well as knee and lateral bracing requirements. Welding or bolting the tilt-up panels in place might preclude the use of braces. After winds of 35 mph or more have been experienced at the job site, the tilt-up contractor must check the tightness of the bolts that secure the wall and foot plates to the concrete. Re-tightening of these bolts to the proper torque will assure that the pipe braces are secure. T he safe working load of the panels bracing system may be drastically reduced if other types of brace anchors are used as part of this projects bracing system, other than specified brace anchors.
Warning! Failure to install knee, lateral and end braces (when
required) will greatly reduce the safe working load of the specified brace and may allow panels to fall causing severe injury or death.
06/09
147

Bracing to Cylindrical Deadman
Use the chart at the right to select the proper size deadman if your project requires the use of a deadman for brace attachment in lieu of an anchor cast into a floor slab. How to select the proper size deadman: 1) D etermine the maximum applied brace load for the project. 2) T he proper deadman must weigh at least as much as the maximum individual brace load. 3) F ind a number on the deadman chart that is equal to or greater than the required deadman weight. Follow the numbers in the top column and the far left column of the chart for the proper diameter and height of the deadman. Example: Maximum Applied brace load = 3,200 lb. Acceptable deadman sizes are: Diameter Height 4 #4 Vertical Bars 3 #3 Ties @ 8 o.c. 3/4 Diameter Cast-in Floor Brace Anchor or T-13 Coil-Anchors 3/4 Diameter x 4-1/2 Long
6 Max
Weights Of Deadman (Kips) Height

2'-0" 2'-6" 3'-0" 3'-6" 4'-0" 4'-6" 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 8'-6" 9'-0" 9'-6" 10'-0"
24" 30" 36" 42" 48" Diameter Diameter Diameter Diameter Diameter
.94 1.18 1.41 1.65 1.89 2.12 2.36 2.59 2.83 3.06 3.30 3.54 3.77 4.01 4.24 4.48 4.71 1.47 1.84 2.21 2.58 2.95 3.31 3.68 4.05 4.42 4.79 5.15 5.52 5.89 6.26 6.63 6.99 7.36 2.12 2.65 3.18 3.71 4.24 4.77 5.30 5.83 6.36 6.89 7.42 7.95 8.48 9.01 9.54 10.07 10.60 2.89 3.61 4.33 5.05 5.77 6.49 7.22 7.94 8.66 9.38 10.10 10.82 11.54 12.27 12.99 13.71 14.43 3.77 4.71 5.65 6.60 7.54 8.48 9.42 10.37 11.31 12.25 13.19 14.14 15.08 16.02 16.96 17.91 18.85
24 30 36 42
7-0 4-6 3-6 2-6
Note: Always hand or auger excavate hole for deadman.
Minimum allowable soil bearing pressure is to be 1,500 psf. Minimum concrete compressive strength fc shall be = 2,500 psi at use. 1 Kip = 1,000 lbs.
Brace Maintenance
During the construction process braces may be exposed to adverse conditions that could damage or render them unusable. Braces should be inspected for proper operation, damage and wear after each use. This inspection is typically performed by a Dayton Superior Certified Precast Dealer when the braces are returned. However, when braces are transferred from one job to another without being returned to Dayton Superior or its dealer for maintenance, the user must inspect all braces prior to their being reused. This inspection should check for missing parts, parts, wear, dings, kinks, straightness, indication of any application of heat and/or other damage. Any brace that shows signs of wear, has missing parts, damage, or is questionable should be set aside and not used.
148
06/09

The Insta-Brace System Manufactured by PierTech
The newly developed Insta-Brace Anchor provides tilt-up contractors with an economical and efficient alternative to cast-in place, concrete dead-man. Contact Dayton Superior for more information.
ADVANTAGES: PierTech Systems is revolutionizing the world of Tilt-up construction with the Insta-Brace Anchor. Rapid installation and loading capability Minimal soil disturbance Removable and re-usable for future projects Verifiable load capacity independent of soil conditions Matches or exceeds capacity of our strongest braces in most applications Pre-engineered system with verified load capacity Bracing can be placed on the inside or outside of wall
SPECIFICATIONS: The Insta-Brace Anchor by PierTech Systems has been pre-engineered for superior results in tilt-up applications. It consists of three helix plates welded to a 1 square bar shaft. Each helix plate is specially formed from 3/8 x 44 ksi new steel plate. Our shaft steel has a typical yield strength of 95 ksi, and a typical tensile strength of 130 ksi, making it the strongest helical anchor available in the industry! Products: 7-0 Helical Anchor 5-0 Helical Anchor Extension Anchor to Brace Connector
Notes:
1. All dimensions are in inches unless noted otherwise. 2. Dimensional tolerances shall be +/ 1.5%. 3. Weight of anchor approximately 81 lbs. 4. All welding done as per AWS D1.1 weld procedure. 5. Torque capacity of anchor is 7,000 lbs.
06/09
149

T-16 Pipe Knee Brace
The Dayton Superior T-16 Pipe Knee Brace is an all steel, 1-1/2 diameter knee brace available in 10-6 and 14-6 lengths. The T-16 knee brace is used in conjunction with the T-17 Swivel Coupler to add strength and stability to standard wall braces.
Pipe Brace
T-17 Swivel Coupler (NOT INCLUDED)
To Order: Example:

Knee Brace Anchor
T-16 Pipe Style Knee Brace
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) length. 120, T-16 Pipe Knee Braces, 10-6 long.
T-16 Pipe Knee Brace
The Dayton Superior T-17 Swivel Coupler is designed to attach standard 1-1/2 diameter knee braces to 2 or 2-1/2 diameter wall braces.
T-17 Swivel Coupler
To Order: Example:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) wall brace diameter. 120, T-17 Swivel Couplers for 2 wall braces.
T-17 Swivel Coupler
The Dayton Superior T-17-HD Knee Brace Bracket stiffens and increases the safe working load of T-14, B-9, B-10 and special length jumbo braces. The T-17-HD Bracket eliminates the need for lateral and end bracing.
T-17-HD Knee Brace Bracket*
To Order: Example:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name. 44, T-17-HD Knee Brace Brackets.
T-17-HD Knee Brace Bracket

*U.S. Patent No. 5,943,830
The Dayton Superior T-1 On-Site Pipe Brace is a short, all steel brace with an adjustment range of 7-6 to 8-10 that is handy to have on-site to brace small panels.
T-1 On-Site Pipe Brace
Wall Bracket 3/4 Coil Bolt Swivel Connection
T-1 On-Site Pipe Brace
On-Site Pipe Brace Adjusting Sleeve
To Order:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name. 440, T-1 On-Site Pipe Braces.
3/4 Bolt Floor Bracket
Drill-in or Toggle Insert
Example:
150
06/09
Form Liners
When it is time to choose concrete formliners, make your first choice Dayton Superior. For stock or custom orders, we have you covered. Choose from three product lines: Elasto-TEX, Vinyltite and TherMOform. One will answer your precast concrete needs. Easy to install and easy to strip, Dayton Superior Formliners come in more than 500 contemporary designs and are available in Single Use, Medium Reuse and High Reuse. Repeat patterns eliminate seam lines. Best of all, our formliners are labor saving and money saving, and they provide esthetics to your precast project.
ELASTO-TEX High Re-Use Elastomeric Formliner

Elasto-TEX formliner is produced from a two-component urethane and is mold-bonded to 1/2" HDO plywood, ready for mounting to your forms. It is the preferred formliner material when 25 or more pours, or reuses, are required. Elasto-TEX is available in all existing formliner patterns, as well as custom textures. Its stiffness and compressive strength hold the desired shape during concrete placement and vibration. Its flexibility accommodates almost any desired texture or sculpture effect. Elasto-TEXs' built-in resiliency and toughness result in an exceptional capability for precise reproduction of the desired pattern or texture. Elasto-Tex improved wear resistance provides high reuse factors that could be in excess of 100 times.
VINYLTITE Trapezoidal Interlocking Formliners

For sharp-edged trapezoidal textures, choose VINYLTITE formliners. The use of our VINYLTITE formliner eliminates the costly labor involved in wood construction. You get continuous uniform texture reproduction pour after pour. VINYLTITE is impervious to moisture and it wont swell, bulge or distort design integrity. VINYLTITE is easy to use with superior results. VINYLTITE pre-drilled nailing strip lets you attach the formliner to the concrete slab or form without splitting or tearing. No more unsightly nail head impressions, and less sacking and patching costs. Interlocking joints ensure proper alignment and prevent concrete leakage. Connect the pieces to form large panel sections with no seam lines. Wide ranges of widths and lengths. Lightweight, easy to handle and made of rigid HIPS or ABS plastic, VINYLTITE comes in Single Use, Medium Use, or Heavy Reuse materials. Profiles are available in 6 inches to 18 inches wide, extruded to specified lengths up to 45'-0" for clean installation every time.
THERMOFORM Vacuum-Formed Formliners

THERMOFORM Concrete formliners are rigid plastic liners that are used to achieve detailed patterns and textured concrete surfaces for precast architectural concrete. You may select from a variety of patterns, or custom order to fit your needs at only a nominal additional cost. All patterns are available in three different ranges: Single Use, Medium Reuse and High Reuse. The Single Use, made from styrene, is ideal where the formliner will be used only once. The Medium Reuse, made from ABS materials, can be used up to 10 times. The High Reuse can be used up to 20 times under most conditions. The vacuum-forming technology used in this product line allows virtually unlimited texturing opportunities, offering the most flexibility in custom designed patterns. This low cost reproduction process allows you to add exceptional economic options to the design integrity of your precast concrete projects. Due to the stretching of the plastic sheet material that occurs during the reshaping of the thermoforming process, some patterns with a high degree of texture or relief should not be produced in the thinner, single-use material. Normally supplied in 4' x 10' sheets.
Note: For more information on formliners, request a copy of the Formliner Catalog.
06/09
151
Rustication Strips
Specify Rustication Strips for concrete surfaces when distinct features or reveals are required. Each Rustication Strip is a durable, precision molded piece which contains a metal strap core for attachment to concrete formwork. Rustication Strips are available in a variety of standard shapes to meet almost any project requirement. Dayton Superior Rustication Strips are manufactured in premium ElastoTex material for extensive reuse. Advantages: Sharp, detailed features in finished concrete surfaces. Standard reusable shapes minimize forming costs. Enhances the appearance of exposed concrete elements.
P/C
30755 30756 30757 30758 30759 30760 30761 30762 30763 30764 30765 30766 30767 30768 30769 30770 30771 30772
Base 3/4" x 1" x 1-1/2" x 2" x 1" x 1-1/2" x 2" x 2-1/2" x 3" x 4" x 5" x 6" x 1-1/2" x 2" x 3" x 2" x 3" x 4" x
Ht. 3/4" x 3/4" x 3/4" x 3/4" x 1" x 1" x 1" x 1" x 1" x 1" x 1" x 1" x 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 2" x 2" x 2" x
Top 1/4" 1/2" 1" 1-1/2" 1/2" 1" 1-1/2" 1-3/4" 2-1/4" 3-1/4" 4-1/4" 5-1/4" 1" 1-1/2" 2" 1" 2" 3"
P/C 30776 30777 30778
Base 3/4" x 1" x 1-1/2" x
Ht. 3.4" x 1" x 1-1/2" x
Slope 1-1/16" 1-7/16" 2-1/16"
152
06/09
P/C 30773 30774 30775
Base 1-5/ 32" x 1-1/2" x 2" x
Ht. 1" x 1" x 1" x
Angle 60 53 45
Rustications, Chamfers and other products Manufactured by Victory Bear
Rustications, chamfers and other products manufactured by Victory Bear provide innovative solutions to the designer and the contractor. These products provide significant labor savings in the installation of the rustications and chamfers along with eliminating much of the building finish problems which occur with wood products. And now these products can be found at a Dayton Superior distribution center near you.
SLAB SAVER
2 PVC Edge pieces installed in the bottom of wall panels used to protect floors during panel erection, eliminating damage to the floor slab during panel erection.
RUSTICATION
x 45 degree PVC rustication in widths of 2.25, 2.5, 3.5, 5.5, 8.0 and 11.5. These have the patented Flex Edge Seal, insuring a tight joint with the concrete slab and these utilize the Victory Bear Base Clip for easy installation. 1/2 x 60 degree low profile rustication also available.
SNAP RUSTICATION
Triangular PVC rustication which opens to allow easy installation and then snaps shut to prevent concrete seepage.
BULKHEAD
PVC bulkhead chamfer providing chamfer on both sides of the bulkhead. This product is used with both plywood and 2x materials. It features both the patented Flex Edge Seal and utilizes the Base Clip to secure the product to the floor slab.
BULLNOSE
PVC Single Bullnose chamfers provide the radius edges when the designer desires a different effect from the traditional triangular building edges.
RADIUS CORNER CHAMFERS
6 PVC Radius Corner provides a distinct radius at a fraction of the cost. x 45 degree PVC chamfers in both single and double chamfer versions. This product utilizes the patented Flex Edge Seal and is attached to the floor slab with adhesives or traditional nails or screws.
CHAMFERS LOW PROFILE
1/2 x 60 degree PVC chamfers in both single and double chamfer versions. This product utilizes the patented Flex Edge Seal and is attached to the floor slab with adhesives or traditional nails or screws.
DRIP EDGE CHAMFER
x 45 degree PVC drip edge chamfer for use where doors, windows, dock doors and archways require both a chamfer and drip edge. This product utilizes the patented Flex Edge Seal and is attached to the floor slab with adhesives or traditional nails or screws.
RECESSED WINDOW SYSTEM
A unique utilization of several of the above products with a recessed window chamfer to add a classic detail for doors and windows in the concrete wall panels.
JOINT COVER
PVC Joint Covers provide the building owner an attractive cover for the joints inside of the building. Joint Covers will fit into panel joints between and 1 gaps.
SAW CUT COVER
PVC Saw Cut Cover temporarily seals the floor slab joints with a unique low profile design.
06/09 153
Chemical & Cement Products

FORM RELEASES EPOXIES
Bio-Release EF Econo Strip formerly known as Clean Strip (J-1-A) Clean Strip (J-1-A OTC) discontinued new formula Clean Strip Light Clean Strip formerly known as Clean Strip (J-1) Clean Strip Light formerly known as Clean Strip (J-1 OTC) Clean Strip Citrus formerly known as Clean Strip Gold (J-2) Ultra Light formerly known as Strip Ultra (J-3 V.O.C.) Ultra Fast formerly known as Clean Strip (J-3 PC) Clean Strip (J-3 PCU) discontinued new formula Ultra Light Ultra LC formerly known as Liner Coat (J-4 LC) Epoxies Selection Guide Sure-Anchor Epoxy (J-50) Sure-Anchor I (J-51) Poxy-Fil (J-52) Sure-Grip High Flow Epoxy Grout (J-55) Sure-Inject (J-56) Sure Level Epoxy (J-57) Resi-Bond (J-58)| Rebar Epoxy Spray (J-62)
BONDBREAKERS
Cure Lift EF Sure-Lift (J-6)
EVAPORATION & SURFACE RETARDERS

Sure Etch (J-73) discontinued new formula TopCast Sure Film (J-74) Perma 230 SL Day-Flex Expansion Joint CM 2000 Joint Fill
SEALANTS & EXPANSION JOINTS POLYUREA JOINT FILLER & CONCRETE REPAIR NON-SHRINK GROUTS
White Disapating Cure EF White Pigmented Cure (J-8) Day-Chem White Pigmented Cure-W (J-9-A) Day-Chem White Pigmented Cure (J-10-W) Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W) Clear Dissipating Cure EF Crete-Cure Concentrate (J-12) Day-Chem Sil-Cure (J-13) Day-Chem Hardener (J-15) Day-Chem Sure-Hard (J-17)
CURES & LIQUID HARDENERS
Sure-Grip High Performance Grout 1107 Advantage Grout Sure-Grip Grout Dri-Pak Sure-Grip Utility Grout HD-50 HD-45 Day-Chem Perma Patch Thin Resurfacer HD-25 Polyfast LPL & FS Re-Crete 5 & 20 Minute Patch Waterstop & Fast Set Ankertite Architectural Finish
CURES & SEALS
REPAIR MORTARS
Safe Cure & Seal (J-18) Safe Cure & Seal: 25% (J-22 WB) Safe Cure & Seal: 30% (J-19) General Purpose Cure & Seal (J-20) Cure & Seal 30 EF Day-Chem Cure & Seal: 1315 (J-22) Day-Chem Cure & Seal U.V.: 1315 (J-22 U.V.) Day-Chem Cure & Seal: 30% (J-23) Day-Chem Cure & Seal U.V.: 30% (J-23 U.V.) Safe Seal (J-24) discontinued new formula Ultra Seal EF Safe Seal Heavy Duty (J-24 H.D.) discontinued new formula Ultra Seal EF Ultra Seal EF Day-Chem Aggre-Gloss (J-25) Day-Chem Aggre-Gloss (J-25-OTC) Day-Chem Anti-Spall (J-33) Day-Chem Tuf Seal (J-35) Day-Chem Tuf Seal (J-35 OTC) Day-Chem Poxy Plus (J-36) Day-Chem Poxy Plus 100 (J-37) Day-Chem Urethane V.O.C. (J-39)
SEALERS
SHAKE-ON FLOOR HARDENERS & TOPPINGS

Emery Tuff Ferro Tuff Ferro Tuff Light Reflective Quartz Tuff Emery Tuff Top Emery Non-Slip
EPOXY & URETHANE FLOOR COATINGS
FLOOR LEVELERS
WATER REPELLENTS
Weather Worker WB (J-26 WB) Weather Worker Heavy Duty WB (J-27 WB) Weather Worker S-40 (J-29) Weather Worker S-40 WB (J-29 WB) Weather Worker S-100 (J-29-A)
LeveLayer (formerly LeveLayer I) EconoLevel (formerly LeveLayer II) Level Topping (formerly LeveLayer III) Level Topping EXT (formerly LeveLayer IV) Sure Finish Sure Patch
MASONRY & CONCRETE COATINGS

Seal Coat 1000 Smooth Coat
BONDING AGENTS & LATEX ADDITIVES

Day-Chem Ad Bond (J-40) Superior Concrete Bonder (J-41) LeveLayer Bonding Agent (J-42)
Citrus Peel (J-48) Grean Bean Clean 154
CLEANERS & STRIPPERS
Day-Chem Sure Hard J-17DP DP Maintenance Cleaner DP Maintenance Cleaner Plus DP Maintenance Refresher DP Maintenance SS
06/09
DIAMOND POLISH FLOOR SYSTEMS
Chemical & Cement Products Select Products

The following pages feature a small selection of the chemical and cement products available from Dayton Superior. For a complete listing visit daytonsuperior.com
FORM RELEASE
Bio-Release EF
Earth Friendly Bio-Based Form Release
NATIONAL
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT LOCAL
CURES & LIQUID HARDENERS

Day-Chem White Pigmented Cure-W (J-9-A)
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT LOCAL
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT
Earth friendly (EF) concrete form release agent. Truly green, biodegradable material containing no petroleum products. Product is a bio-based formula containing 0 VOCs, making it VOC compliant in all regions. Bio-Release EF is ideal for architectural concrete, precast, and general forming applications. EF is non-staining and minimizes concrete dusting. Properly applied, product will not impede the adhesion of subsequent treatments to the concrete, including paints or coatings.
NATIONAL
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT
Water Based-State D.O.T.-ASTM C-309 A true water based curing comp o u n d c o n t a i n i n g w h i t e pigments and other solids in suspension. Day-Chem White Pigmented Cure-W is a water based formulation and as a result, contains no organic solvents. It is environmentally safe and is V.O.C. compliant. Approved by numerous state D.O.T.s.
Meets Specifications:
V.O.C.
ASTM C-309, Type 2, Class A AASHTO M-148, Type 2, Class A
Ultra Light
Premium Form Release
COMPLIANT LOCAL
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT
Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W)

Resin Cure-Water Based-ASTM C-309
NATIONAL
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT LOCAL
Ultra Light is Dayton Superiors premium, chemically reactive form release that is V.O.C. compliant. It is ideal for architectural and precast concrete as well as for general forming applications. This top quality product promotes easy stripping, minimizes form cleanup, is non-staining, and reduces the number of surface air voids (bugholes) on regular and superplasticized concrete.
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT
An all resin curing compound that is water based and V.O.C. compliant. It is a ready-to-use curing compound for use on freshly finished, horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces. Meets Specifications:
CLEANERS & STRIPPERS

Green Bean Clean
NATIONAL
ASTM C-309, Type 1, Class A & B AASHTO M-148, Type 1, Class A & B Also available with Red Fugitive Dye. CRD-C-300 & State Formulations Available.
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT LOCAL
Soybean Based Gel Stripper Green Bean Clean is an industrial strength, environmentally safe, soybean based gel stripper.
COMPLIANT
V.O.C.
Day-Chem Sure Hard (J-17)

Combination Hardening, Dustproofing and Sealing
NATIONAL
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT LOCAL
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT
Designed to remove most sealers, cure & seals, urethanes, paint & varnish from concrete, masonry and wood. Green Bean Cleans thick gel consistency enables long dwell times to reduce number of applications and is ideal for both vertical and horizontal.
CURE & BONDBREAKER

Cure Lift EF
Water based Cure & BondBreaker
NATIONAL
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT LOCAL
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT
Cure Lift EF is a bio-based, environmentally friendly cure and bondbreaker for tilt-up and lift slab construction. A s a b o n d b r e a k e r, C u r e L i f t E F i s u n s u r p a s s e d i n p r o v i d i n g a c l e a n , e a s y l i f t . I n p e rformance testing, Cure Lift EF required fewer pounds of pressure to release and lift panels than other brands.
A colorless, odorless solution of reactive chemicals in water which deeply penetrates concrete and masonry surfaces to seal, densify and harden them. Sure Hard is ideal for concrete floors because it makes them more durable and abrasion resistant in heavy traffic, and resists rubber tire marks. The treated Sure Hard floor actually acquires a more polished appearance over time. Sure Hard resists oil and water penetration and it will not make the concrete floor slippery. Sure Hard can be applied to new and old floors and is completely odor free. Meets Specifications:
Depth of Penetration 5mm into concrete Water Absorption ASTM C-642 Sure Hard 3.4% in 24 hours Leading Competitor 4.25% in 24 hours Compressive Strength ASTM C-140 Concrete treated with Sure Hard 3,910 psi (27 MPa) - average Untreated concrete - 3,461 psi (23.9 MPa) - average Water Vapor Transmission Rate - 217 grams/sq.ft./24 hours
AVAILABLE WITH EXTENDED DUSTPROOFING WARRANTIES. U.S.D.A. Approved
06/09
155

CURES & SEALS
Safe Cure & Seal (J-18, J-19)
NATIONAL
BONDING AGENT
Day-Chem Ad Bond (J-40)
V.O.C.
LOCAL COMPLIANT
NATIONAL
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT LOCAL
Cure, Seal and Dustproofer Percent Solids Available: 18% (J-18), 30% (J-19) V.O.C. Safe Cure & Seal is a water based acrylic copolymer containing 18% or 30% solids that offers outstanding curing, sealing and dustproofing for freshly finished conc r e t e surfaces. The higher solids content forms a longer Iasting surface coating with a higher gloss finish and it provides excellent cure performance. This product dries to produce a non-yellowing, durable, clear film on concrete. Safe Cure & Seal is ideal for interior applications because it is free of noxious fumes and is nonflammable.
COMPLIANT
Bonding Agent & Latex Admixture
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT
An excellent bonding agent consisting of acrylic latex emulsion used primarily for bonding new t o n e w o r n e w t o o l d c o n c r e t e i n i n t e r i o r o r e x t erior applications. Ad Bond is also extremely effective when used as an admixture with cementi tious products such as patching compounds, coatings, or grouts. As an admixture, Day-Chem Ad Bond not only promotes a strong bond but also greatly increases the strength, durability and resistance to moisture of the finished product. Meets Specifications:
Meets Specifications:
ASTM C 1042 - Bond strength of latex systems used with concrete - Type II
Test Age Bond Strength 28 days 2,436 psi (16.8 MPa) ASTM C 1059 - Latex agents for bonding fresh to hardened concrete - Type II
ASTM C-156 (Method of testing for ASTM C-309) ASTM C-309 Type 1, Class A & B AASHTO M-148, Type 1, Class A & B
Note: Federal Specification TT-C-800 A has been cancelled and is officially replaced by ASTM C-309. Safe Cure & Seal: 30% (J-19) meets the obsolete specification TT-C-800A.
EPOXY ADHESIVE
Sure-Anchor I (J-51)
NATIONAL
WATER REPELLENTS
eather Worker WB (J-26 WB) W Weather Worker WB Heavy Duty (J-27-WB)
Penetrating Water Based Siloxane
We a t h e r Wo r k e r W B ( J - 2 6 -W B ) i s a w a t e r b a s e d emulsion of siloxane (7% or 10% solids) that penetrates into concrete or masonry and provides true, long term, weatherproofing protection. The Weather Worker WB Heavy Duty (J-27-WB) version contains 20% solids.
NATIONAL
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT LOCAL
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT
Epoxy Gel Adhesive, I.C.B.O. Listed
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT
LOCAL
V.O.C.
COMPLIANT
Once Weather Worker WB penetrates the substrate, it chemically reacts with and bonds to the concrete or masonry surface. The invisible film formed by Weather Worker WB will bead water and protect the substrate many times longer than conventional coatings. Aside from its ability to bead water, it allows the substrate to breathe due to its moisture vapor permeability. Meets Specifications: N.C.H.R.P. Report 244 (20% Siloxane) Series II - 87% Reduction in Chloride Ion Content Vapor Transmission - Excellent - No moisture retained after 21 days. Water Penetration Through Masonry ASTM E-514 (10% Siloxane) (With Simulated Wind Driven Rain At 62.5 mph, 100.6 kph) Average Reduction in Leakage Rate - 83%
AVAILABLE WITH LONG TERM WARRANTIES.
Sure-Anchor I is a 100% solids, high modulus, high strength, fast setting, epoxy gel adhesive. It is a two component, moisture i nsensitive structural epoxy adhesive that meets ASTM C-881 and is listed by l.C.B.O. Sure-Anchor I is available in cartridges for easy dispensing, as well as larger, gallon units. Sure-Anchor I is ideal for anchoring bolts, dowels, and reinforcing steel into concrete. It is also ideal for vertical and horizontal structural bonding and patching. Sure-Anchor I may be used to seal cracks and set injection ports prior to injection grouting.
Meets Specifications: ASTM C-881, Type I, II, IV, V, Grade 3, Class B & C Compressive Strength - ASTM D-695: 10,600 psi (73 MPa) at 7 days Concrete Bond Strength - ASTM C-882: 3,000 psi (20 MPa) at 14 days
NON-SHRINK GROUT
1107 Advantage Grout
Non-shrink, Non-metallic Cement Based Grout

1107 Advantage Grout is a non-shrink, non-corrosive, non-metallic grout. It is formulated as a cement based product with high quality raw materials. 1107 Advantage Grout offers the advantages of pump ability and heat and thermal shock resistance, while providing a controlled, net positive expansion. 1107 Advantage is designed for interior and exterior grouting of precast concrete components, structural column base plates, pump and machinery bases, anchoring bolts, rebars, dowels, bearing pads, keyway joints and crane rails. It also finds applications in paper mills, oil refineries, food plants, chemical plants as well as sewage and water treatment plants. It can be used as a patching material
06/09
156

Meets Specifications: Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-shrink Grout: CRD-C 621 ASTIVI C-1 107, Grades A, B, C, ASTIVI C-827
Compressive Strengths - ASTM C-109 1 day 3,000 psi (20.7 MPa) 3 days 5,100 psi (35.2 MPa) 28 days 6,500 psi (44.8 MPa)
REPAIR MORTARS
HD-50
Rapid-Setting, Flowable Concrete Mortar
A latex-modified, fiber reinforced, fast setting concrete repair designed for horizontal areas where high strength and fast setting are required to minimize downtime. It is similar in performance to our Perma Patch, except that it is flowable.
SELF-LEVELING FLOOR TOPPINGS

LeveLayer
Dayton Superior LeveLayer is a cement based, nonshrinking, self-leveling floor underlayment designed for interior use. This single component product by hydration results in a smooth subfloor that typically will accept floor coverings in as little as 14 hours after installation. Just mix LeveLayer with water, pour or pump, and it will seek its own level to produce a smooth, flat, hard surface. LeveLayer can be used to level or create a smooth surface on interior floors. It can be used on new construction projects to correct rough, unfinished, or uneven floors. On restoration projects, use LeveLayer to produce a smooth, even finish over the existing substrate.
Premium Self-Leveling Floor Underlayment
Compressive Strength ASTM C-109 At 75 Degrees F

1 3 1 7 28 hour hours day days days 2,500 3,500 6,145 7,370 7,990 psi psi psi psi psi
(17.2 (24.1 (42.4 (50.8 (55.1
MPa) MPa) MPa) MPa) MPa)
Fluidity Dry-Pack Flowable Flowable Flow 130% 30 sec.
Test Results
1 Day psi MPa 5,000 (34.5) 2,500 (17.2) 2,000 (13.8) Compressive Strength (psi) 3 Day 7 Day 28 Day psi MPa psi MPa psi MPa 7,000 (48.2) 9,000 (62.0) 10,000 (63.0) 5,000 (34.5) 6,000 (41.4) 8,000 (55.2) 4,000 (27.6) 5,000 (34.5) 7,500 (51.7)
Compressive Strength - ASTM C-109

1 day 7 days 28 days 3,000 psi 4,000 psi 5,400 psi
EconoLevel
Bond Strength - ASTM C-882

7 days
2,550 psi (17.6 MPa)
Rapid Freeze/Thaw Test - ASTM C-666 B At 300 Cycles - Samples indicated an average weight loss of .3% with no signs of spalling.
Architectural Finish
Cement based, polymer-modified material Architectural Finish is a single component, cement based, polymer-modified material specially formulated for rubbing, smoothing, resurfacing, repairing and restoring concrete surfaces. Designed with additives for superior bonding characteristics for use on vertical or overhead applications. Material dries a light gray color and can be troweled hard or sanded to provide a smooth finish. Compressive Strength ASTM C-109 - At 75 Degrees F 7 days 5000 psi (34.1 Mpa) 28 days 6000 psi (41.3 Mpa)
Economical Self-leveling Floor Underlayment Dayton Superior EconoLevel is a polymer-modified cement based self-leveling underlayment designed for interior use. This single component product by hydration results in a smooth subfloor that typically will accept floor coverings in as little as 14 hours after installation. Just mix EconoLevel with water, pour or pump, and it will seek its own level to produce a smooth, flat, hard surface. EconoLevel can be used to level or create a smooth surface on interior floors. It can be used on new construction projects to correct rough, unfinished, or uneven floors. On restoration projects, use EconoLevel to produce a smooth, even finish over the existing substrate.


Level Topping (formerly LeveLayer III)

Level Topping is Dayton Superiors premium, cement ased, non-shrinking, self-leveling topping designed for b traffic. This single component product provides a tough surface that typically accepts light traffic 24 hours after installation. Level Topping can be used to level or create a solid surface on interior industrial type concrete floors. It can be used on new construction projects to correct rough or unfinished concrete and to level out uneven floors. Do not use outdoors.
Heavy Duty Self-Leveling Floor Topping
Re-Crete 20 Minute Patch

Cement Base Repair Material
An all-purpose patching material containing Portland Cement, special hardeners and set accelerators to provide a fast setting patch. Re-Crete 20 Minute has an initial set of 15 minutes and a final set of 35 minutes. Re-Crete remains plastic for about 15 minutes, permitting shaping and molding. Re-Crete is ideal for vertical and overhead patching with its putty-like consistency. It can be used to repair concrete pipes, precast concrete products, concrete steps, walls, ceilings and concrete blocks. Colors: Gray and Light Gray.
06/09

(20.7 MPa) (34.5 MPa) (48.3 MPa)
Abrasion Resistance - ASTM C-944 Load 20 Kfg Level Topping - Average Weight Loss - 8.3 g.
157
P-8-A Architectural Post Forms
Dayton Superior P-8-A Architectural Post Forms are used with precast concrete panels in the construction of highway sound barriers. Twenty (20) standard sizes are available. Surface textures can be applied to the concrete posts with the use of one of the many Dayton Superior formliner patterns.
P-8-A Architectural Post Form
P-8-B Bridge Girder Forms

Dayton Superior Bridge Girder Forms are designed in compliance with American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) and Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) specifications to produce quality bridge girders. Heavy duty for durability. Free-standing or self-stressing applications. A vailable in standard AASHTO, bulb tee and modified configurations. F urnished as a total system or for use with existing pallets or accessories.
P-8-B Bridge Girder Form
P-8-M Median Barrier Forms

The creative design and quality construction of the Dayton Superior Median Barrier Forms provides for increased production. These Median Barrier Forms can be furnished with conventional or rollover bulkheads. Standard design for inverted casting. 3/16" skin plate. May be anchored to slab for conventional casting. Available in 10'-0" and 12'-0" lengths. Units can be bolted together for longer product length. Specials available on request. Rail span member included for support of customer blockout or insert.
P-8-M Medium Barrier Form
P-8-P Pile Forms

Dayton Superior standard pile forms are available for piles in single or double configurations up to 24" square for free-standing casting. Also available for self-stressing applications. V arious shapes and configurations are available to meet specific requirements.
H eavy duty construction and quality workmanship means long form life.
P-8-P Pile Form
158
PMS Plastic Mesh Spacer
The Dayton Superior PMS Plastic Mesh Spacer provides an economical reinforcing spacer for pipe and manhole precast products. The Plastic Mesh Spacer provides a positive connection by clipping onto the intersection of the reinforcement wires. The Plastic Mesh Spacer maintains concrete cover from 1" to 2" in 1/4" increments to fit most of the industry needs. Three leg design - secure attachment to reinforcing mesh against falling concrete and vibration in pipe 1", 1-1/4", 1-1/2", 1-3/4", 2" -- matches industry needs Solid plastic with small point - no rusting 2 wire sizes W5 (.252") and W8 (.319") - used with small and large concrete pipe Use in Precast or any application wire mesh is used
PMS Plastic Mesh Spacer
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) cover height 2 cartons, Mesh Spacer, 1-1/2" cover height
PLW EZ Lok Wheel

Made from engineered composite resins, the E-Z Lok Wheel was designed for use in situations where a lightweight wheel is not sufficient to maintain proper location of the reinforcement. Once attached, this wheel will stay in place. The unique symmetrical design maintains a consistent cover, regardless of the rebar size. With a wider hub, the E-Z Lok Wheel will not rack or fall off. The E-Z Lok Wheel offers flexibility and strength with multiple hub diameters for rebar sizes from 3/8" (No. 3) to 3/4" (No. 6) and is furnished in a variety of clearances. It is suitable for use with larger diameters of welded wire fabric. The wheel will not change shape and will always provide uniform concrete cover. The E-Z Lok Wheel is perfect for any vertical application where concrete cover must be maintained and is the ultimate side form spacer when strength counts. Note: Concrete cover is defined as the distance from where the reinforcement sits in the hub of the wheel to the outside of the wheel (where it contacts the form). The E-Z Lok Wheel meets all requirements and qualifies as a CRSI Class 1 Bar Support. Available in the following cover heights: 1-1/2", 2-1/2" and 3". Sold in full cartons only.
PIW EZ Lok Wheel
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) cover height 2 cartons, E-Z Lok Wheels, 1-1/2" cover height
PSW Space Wheel

The Space Wheel is excellent for use in wall, beam and column applications. It is made from composite resins, allowing the cardboard forming to roll easily over the reinforcement without damaging the face of the form, while still maintaining proper alignment. Minimum form contact provides for excellent concrete finish without the rust marks or blemishes typical to other methods of spacing reinforcement. Designed to fit on a wide range of bar and wire mesh sizes assuring accurate placement, the Space Wheel is the perfect light duty side-form spacer.
PSW Space Wheel
Note: Concrete cover is defined as the distance from where the reinforcement sits in the hub of the wheel to the outside of the wheel (where it contacts the form).
To Order:
The Space Wheel meets all requirements and qualifies as a CRSI Class Example: 1 Bar Support. Available in cover heights from 3/8" to 3". Sold in full 2 cartons, Space Wheels, 1-1/2" cover height cartons only.
06/09
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) cover height
159
Tower Bar Chair
Tower Bar Chairs are used to support widely spaced, light steel in slab and deck construction. Each bar chair provides two cover heights that are clearly marked for field identification. Available in 3/4" to 2-1/2" cover heights and sold in full cartons only.
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) cover height. Example: 2 cartons (900), 121288, Tower Bar Chairs, 1-3/4" to 2" cover.
PBC Tower Bar Chair
Tower High Chair

Tower High Chairs are strong, preassembled supports for heavy applications. The design features staple-down feet, quick-tie hooks and two service heights. The two service heights allow reduced inventory and save warehouse space. Tower High Chairs are well suited for applications where multiple layers of steel are required. Chairs are available in cover heights from 2-3/4" to 10" and sold in full cartons only. An optional Sand Plate (sold separately) is available for use on grade.
PTC Tower High Chair
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) cover height. Example: 2 cartons (300), 121295, Tower High Chairs, 6" cover.
PTSCB Tower Chair Sand Plate
E-Z Chair
E-Z Chairs are designed for superior strength and stability. They are well suited for tilt-up, precast and poured-in-place slab applications. E-Z Chairs are available in 3/4" to 6" cover heights for rebar sizes up to #11. E-Z Chairs are sold in full cartons only. An Optional Sand Plate is available for use on grade or in sandwich panel applications.
To Order: Example:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) cover height. 4 cartons (700), 121271, E-Z Chairs, 4" cover.
PEZ E-Z Chair
PSP Sand Plate
Castle Chair
Castle Chairs are uniquely designed with a wide base ring to provide stability on poorly compacted or expansive soils. Each Castle Chair offers two cover heights to allow for variation in grading. Castle Chairs are strong enough to carry the weight of ironworkers and concrete finishers, but will not damage moisture protection membranes. Castle Chairs are available in 1-1/2" to 4-1/4" cover heights and are sold in full cartons only. Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) cover height
To Order: Example:

2 cartons (700), 122837, Castle Chairs, 2-1/2" to 2-3/4" cover.
PCC Castle Chair
160
X-Chair
X-Chairs are light weight, inexpensive chairs used for supporting rebar and wire mesh in horizontal applications. The X-Chairs novel design produces a very strong support with minimal surface contact. X-Chairs are available in 1/2" to 2" cover heights and are sold in full cartons only.
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) cover height. Example: 1 carton (1100), 122834, X-Chairs, 2" cover.
PXC X-Chair
E-Z LOK Slab Bolster

E-Z LOK Slab Bolster provides a strong, stable support and spacer for rebar in slab or wall applications. The E-Z LOK Slab Bolster can be used in individual 32" sections or the sections can be snapped together to satisfy any job-required length. E-Z LOK Slab Bolster is available in 3/4" to 3" cover heights and is sold in full cartons only.
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) cover height. Example: 2 cartons (300), 78066, E-Z LOK Slab Bolster, 2" cover.
PSB E-Z LOK Slab Bolster
PSBU Strongback SBU

Supports top layer in Double Mat application, rebar or wire mesh, slabs, heavy duty on-grade, corrugated decking, side-form spacer-below-grade applications only, precast. Cover heights from 1" to 3-1/4" (1/4" increments) Designed for use with epoxy-coated/FRP/stainless steel/ galvanized rebar Intended for use in corrosive environments Spans corrugations in elevated deck applications Suitable for use on vapor barriers or insulating foam No overlap required Manufactured in 30" lengths in standard boxes Special packaging available in 5' or 10' sections, bundled and palletized Strong as metal SBU
PSBU StrongBack SBU To Order: Example:

Specify: (1) quantity, (2) cover size, (3) name. 20 Boxes, 2-1/2" Cover Panel Pads.
Panel Pads
Panel Pads were created especially for use in the precast industry for stacking. When placed on top of the precast concrete elements, the Panel Pads will support the weight of additional elements without damage to either element. The unique bubble design allows the precast materials to cure uniformly. Panel Pads are manufactured to snap in half. The 2-1/2" x 5-1/2" pads are spaced around the precast unit.
1/2" THICK
5-1/2"
2-1/2"
To Order: Example:

06/09
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name. PPP - Panel Pads 200, Panel Pads.
161
Slab Bolster
Dayton Superior Slab Bolster is used to support lower slab steel from the slab form. Legs are spaced on 5" centers. Available in 3/4" to 3" heights in 5" lengths and in bright basic, galvanized, plastic protected or stainless steel protected. Slab Bolster
Rebar
Slab Bolster
Beam Bolster
Dayton Superior Beam Bolster is used to support lower beam steel from the soffit form. Legs are spaced on 2-1/2" centers. Available in 1-1/2" to 5" heights in 5" lengths. Manufactured in bright basic, galvanized, plastic protected or stainless steel protected.
Rebar
Beam Bolster
Beam Bolster
Continuous High Chair

Dayton Superior Continuous High Chair provides support for upper slab steel, eliminating the need for carrier bars. Fabricated in 2" to 15" heights, in 5" lengths with legs spaced on 7-1/2" centers. Available in bright basic, plastic protected, galvanized and stainless steel protected.
Rebar
Individual High Chair

Dayton Superior Individual High Chair is used to support upper steel directly or by means or a carrier bar. Available in bright basic, plastic protected, galvanized and stainless steel protected.
High Chair
Rebar
Individual High Chair
Bar Chair
Dayton Superior Bar Chair is used to support widely spaced light steel in slab construction. Available in 3/4" to 2" heights in bright basic, plastic protected, galvanized and stainless steel protected.
Rebar
Bar Chair
Bar Chair
Joist Chair
Dayton Superior Joist Chair is used to support two bottom bars in the ribs of joist or grid type slabs. Available in 4", 5" and 6" overall widths; 1/4", 1" and 1-1/2" heights; and in bright basic, plastic protected, galvanized and stainless steel protected.
Rebar
Joist Chair
Joist Chair
162
06/09
K-50 Void Retention Insert
The Dayton Superior K-50 Void Retention Inserts primary function is to conveniently position and firmly hold in place void tubes used in precast slabs, piles, box beams, etc. Use of the K-50 inserts eliminates the possibility of the voids floating to the surface when concrete is placed in the forms. The K-50 insert is injection-molded from nonreactive, noncorrosive thermoplastic and is designed to fit 10"- and 12"-diameter voids.
3" 2"
2-3/4"
9-1/4"
K-50 Void Retention Insert
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name. 200, K-50 Void Retention Inserts.
The Dayton Superior Round Void Hold Down is a one piece unit that completely encompasses the round void tube and is attached to your form using a standard 3/4" coil bolt. This prevents movement in any direction of the void tube. Maintained in stock for 10" and 12" OD Diameter Void Tubes, other sizes available.
H-13 Round Void Hold Down
To Order: Example:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) dia of tube (4) finish plain, galv. 200, H-13 12" Round Hold Down, Plain
06/09
163
P-80 Shim Strips
ayton Superior P-80 Shim Strips assure accurate placing D and leveling of tilt-up panels and other architectural and structural components because they:
will not rust, rot or leach when exposed to wet surfaces arrive at the job site in precise thicknesses and lengths. eliminate the need for saws, hand tools or cutters.
and have no odor. A definite saving in time, labor and money is realized. The strips are easily applied and lie flat. decrease damage potential to the adjacent concrete components. Point projection of aggregate is absorbed without fracture or effect on the load-bearing characteristics. Engineering Data: The pertinent physical properties of Dayton Superior plastic shims are presented as follows:
are made in convenient thicknesses, lengths and widths permit field changes in load bearing requirements with are less expensive and safer than steel. They have extreme
stock on hand. stability and eliminate rust-stained concrete and spalling. are size scored for convenience of application. Prevent waste material can be readily picked up and stored in the open for future use. will not fracture under load. are available from stock in thicknesses of 1/16", 1/8" and 1/4" and lengths of 3" and 4". The widths of 3" x 24" are scored every 3" and the widths of 4" x 24" are scored every 2". This allows for easy snap off as needed. Additional sizes available on request. are impervious to liquids, ground chemicals, alkalis and microorganisms. The continuing performance characteristics are stable and predictable. allowing precise leveling and alignment.
Compressive strength of 8,000 to 9,000 psi with no
fracture, even at 26,000 psi. Classed as slow-burning with no toxic fumes. Negligible cold flow characteristics; i.e., less than 1% at 1,000 psi and 73 F. for 10,000 hours. Coefficient of linear expansion is 3 to 5 x 10-5 inches/inch/C
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) length. Example: 300, P-80 Shim Strips, 1/4" x 4".
P-81 Shimpak
Dayton Superior shimming material is an engineered multipolymer plastic specifically formulated for use by the construction industry. This material provides an optimum combination of physical properties for a shim in applications where high compressive strength and load bearing are important. It facilitates the placement of tilt-up structural, and other architectural, members. These pre-assembled packages of heavy duty shims are designed for large precast units. Shimpaks are very advantageous in precise placing and leveling of large panels.
Precast Element
P-81 Shimpaks
Foundation or other structural member.
Their use eliminates time consuming correction of
elastomeric drift and makes alignment safer and easier.
Popular sizes are 4" x 6" and 4" x 4" packs which are
1-1/16" thick. Shimpaks are made up of shims in the following thickness sequence: one 1/16", three 1/4" and two 1/8". Tilt-up panels can be levelled within 1/16" by removing or adding one or more elements. removal or addition of elements.
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) size. Example: 200 packs, P-81 Shimpaks, 4" x 6".
Shimpaks are held together with a resilient band for easy Alternate sizes available on request.
164
06/09
P-82 Bearing Strips
D esigned for use with prestressed
concrete plank between the plank and any surface, such as poured or precast concrete, steel or masonry. A bsorb projecting aggregate stress preventing plank or sill damage without effect on the load bearing characteristics. A llow faster erection because of easier positioning. N onslip surface ensures positive placement. Permit thermal motion and point rotation without an elastomeric layer. Test data available on request.
Available in full cartons only. Each carton holds 300 2" x 48" strips.
P-82 Bearing Strips

Width
Thicknesses of 1/8" and 1/4" in stock. Lengths of 48" in stock. Widths of 24", scored at 2" intervals for easy snap off and flexibility in use. Alternate sizes or scorings available on request.
Thickness
P-83 Horseshoe Spacers

N o staining, no rust, no corrosion,
even with aluminum. L ess expensive than steelno plating required. L ightweight and preciseeasy to handle and transport. C ut to size or prescored for easy on-site snap-off.
Width 2" Length 3"
Length
Slot Size
P-83 Horseshoe Spacer

P-83 Horseshoe Spacer Selection Chart
Thickness 1/16", 1/8" or 1/4" Slot Size 13/16" x 2-7/16"
4" 1/16", 1/8" or 1/4" 13/16" x 2-15/16" 3" Available with holes, other slot sizes or different width, length or thickness on special order. Minimum order 100 pcs. of each thickness and size.
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) size. Example: 2 cartons, P-82 Bearing Strips, 1/4" x 48"
P-84 Korolath Core Plugs

Core plugs designed for manufacturers of prestressed hollow core plugs Lightweight, easy-to-insert, block off grout flow E xclusive "wall" taper design of plastic plugs assures tight fit Plug numbers refer to the diameter of the core holes, not the thickness of the plank
Number 400 600 800
Diameter 4" 6" 8"
Plugs/Carton 1,000 2,000 1,000
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) size. Example: 2 cartons, P-84 Core Plugs, No. 600
06/09
P-84 Korolath Plugs

165
F-67, F-68, and F-69 Ceiling Hangers
F-67 Ceiling Hanger
The Dayton Superior F-67 Ceiling Hanger is designed for Flexicore deck slabs. Two sizes of ceiling hangers accommodate all five of the deck slabs. The 13" ceiling hanger fits the 10" and 12" deck slabs. The F-67 hanger is placed between the slabs before keyways are grouted and topping placed.
5/8" 3/8" 4" 2" 2" 1"
3/4"
F-67
6"
F-68
6" or 10"
7/8 "
F-69
3/8" diameter
F-68 Ceiling Hanger

The Dayton Superior F-68 Ceiling Hanger is commonly used with double tees. The hanger is placed between the tees and used to hang ceilings, utilities, etc. The wide T of the hanger provides a large bearing area. 6" length is standard; other lengths are available on request.
9" or 13"
3/8" diameter
/2" "
3/8" diameter
7/8 "
1-1
1"
1"
7/8
1" Flexicore Deck 2" Topping Precast Double Tees 2" Topping Hollow Core Slab
F-69 Ceiling Hanger

The Dayton Superior F-69 Ceiling Hanger is normally used between hollow core slab members to support suspended ceilings or utilities. Standard lengths are 6" and 10". Other lengths are available on request.
2" Topping
F-67
F-68
F-69
Ceiling hangers can be placed where required but are commonly spaced at 2 ft. intervals throughout the beam or slab length to provide for future hanger requirements. All hangers are made from galvanized stock.
Gauge 16 12 Type F-67 F-67 Safe Working Load with Keyway Grouted and 2" Topping 200 lbs. 400 lbs. Type F-68, F-69 F-68, F-69 Safe Working Load with 2" Topping 400 lbs. 600 lbs.
To Order: Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name,

(3) gauge, (4) length.
Example: 1,200 pcs., F-68 Ceiling Hangers,

12 gauge, 6" long.
Note: Hangers must have minimum of 2" topping slab in place and properly cured to adequately develop safe working load. With properly applied topping, approximate safety factor is 3 to 1.
F-75 Marble Facing Anchor

The Dayton Superior F-75 Marble Facing Anchor is a special stainless steel anchor used for anchoring marble, slate, thin limestone, etc., to precast work. The hooks are placed into predrilled holes in the marble and poured in with the 8 Gauge Stainless Steel Wire Type concrete. Other sizes are available 430 or 304 on special order.
2-3/4" 4" 2-1/2"
To Order:
166
06/09
Cushion-Lock Reglet Type B-4
PVC Construction No Reaction with Concrete No Caulking - now or ever 100% Leakproof No Exposed Metal Nails 10 ft. Lengths
This Strip is pulled off just prior The advanced design of this reglet offers a number of to installation of counterflashMade of PVC (polyvinyl exclusive features, yet the in-place cost is actually lower than ing. Easily removed. chloride) Plastic /060" thick, highest that of conventional reglets. The completely enclosed design quality, ASTM-D1784-81 Class 14333D. of the B-4 Reglet prevents any concrete from entering during pouring operation. just prior to the installation of the counter-flashing, the integral protective strip is pulled off, exposing a clean recess ready to receive the counterflashing and no caulking is needed as the snap-in and lock-in patented features of this reglet provides a 100% leakproof joint, yet future removal of the counterflashing for inspection or repair of roofing material is possible.
Recommended gauges for counterflashing are .020" to .032" maximum for aluminum or zinc; 26 to 24 gauge for steel; 16 or 20 oz. for copper. Fast and easy installation of counterflashing can be made under all weather conditions. Each order for type B-4 Reglet is supplied with sufficient connector plugs and installation instructions with a full-size template pattern for counterflashing.
Specifications
Specify Dayton Superior Type B-4 Reglets and counterflashing in sheet metal section of specs. Sample specs.: Use Cushion-Lock Type B-4 Reglet of PVC (polyvinyl chloride) plastic ASTM-D1784-81, Class 14333D, as manufactured by Dayton Superior Corporation.
Connector Plugs
Connector Plugs, made from flexible PVC 3" long are supplied with B-4 Reglet. They serve both to connect lengths of Reglet together, with adjoining openings perfectly aligned, as well as a plug to keep concrete from entering reglet at ends. Plugs may be easily removed to installation of counterflashing.
Installation
Counterflashing snaps and locks in position. Fastener is concealed and protected by counterflashing. DO NOT rivet or fasten ends of counterflashing together. A. R eglet is fastened to form at 12" O.C. with 6 or 8 penny double-headed nail. B. C oncave design provides spring-like action to hold reglet tightly against form lumber, when nail is driven home. C. R eglet in position, after form is stripped, but prior to removal or integral protective strip. D. L ip acts as waterstop to prevent any possible water seepage behind reglet.
06/09
167
Insulation Fixings are specifically designed for attaching foam insulation plates or foam panels in insulated wall applications. They are primarily used in marine dock construction. With its button head, wire mesh stays firmly in place over the foam panel. Available in 1" to 4" heights, 1,250 per carton.
Insulation Fixings
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name, (3) height. Example: 2 cartons, insulation fixing, 4" height.
PFA Insulation Fixings
T-68 ACA 1000 is a specially designed, high strength, fast-tack contact spray adhesive to bond:
T-68 ACA 1000 Construction Spray Adhesive

Concrete Wood Metal MDF Plastic High Density Foam
Precast applications include:
General Purpose Reveal/Rustication Strips Chamfer Blockouts Etc.

Shipped ground freight only no air freight Cal Voc Complaint Product available Rialto, CA only T68ACA1000C Coverage Rate/Can
250 275 Sq. Ft.
T-68 ACA 1000 Construction Spray Adhesive Sold only by the case: 12 cans per case. One case minimum order.
To Order:
Specify: (1) quantity, (2) name. Example: 3 cases, T-68 ACA 1000 Construction Spray Adhesive.
168
06/09
Magnets and Accessories

P-153 Magnetic Steel Chamfer and Reveal
Dayton Superior offers a variety of shapes of P-153 Magnetic Steel Chamfer's and Reveals. All offer unlimited reuses. The magnets are embedded in the steel and sealed with an epoxy material to insure no damage form concrete or maximum reuse. Chamfers are typically 1/2" x 1/2", 3/4" x 3/4", and 1" x 1". Reveals can be made to fit most requirements. Many of these products are available in rigid plastic that offers a lower expense to the precaster but a smaller reuse factor. A flexible 3/4" x 3/4" rubber chamfer is available when radius precast shapes are encountered.
Custom On/Off Magnet
P-154 On/Off Magnets, Cam Magnets, Button, Loaf Magnets & Accessories
Dayton Superior has a wide variety of magnets for use in precast forms. ON/OFF MAGNETS Strong adhersion and shear capacity - 650# to 2500# adhersion Easy to turn on or off using 5/8" wretch with 90, 1/4 turn of end rotor Magnet attraction only on bottom of magnet Accepts standard op adapters or custom adapters provided by Dayton Superior CAM MAGNETS Magnet is always on but easy to release from steel using built in cam release arm Magnet attraction along sides and bottom Available in different styles: Flat, Floating, Hole-Former, Notch Strong adhesion and shear capacity for small magnet, up to 1000# adhesion BUTTON MAGNETS 1 Ton and 2.5 Ton Adhesion Capacities standard - other sizes available Easy push down button engages magnet & easy release from steel, using butt and release tool Attachment to forms brackets available Release tool available to reduce labor LOAF MAGNETS Standard sizes 3", 5", and 11" - custom sizes available Magnet is always on but can be released from steel using separate release arm Used in many applications including inside steel rails and securing wood forms in place Attachments to forms brackets available MANHOLE STEP MAGNET & RADIUS Size available for flat walls for 12", 16" & 24" steps Step pins available for all step manufacturer's products Separate tool used to remove step pin assembly from concrete Eliminates the need to drill holes in core for step pins HOLE FORMERS & DUCK MAGNETS Sizes available to fit into any size block-out, hole former or mandrel Different magnetic holding strengths available Eliminates the need to drill opening in concrete after it has been cast BOOT GASKETS Utilizes magnet with Cam Release Arm Special fabricated attachment mechanisms available Available for any size boot gasket Available in hinged model for 90 degree attachment PVC PIPE ATTACHMENT MAGNET Pipe Holding Magnets Light Duty Urethane Pipe Holding Magnets Heavy Duty - Steel
06/09
Cam Magnet
Custom Setting Plug
Lift Insert Recess Member
Loaf Magnet
169
A-97 Modular Forms
Dayton Superior has steel frame, plywood faced panels, fillers, corners and other components to save time and improve quality when faced with nonstandard, low production precast shapes. They can be hand set for each pour or ganged and reused in the same shape, as often as needed. With this versatile system, almost any forming configuration can be easily constructed. Aluminum forms available in similiar parts and configurations.
Tie
Wedge Bolt
Typical Panel Construction
A-97 Modular Form Typical A-97 Panel
Wall Thickness 1-5/8" Typ. 1/4" Breakback
Wall Thickness Breakback
2-1/8"
A-21-X Flat Tie
Anti-turn Feature: (Crimp or Flat)
A-46 Loop Panel Tie
The Dayton Superior header and pallet forms are designed to lap joints when forming precast boxes in box culvert applications. The standard 5/8" x 2" Fit-up Bolt and Nut configration connects a series of forms to create the dimensions required. Available with Steel Frame or Aluminum Forms.
A-97 Header and Pallet Forms
170
06/09
Notes and Sketches
06/09
171
Notes and Sketches
172
06/09
Notes and Sketches
06/09
173
Notes and Sketches
174
06/09
Notes and Sketches
06/09
175
Notes and Sketches
176
06/09
Notes and Sketches
06/09
177
Notes and Sketches
178
06/09
Contact Information
Dayton Superior Technical Services
Dayton Superior Technical Service Centers are well staffed with trained personnel to service the needs of users of Dayton Superior quality precast products. Eastern Technical Service Center 721 Richard Street Miamisburg, OH 45342 Telephone (937) 866-0711 (800) 745-3700 Fax (937) 866-9768 Western Technical Service Center 12070 Telegraph Rd., Suite 104 Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670 Telephone (562) 946-5504 (800) 745-3512 Fax (562) 944-2451
06/09
179

Precast Handbook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Precast Handbook

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Precast Handbook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What products are featured in the catalog?

What products are featured in the catalog?

What are some forming applications described?

What are some forming applications described?

06/09

Sandwich Panel Connectors

Miscellaneous Connection Inserts

Lifting/Handling Inserts and Accessories

Utility Anchor Lifting System

Swift Lift System

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

Sandwich Panel Connectors

Miscellaneous Connection Inserts

Lifting/Handling Inserts and Accessories

Utility Anchor Lifting System

Swift Lift System

Safety Notes and Product Application

Intended Use of Product

New Safe Working Load =

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

Factors Affecting the Load-Carrying Capacity of an Insert

The Mechanical Strength of the Insert

The Strength of the Concrete

P concrete Concrete Surface

Surface Area of Theoretical Shear Cone 35

Surface Area of Theoretical Shear Cone 35

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

Safe Working Load Reduction Factor

P 1/2" Minimum to Develop Insert Safe Working Load

Wrong (Too High)

Wrong (Angled) Illustration I

Wrong (Too Low)

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

1e 1.5 c7 c (c al) d o nd o f n Shear Safe Working Load (lbs.) =

Combined Shear and Tension

NC Threaded Bolt Capacities

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

ASTM Standards For Corrosion Resisting Coatings

.250" diameter or larger .250" diameter or larger

eel, 3/16" and thicker Steel, 3/16" and thicker

eel, 3/16" and thinner Steel, 3/16" and thinner

ASTM B-633 Continued ASTM B-633 Continued Type 1 2 3 4

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

General and Technical Information

4 M aneuvering from vertical to horizontal

1 M aneuvering from horizontal to vertical with edge anchors

2 M aneuvering from vertical to horizontal with edge anchors

3 M aneuvering from horizontal to vertical with face anchors

200, P-52 Swift Lift Anchors, 4 ton, 9-1/2" long